diff --git a/docs/dvx_api_reference.html b/docs/dvx_api_reference.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7fa4c5e..0000000 --- a/docs/dvx_api_reference.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1960 +0,0 @@ - - - - -DVX GUI API Reference - - - - -
-
-

DVX GUI API Reference

-

DVX GUI API Reference

-

DOS Visual eXecutive -- Complete public API documentation generated from source headers.

-

The DVX GUI is built as a five-layer architecture. Each layer is defined in its own header file. This reference covers every public function, type, and constant.

-

Layers

- -

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-

dvxTypes.h -- Shared Type Definitions

-

dvxCursor.h -- Cursor Definitions

-

dvxVideo.h -- Layer 1: VESA VBE Video Backend

-

dvxDraw.h -- Layer 2: Drawing Primitives

-

dvxComp.h -- Layer 3: Dirty Rectangle Compositor

-

dvxWm.h -- Layer 4: Window Manager

-

dvxApp.h -- Layer 5: Application API

-

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-
-
-

dvxTypes.h -- Shared Type Definitions

-

dvxTypes.h -- Shared Type Definitions

-

Central type definitions shared across all five layers of the DVX GUI stack. Every header includes this file. Contains no function definitions -- only structs, enums, typedefs, and compile-time constants.

-

Core Structures

-

PixelFormatT

-

Describes the pixel encoding for the active VESA video mode. Populated once at startup from the VBE mode info block, then treated as read-only.

-
  Field                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  int32_t bitsPerPixel                         8, 15, 16, or 32
-  int32_t bytesPerPixel                        1, 2, 2, or 4
-  uint32_t redMask, greenMask, blueMask        Bitmasks for each color channel
-  int32_t redShift, greenShift, blueShift      Bit position of each color field
-  int32_t redBits, greenBits, blueBits         Number of bits per channel
-

DisplayT

-

Single display context passed by pointer through every layer. All drawing targets the backBuf; only dirty rects are flushed to lfb.

-
  Field                                  Description
-  -----                                  -----------
-  int32_t width, height                  Screen dimensions in pixels
-  int32_t pitch                          Bytes per scanline
-  PixelFormatT format                    Active pixel format
-  uint8_t *lfb                           Mapped linear framebuffer (VESA LFB)
-  uint8_t *backBuf                       System RAM backbuffer
-  uint8_t *palette                       768 bytes for 8-bit mode, NULL otherwise
-  int32_t clipX, clipY, clipW, clipH     Current clip rectangle
-

RectT

-

Rectangle in origin + extent form. Used throughout the compositor, window manager, and widget layout engine.

-
  Field              Description
-  -----              -----------
-  int32_t x, y       Top-left corner
-  int32_t w, h       Width and height
-

BlitOpsT

-

Vtable for hot-path span operations. Resolved at init time based on pixel depth. On DOS, these dispatch to hand-written asm (rep stosl / rep movsd).

-
  Field                    Description
-  -----                    -----------
-  SpanFillFnT spanFill     Fill a horizontal span with a solid color
-  SpanCopyFnT spanCopy     Copy a horizontal span between buffers
-  int32_t bytesPerPixel    Bytes per pixel for the active mode
-  int32_t pitch            Bytes per scanline
-

BevelStyleT

-

Bevel drawing parameters. Swapping highlight/shadow flips raised vs. sunken appearance.

-
  Field                  Description
-  -----                  -----------
-  uint32_t highlight     Lighter color (top/left edges)
-  uint32_t shadow        Darker color (bottom/right edges)
-  uint32_t face          Interior fill color (0 = no fill)
-  int32_t width          Border thickness in pixels (typically 2)
-

BitmapFontT

-

Fixed-width 8-pixel-wide bitmap font descriptor. One size provided: 8x16 (standard VGA ROM font, CP437 encoding).

-
  Field                          Description
-  -----                          -----------
-  int32_t charWidth              Fixed width per glyph (always 8)
-  int32_t charHeight             Glyph height (14 or 16)
-  int32_t firstChar              ASCII code of first glyph (typically 0)
-  int32_t numChars               Number of glyphs (typically 256)
-  const uint8_t *glyphData       Packed 1bpp data, charHeight bytes per glyph
-

ColorSchemeT

-

All UI colors pre-packed into display pixel format at init time. Theme support is achieved by swapping this struct.

-
  Field                                              Description
-  -----                                              -----------
-  uint32_t desktop                                   Desktop background color
-  uint32_t windowFace                                Window body / chrome face
-  uint32_t windowHighlight                           Bevel highlight (top/left edge)
-  uint32_t windowShadow                              Bevel shadow (bottom/right edge)
-  uint32_t activeTitleBg, activeTitleFg              Focused window title bar
-  uint32_t inactiveTitleBg, inactiveTitleFg          Unfocused window title bar
-  uint32_t contentBg, contentFg                      Window content area default colors
-  uint32_t menuBg, menuFg                            Menu bar and popup background/text
-  uint32_t menuHighlightBg, menuHighlightFg          Menu item highlight
-  uint32_t buttonFace                                Button face color
-  uint32_t scrollbarBg, scrollbarFg, scrollbarTrough Scrollbar element colors
-  uint32_t cursorFg, cursorBg                        Mouse cursor colors
-

ColorIdE

-

Enum for addressing individual colors in ColorSchemeT. Order matches struct field order.

-

Values: ColorDesktopE, ColorWindowFaceE, ColorWindowHighlightE, ColorWindowShadowE, ColorActiveTitleBgE, ColorActiveTitleFgE, ColorInactiveTitleBgE, ColorInactiveTitleFgE, ColorContentBgE, ColorContentFgE, ColorMenuBgE, ColorMenuFgE, ColorMenuHighlightBgE, ColorMenuHighlightFgE, ColorButtonFaceE, ColorScrollbarBgE, ColorScrollbarFgE, ColorScrollbarTroughE, ColorCursorFgE, ColorCursorBgE, ColorCountE.

-

DirtyListT

-

Fixed-capacity list of dirty rectangles. Dynamic array, grows on demand.

-
  Field              Description
-  -----              -----------
-  RectT *rects       Dynamic array of dirty rectangles
-  int32_t count      Current number of dirty rects
-  int32_t cap        Allocated capacity
-

WindowT

-

Central window object. Each window owns a persistent content backbuffer and receives events through callback function pointers.

-
  Field                                                          Description
-  -----                                                          -----------
-  int32_t id                                                     Unique window identifier
-  int32_t appId                                                  Shell app ID (0 = shell itself)
-  int32_t x, y, w, h                                            Outer frame position and dimensions
-  int32_t contentX, contentY, contentW, contentH                 Content area inset from frame
-  char title[MAX_TITLE_LEN]                                      Window title text (max 128 chars)
-  bool visible, focused, minimized, maximized, resizable, modal  Window state flags
-  bool contentDirty                                              true when contentBuf has changed
-  bool needsPaint                                                true until first onPaint call
-  int32_t maxW, maxH                                             Maximum dimensions
-  int32_t preMaxX, preMaxY, preMaxW, preMaxH                    Saved geometry before maximize
-  uint8_t *contentBuf                                            Per-window content backbuffer
-  int32_t contentPitch                                           Content buffer bytes per row
-  uint8_t *iconData                                              Icon pixel data, NULL if none
-  int32_t iconW, iconH, iconPitch                                Icon image dimensions and pitch
-  MenuBarT *menuBar                                              Menu bar (NULL if no menus)
-  ScrollbarT *vScroll, *hScroll                                  Scrollbars (NULL if not present)
-  struct WidgetT *widgetRoot                                     Widget tree root (NULL if none)
-  MenuT *contextMenu                                             Right-click context menu
-  AccelTableT *accelTable                                        Keyboard accelerator table
-  void *userData                                                 Application-defined data pointer
-

Callbacks:

-
  Callback                                                     Description
-  --------                                                     -----------
-  onPaint(WindowT *win, RectT *dirtyArea)                      Content repaint requested
-  onKey(WindowT *win, int32_t key, int32_t mod)                Key press
-  onKeyUp(WindowT *win, int32_t scancode, int32_t mod)         Key release
-  onMouse(WindowT *win, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t btn)    Mouse event (content-relative)
-  onResize(WindowT *win, int32_t newW, int32_t newH)           Window resized
-  onClose(WindowT *win)                                        Close requested
-  onMenu(WindowT *win, int32_t menuId)                         Menu item or accelerator activated
-  onScroll(WindowT *win, ScrollbarOrientE orient, int32_t val) Scrollbar value changed
-  onCursorQuery(WindowT *win, int32_t x, int32_t y)            Return CURSOR_* for hit position
-  onFocus(WindowT *win)                                        Window gained focus
-  onBlur(WindowT *win)                                         Window lost focus
-

WindowStackT

-

Z-ordered window stack (front-to-back: index count-1 is topmost). Owns system-wide drag/resize/scroll interaction state.

-
  Field                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  WindowT **windows                            Dynamic array of window pointers
-  int32_t count, cap                           Current count and allocated capacity
-  int32_t focusedIdx                           Stack index of focused window
-  int32_t dragWindow, dragOffX, dragOffY       Active drag state
-  int32_t resizeWindow, resizeEdge             Active resize state
-  int32_t scrollWindow, scrollOrient, scrollDragOff  Active scroll drag state
-

MenuT / MenuItemT / MenuBarT

-

Menu system types. Fixed-size label buffers (MAX_MENU_LABEL = 32). Cascading submenus supported via MenuItemT.subMenu pointer.

-
  Field                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  MenuItemT.label              Item text (supports & accelerator markers)
-  MenuItemT.id                 Application-defined command ID
-  MenuItemT.type               MenuItemNormalE, MenuItemCheckE, or MenuItemRadioE
-  MenuItemT.separator          true = horizontal divider line
-  MenuItemT.enabled, checked   Item state
-  MenuItemT.subMenu            Child menu for cascading (NULL if leaf)
-  MenuBarT.activeIdx           Open popup index (-1 = none)
-

ScrollbarT

-

Window-level scrollbar state. Managed by the WM layer, drawn after content.

-
  Field                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  ScrollbarOrientE orient      ScrollbarVerticalE or ScrollbarHorizontalE
-  int32_t min, max             Scroll range
-  int32_t value                Current position
-  int32_t pageSize             Visible portion (for proportional thumb sizing)
-  int32_t x, y, length         Computed screen position and track length
-

AccelTableT / AccelEntryT

-

Per-window keyboard accelerator table. Entries are matched against keystrokes in the event loop and fire onMenu(cmdId) on match.

-
  Field                      Description
-  -----                      -----------
-  AccelEntryT.key            ASCII character or KEY_Fxx constant
-  AccelEntryT.modifiers      Bitmask of ACCEL_CTRL, ACCEL_SHIFT, ACCEL_ALT
-  AccelEntryT.cmdId          Command ID passed to onMenu
-

VideoModeInfoT

-

Describes an available video mode (enumerated at init).

-
  Field            Description
-  -----            -----------
-  int32_t w, h     Resolution
-  int32_t bpp      Bits per pixel
-

CursorT

-

Software-rendered 16x16 cursor using AND/XOR mask encoding.

-
  Field                          Description
-  -----                          -----------
-  int32_t width, height          Cursor dimensions (always 16x16)
-  int32_t hotX, hotY             Hot spot coordinates
-  const uint16_t *andMask        AND mask (0 = draw pixel, 1 = transparent)
-  const uint16_t *xorData        XOR data (0 = black, 1 = white where AND = 0)
-

Bevel Convenience Macros

-
  Macro                      Description
-  -----                      -----------
-  BEVEL_RAISED(cs, bw)       Raised bevel style from ColorSchemeT ptr and border width
-  BEVEL_SUNKEN(cs, face, bw) Sunken bevel style with explicit face color
-  BEVEL_TROUGH(cs)           1px sunken trough (for scrollbar tracks)
-  BEVEL_SB_BUTTON(cs)        1px raised scrollbar button
-

Chrome Constants

-
  Define                  Value   Description
-  ------                  -----   -----------
-  CHROME_BORDER_WIDTH     4       Outer frame border width
-  CHROME_TITLE_HEIGHT     20      Title bar height
-  CHROME_TITLE_PAD        4       Title text padding
-  CHROME_INNER_BORDER     2       Inner chrome border
-  CHROME_MENU_HEIGHT      20      Menu bar height
-  CHROME_TOTAL_TOP        26      Total inset from top of frame to content
-  CHROME_TOTAL_SIDE       6       Total inset from side of frame to content
-  CHROME_TOTAL_BOTTOM     6       Total inset from bottom of frame to content
-  CHROME_CLOSE_BTN_SIZE   16      Close button gadget size
-

Hit Test Constants

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  HIT_CONTENT     0       Content area
-  HIT_TITLE       1       Title bar
-  HIT_CLOSE       2       Close gadget
-  HIT_RESIZE      3       Resize border
-  HIT_MENU        4       Menu bar
-  HIT_VSCROLL     5       Vertical scrollbar
-  HIT_HSCROLL     6       Horizontal scrollbar
-  HIT_MINIMIZE    7       Minimize gadget
-  HIT_MAXIMIZE    8       Maximize gadget
-  HIT_NONE        -1      No window hit (desktop)
-

Mouse Button Flags

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  MOUSE_LEFT      1       Left mouse button
-  MOUSE_RIGHT     2       Right mouse button
-  MOUSE_MIDDLE    4       Middle mouse button
-

Accelerator Modifier Flags

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  ACCEL_SHIFT     0x03    Shift key (matches BIOS shift state bits)
-  ACCEL_CTRL      0x04    Ctrl key
-  ACCEL_ALT       0x08    Alt key
-

Extended Key Codes

-
  Define                  Description
-  ------                  -----------
-  KEY_F1 .. KEY_F12       Function keys (scancode | 0x100)
-  KEY_INSERT              Insert key
-  KEY_DELETE              Delete key
-  KEY_HOME                Home key
-  KEY_END                 End key
-  KEY_PGUP                Page Up key
-  KEY_PGDN                Page Down key
-

Resize Edge Flags

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  RESIZE_NONE     0       No resize edge
-  RESIZE_LEFT     1       Left edge
-  RESIZE_RIGHT    2       Right edge
-  RESIZE_TOP      4       Top edge
-  RESIZE_BOTTOM   8       Bottom edge (combinable via OR for corners)
-

Utility Macros

-
  Macro           Description
-  -----           -----------
-  DVX_MIN(a, b)   Return the smaller of two values
-  DVX_MAX(a, b)   Return the larger of two values
-
-
-

dvxCursor.h -- Cursor Definitions

-

dvxCursor.h -- Cursor Definitions

-

Embedded 16x16 mouse cursor bitmaps compiled as static const data. No external cursor files. Uses the standard AND/XOR mask encoding from the IBM VGA hardware cursor spec.

-

Cursor Shape IDs

-
  Define                      Value   Description
-  ------                      -----   -----------
-  CURSOR_ARROW                0       Standard arrow (hot spot at tip)
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_H             1       Horizontal resize (left/right arrows)
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_V             2       Vertical resize (up/down arrows)
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_DIAG_NWSE     3       NW-SE diagonal resize
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_DIAG_NESW     4       NE-SW diagonal resize
-  CURSOR_BUSY                 5       Hourglass (wait)
-  CURSOR_CROSSHAIR            6       Crosshair for placement
-  CURSOR_COUNT                7       Total number of cursor shapes
-

Data

-

dvxCursors[CURSOR_COUNT]

-

Static const array of CursorT structs, indexed by CURSOR_xxx constants. Each entry includes the AND mask, XOR data, dimensions, and hot spot coordinates.

-
-
-

dvxVideo.h -- Layer 1: VESA VBE Video Backend

-

dvxVideo.h -- Layer 1: VESA VBE Video Backend

-

The lowest layer. Responsible for VESA VBE mode negotiation, LFB mapping via DPMI, system RAM backbuffer allocation, pixel format discovery, and color packing. LFB-only design: bank switching is deliberately unsupported.

-

videoInit

-
int32_t videoInit(DisplayT *d, int32_t requestedW, int32_t requestedH, int32_t preferredBpp);
-

Probe VBE for a mode matching the requested resolution and depth, enable it, map the LFB into DPMI linear address space, and allocate a system RAM backbuffer. preferredBpp is a hint; the closest available depth is used if an exact match is not found.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  d                Display context to initialize
-  requestedW/H     Desired screen resolution
-  preferredBpp     Preferred bits per pixel (8, 15, 16, or 32)
-

Returns: 0 on success, negative on failure.

-

videoShutdown

-
void videoShutdown(DisplayT *d);
-

Restore VGA text mode (mode 3), unmap the LFB, and free the backbuffer. Safe to call even if videoInit() failed.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context to shut down
-

packColor

-
uint32_t packColor(const DisplayT *d, uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b);
-

Pack an RGB triplet into the display's native pixel format. For direct-color modes (15/16/32 bpp), returns a packed pixel value using shift/mask fields. For 8-bit mode, returns the nearest palette index via Euclidean distance in RGB space.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context (provides pixel format)
-  r, g, b     Color components (0-255)
-

Returns: Native pixel value suitable for direct framebuffer write.

-

setClipRect

-
void setClipRect(DisplayT *d, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Set the clip rectangle on the display. All subsequent draw operations clip to this rectangle. The caller must save and restore the clip rect around scoped operations.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  x, y, w, h Clip rectangle in screen coordinates
-

resetClipRect

-
void resetClipRect(DisplayT *d);
-

Reset the clip rectangle to the full display dimensions.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-
-
-

dvxDraw.h -- Layer 2: Drawing Primitives

-

dvxDraw.h -- Layer 2: Drawing Primitives

-

All 2D drawing operations: rectangle fills, bitmap blits, text rendering, bevels, lines, and cursor rendering. Every function draws into the display's backbuffer and clips to the current clip rectangle. This layer is stateless beyond the clip rect on DisplayT.

-

drawInit

-
void drawInit(BlitOpsT *ops, const DisplayT *d);
-

Populate a BlitOpsT with the correct span functions for the display's pixel depth. Must be called once after videoInit().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ops         BlitOpsT to populate
-  d           Initialized display context
-

rectFill

-
void rectFill(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, uint32_t color);
-

Fill a rectangle with a solid color. Clips to the display clip rect. Workhorse for backgrounds, window fills, and clear operations.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y, w, h Rectangle to fill
-  color       Packed pixel color
-

rectCopy

-
void rectCopy(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t dstX, int32_t dstY, const uint8_t *srcBuf, int32_t srcPitch, int32_t srcX, int32_t srcY, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Copy a rectangle from an arbitrary source buffer into the backbuffer. Used to blit per-window content buffers during compositing.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  d             Display context
-  ops           Blit operations vtable
-  dstX, dstY    Destination position in backbuffer
-  srcBuf        Source pixel buffer
-  srcPitch      Source buffer bytes per row
-  srcX, srcY    Origin within source buffer
-  w, h          Rectangle dimensions to copy
-

rectCopyGrayscale

-
void rectCopyGrayscale(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t dstX, int32_t dstY, const uint8_t *srcBuf, int32_t srcPitch, int32_t srcX, int32_t srcY, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Copy a rectangle with grayscale conversion. Each pixel's RGB is converted to luminance (0.299R + 0.587G + 0.114B) for a disabled/grayed appearance.

-
  Parameter       Description
-  ---------       -----------
-  d               Display context
-  ops             Blit operations vtable
-  dstX, dstY      Destination position
-  srcBuf, srcPitch Source buffer and pitch
-  srcX, srcY      Source origin
-  w, h            Rectangle dimensions
-

drawBevel

-
void drawBevel(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, const BevelStyleT *style);
-

Draw a beveled frame. Top/left edges in highlight color, bottom/right in shadow. Interior filled with face color if non-zero.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y, w, h Outer bevel rectangle
-  style       Bevel colors and width
-

drawChar

-
int32_t drawChar(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, char ch, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Draw a single character glyph. When opaque is true, the background fills the entire cell; when false, only foreground pixels are drawn (transparent background).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Character position
-  ch          Character to draw
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

Returns: Advance width (always charWidth).

-

drawText

-
void drawText(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, const char *text, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Draw a null-terminated string. Calls drawChar per character.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Start position
-  text        Null-terminated string
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

drawTextN

-
void drawTextN(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, const char *text, int32_t count, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Optimized batch text rendering for a known character count. Computes clip bounds once, fills background in a single rectFill, then overlays glyph foreground pixels. Significantly faster than per-character drawChar for long runs (terminal rows, list items).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Start position
-  text        Character buffer (not required to be null-terminated)
-  count       Number of characters to render
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

textWidth

-
int32_t textWidth(const BitmapFontT *font, const char *text);
-

Return the pixel width of a null-terminated string (strlen(text) * charWidth).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  font        Bitmap font
-  text        Null-terminated string
-

Returns: Width in pixels.

-

accelParse

-
char accelParse(const char *text);
-

Scan text for an & prefix and return the following character as a lowercase accelerator key. "&File" returns 'f', "E&xit" returns 'x'.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  text        Text with optional & accelerator marker
-

Returns: Lowercase accelerator character, or 0 if none.

-

drawTextAccel

-
void drawTextAccel(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, const char *text, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Draw text with & accelerator markers. The character after & is drawn underlined to indicate the keyboard shortcut. && produces a literal &. Used for menu items and button labels.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Start position
-  text        Text with & markers
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

textWidthAccel

-
int32_t textWidthAccel(const BitmapFontT *font, const char *text);
-

Measure text width excluding & markers (so "&File" measures as 4 chars).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  font        Bitmap font
-  text        Text with optional & markers
-

Returns: Width in pixels.

-

drawMaskedBitmap

-
void drawMaskedBitmap(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, const uint16_t *andMask, const uint16_t *xorData, uint32_t fgColor, uint32_t bgColor);
-

Draw a 1-bit AND/XOR masked bitmap. Used for software-rendered mouse cursors.

-
  Parameter       Description
-  ---------       -----------
-  d               Display context
-  ops             Blit operations vtable
-  x, y            Screen position
-  w, h            Bitmap dimensions
-  andMask         AND transparency mask (one uint16_t per row)
-  xorData         XOR color data
-  fgColor, bgColor Cursor foreground and background packed colors
-

drawTermRow

-
void drawTermRow(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t cols, const uint8_t *lineData, const uint32_t *palette, bool blinkVisible, int32_t cursorCol);
-

Render an entire row of terminal character cells (ch/attr byte pairs) in a single pass. Colors looked up from a 16-color palette. Attribute bit 7 controls blink.

-
  Parameter       Description
-  ---------       -----------
-  d               Display context
-  ops             Blit operations vtable
-  font            Bitmap font
-  x, y            Row start position
-  cols            Number of columns
-  lineData        Packed ch/attr byte pairs (2 bytes per cell)
-  palette         16-entry packed color palette
-  blinkVisible    false = hide blinking characters
-  cursorCol       Column for inverted text cursor (-1 = none)
-

drawFocusRect

-
void drawFocusRect(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, uint32_t color);
-

Draw a 1px dotted rectangle (alternating pixels). Used for keyboard focus indicators, matching the Windows 3.x focus rectangle convention.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y, w, h Focus rectangle bounds
-  color       Dot color (packed)
-

drawHLine

-
void drawHLine(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, uint32_t color);
-

Draw a horizontal line (1px tall).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y        Start position
-  w           Width in pixels
-  color       Packed pixel color
-

drawVLine

-
void drawVLine(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t h, uint32_t color);
-

Draw a vertical line (1px wide).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y        Start position
-  h           Height in pixels
-  color       Packed pixel color
-
-
-

dvxComp.h -- Layer 3: Dirty Rectangle Compositor

-

dvxComp.h -- Layer 3: Dirty Rectangle Compositor

-

Tracks changed screen regions and ensures only dirty regions are redrawn and flushed to video memory. The compositing pipeline: mark dirty, merge overlapping rects, redraw desktop + windows (back-to-front, painter's algorithm), flush to LFB.

-

dirtyListInit

-
void dirtyListInit(DirtyListT *dl);
-

Zero the dirty rect count. Called at the start of each frame.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list to initialize
-

dirtyListAdd

-
void dirtyListAdd(DirtyListT *dl, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Enqueue a dirty rectangle. Grows dynamically; triggers merge at a soft capacity limit.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list
-  x, y, w, h Dirty rectangle in screen coordinates
-

dirtyListMerge

-
void dirtyListMerge(DirtyListT *dl);
-

Consolidate the dirty list by merging overlapping and adjacent rects. Uses iterative pairwise merge: if combining two rects does not increase total area beyond a threshold, they are merged. Reduces compositor passes and LFB flush operations.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list to merge
-

dirtyListClear

-
void dirtyListClear(DirtyListT *dl);
-

Reset the dirty list to empty (sets count to 0).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list to clear
-

flushRect

-
void flushRect(DisplayT *d, const RectT *r);
-

Copy a rectangle from the system RAM backbuffer to the LFB (video memory). This is the only place the real framebuffer is written. Uses platform-specific fast copy (rep movsd on DOS) for each scanline.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  r           Rectangle to flush
-

rectIntersect

-
bool rectIntersect(const RectT *a, const RectT *b, RectT *result);
-

Compute the intersection of two rectangles.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  a, b        Input rectangles
-  result      Output: intersection rectangle (valid only when return is true)
-

Returns: true if the rectangles overlap, false if disjoint.

-

rectIsEmpty

-
bool rectIsEmpty(const RectT *r);
-

Test whether a rectangle has zero or negative area.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  r           Rectangle to test
-

Returns: true if w <= 0 or h <= 0.

-
-
-

dvxWm.h -- Layer 4: Window Manager

-

dvxWm.h -- Layer 4: Window Manager

-

Manages the window lifecycle, Z-order stack, chrome drawing, hit testing, and interactive operations (drag, resize, scroll). The WM owns window geometry and chrome; content is owned by the application via callbacks or the widget system.

-

Initialization

-

wmInit

-
void wmInit(WindowStackT *stack);
-

Zero the window stack. Must be called before any other WM function.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack to initialize
-

Window Lifecycle

-

wmCreateWindow

-
WindowT *wmCreateWindow(WindowStackT *stack, DisplayT *d, const char *title, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, bool resizable);
-

Allocate a new window, initialize its geometry and content buffer, and push it to the top of the Z-order stack. Returns with all callbacks NULL; the caller should set onPaint/onKey/etc. before the next event loop iteration.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  d           Display context
-  title       Window title text
-  x, y        Initial position
-  w, h        Initial outer frame dimensions
-  resizable   true = allow user resize
-

Returns: Pointer to new WindowT, or NULL on failure.

-

wmDestroyWindow

-
void wmDestroyWindow(WindowStackT *stack, WindowT *win);
-

Free the window's content buffer and all attached resources (menu bar, scrollbars, widget tree), remove it from the stack, and dirty the vacated region.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  win         Window to destroy
-

Z-Order and Focus

-

wmRaiseWindow

-
void wmRaiseWindow(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t idx);
-

Move window at stack index idx to the top of the Z-order. Dirties both old and new top positions so overlapping windows get repainted.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list for repaint marking
-  idx         Stack index of window to raise
-

wmSetFocus

-
void wmSetFocus(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t idx);
-

Transfer keyboard focus to the window at stack index idx. Unfocuses the previously focused window and dirties both title bars.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  idx         Stack index of window to focus
-

Geometry

-

wmUpdateContentRect

-
void wmUpdateContentRect(WindowT *win);
-

Recompute contentX/Y/W/H from the window's outer frame dimensions, accounting for chrome borders, title bar, menu bar, and scrollbars. Must be called after any change to frame size or chrome configuration.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to update
-

wmReallocContentBuf

-
int32_t wmReallocContentBuf(WindowT *win, const DisplayT *d);
-

Reallocate the per-window content backbuffer to match current contentW/H. Old buffer contents are lost; caller should trigger a full repaint via onPaint afterward.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to reallocate
-  d           Display context (for bytes-per-pixel)
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on allocation failure.

-

wmMinWindowSize

-
void wmMinWindowSize(const WindowT *win, int32_t *minW, int32_t *minH);
-

Get the minimum window size. Accounts for chrome, gadgets, and menu bar.

-
  Parameter    Description
-  ---------    -----------
-  win          Window
-  minW, minH   Output: minimum width and height
-

Menu Bar

-

wmAddMenuBar

-
MenuBarT *wmAddMenuBar(WindowT *win);
-

Allocate and attach a menu bar to a window. Adjusts content area to make room (CHROME_MENU_HEIGHT pixels). One menu bar per window.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to add menu bar to
-

Returns: Pointer to the new MenuBarT.

-

wmDestroyMenuBar

-
void wmDestroyMenuBar(WindowT *win);
-

Free the menu bar and reclaim the content area.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to remove menu bar from
-

wmAddMenu

-
MenuT *wmAddMenu(MenuBarT *bar, const char *label);
-

Append a dropdown menu to the menu bar. The label supports & accelerator markers (e.g. "&File").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  label       Menu label text
-

Returns: Pointer to the new MenuT to populate with items.

-

wmAddMenuItem

-
void wmAddMenuItem(MenuT *menu, const char *label, int32_t id);
-

Append a clickable item to a menu. The id is passed to the window's onMenu callback when selected.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append to
-  label       Item label (supports & markers)
-  id          Application-defined command ID
-

wmAddMenuCheckItem

-
void wmAddMenuCheckItem(MenuT *menu, const char *label, int32_t id, bool checked);
-

Add a checkbox-style menu item. Check state toggles on click; rendered with a checkmark glyph.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append to
-  label       Item label
-  id          Command ID
-  checked     Initial checked state
-

wmAddMenuRadioItem

-
void wmAddMenuRadioItem(MenuT *menu, const char *label, int32_t id, bool checked);
-

Add a radio-style menu item. Radio groups are defined implicitly by consecutive radio items; selecting one unchecks the others in the group.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append to
-  label       Item label
-  id          Command ID
-  checked     Initial checked state
-

wmAddMenuSeparator

-
void wmAddMenuSeparator(MenuT *menu);
-

Insert a horizontal separator line. Separators are not interactive.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append separator to
-

wmMenuItemIsChecked

-
bool wmMenuItemIsChecked(MenuBarT *bar, int32_t id);
-

Query the checked state of a menu item by command ID. Searches all menus in the bar.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  id          Command ID to query
-

Returns: true if checked.

-

wmMenuItemSetChecked

-
void wmMenuItemSetChecked(MenuBarT *bar, int32_t id, bool checked);
-

Set the checked state of a menu item by command ID. For radio items, setting checked=true also unchecks other radio items in the same group.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  id          Command ID
-  checked     New checked state
-

wmMenuItemSetEnabled

-
void wmMenuItemSetEnabled(MenuBarT *bar, int32_t id, bool enabled);
-

Enable or disable a menu item by command ID.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  id          Command ID
-  enabled     true = enabled, false = grayed out
-

wmAddSubMenu

-
MenuT *wmAddSubMenu(MenuT *parentMenu, const char *label);
-

Create a cascading submenu attached to a parent menu. The child MenuT is heap-allocated and freed when the parent window is destroyed.

-
  Parameter    Description
-  ---------    -----------
-  parentMenu   Parent menu to attach submenu to
-  label        Submenu label text
-

Returns: Pointer to the child MenuT, or NULL on allocation failure.

-

wmCreateMenu

-
MenuT *wmCreateMenu(void);
-

Allocate a heap-resident MenuT for use as a context menu (right-click). Unlike menu bar menus, context menus are standalone allocations. Free with wmFreeMenu().

-

Returns: Pointer to the new MenuT.

-

wmFreeMenu

-
void wmFreeMenu(MenuT *menu);
-

Free a standalone menu allocated with wmCreateMenu(). Also frees any heap-allocated submenu children recursively.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to free
-

Scrollbars

-

wmAddVScrollbar

-
ScrollbarT *wmAddVScrollbar(WindowT *win, int32_t min, int32_t max, int32_t pageSize);
-

Attach a vertical scrollbar to the right edge of the window's content area. Shrinks contentW by SCROLLBAR_WIDTH pixels.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  min, max    Scroll value range
-  pageSize    Visible portion (controls thumb size)
-

Returns: Pointer to the new ScrollbarT.

-

wmAddHScrollbar

-
ScrollbarT *wmAddHScrollbar(WindowT *win, int32_t min, int32_t max, int32_t pageSize);
-

Attach a horizontal scrollbar to the bottom edge. Shrinks contentH by SCROLLBAR_WIDTH pixels.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  min, max    Scroll value range
-  pageSize    Visible portion
-

Returns: Pointer to the new ScrollbarT.

-

Drawing

-

wmDrawChrome

-
void wmDrawChrome(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, const ColorSchemeT *colors, WindowT *win, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Draw the window frame: outer bevel, title bar with text, close/minimize/maximize gadgets, and menu bar if present. Drawing is clipped to the intersection with clipTo.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font for title text
-  colors      Color scheme
-  win         Window to draw chrome for
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle to clip drawing to
-

wmDrawContent

-
void wmDrawContent(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, WindowT *win, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Blit the window's content backbuffer into the display backbuffer, clipped to the dirty rect. Pure copy operation (no drawing).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  win         Window
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle
-

wmDrawScrollbars

-
void wmDrawScrollbars(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const ColorSchemeT *colors, WindowT *win, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Draw scrollbars (track, arrows, proportional thumb) for a window. Drawn after content so scrollbars overlay the content area edge.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  colors      Color scheme
-  win         Window
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle
-

wmDrawMinimizedIcons

-
void wmDrawMinimizedIcons(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const ColorSchemeT *colors, const WindowStackT *stack, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Draw icons for all minimized windows along the bottom of the screen. Each icon shows a scaled preview of the window's content with a beveled border.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  colors      Color scheme
-  stack       Window stack
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle
-

Hit Testing

-

wmHitTest

-
int32_t wmHitTest(const WindowStackT *stack, int32_t mx, int32_t my, int32_t *hitPart);
-

Determine which window and chrome region is under the given screen coordinates. Iterates front-to-back (highest Z first) so the topmost window wins.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  mx, my      Screen coordinates
-  hitPart     Output: HIT_CONTENT, HIT_TITLE, HIT_CLOSE, etc.
-

Returns: Stack index of hit window, or -1 for desktop.

-

wmResizeEdgeHit

-
int32_t wmResizeEdgeHit(const WindowT *win, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Determine which edge(s) of a window's border zone are targeted for resize.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  mx, my      Screen coordinates
-

Returns: Bitmask of RESIZE_LEFT / RESIZE_RIGHT / RESIZE_TOP / RESIZE_BOTTOM.

-

wmMinimizedIconHit

-
int32_t wmMinimizedIconHit(const WindowStackT *stack, const DisplayT *d, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Hit-test minimized icons at the bottom of the screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  d           Display context
-  mx, my      Screen coordinates
-

Returns: Stack index of the minimized window, or -1.

-

Drag and Resize

-

wmDragBegin

-
void wmDragBegin(WindowStackT *stack, int32_t idx, int32_t mouseX, int32_t mouseY);
-

Begin a window drag operation. Records the mouse offset from the window origin.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  stack         Window stack
-  idx           Stack index of window to drag
-  mouseX/Y      Current mouse position
-

wmDragMove

-
void wmDragMove(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t mouseX, int32_t mouseY, int32_t screenW, int32_t screenH);
-

Update window position during an active drag. Dirties both old and new positions.

-
  Parameter      Description
-  ---------      -----------
-  stack          Window stack
-  dl             Dirty list
-  mouseX/Y       Current mouse position
-  screenW/H      Screen dimensions (for clamping)
-

wmDragEnd

-
void wmDragEnd(WindowStackT *stack);
-

End the current drag operation. Clears dragWindow state.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-

wmResizeBegin

-
void wmResizeBegin(WindowStackT *stack, int32_t idx, int32_t edge, int32_t mouseX, int32_t mouseY);
-

Begin a window resize operation. Records which edge(s) are being dragged.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  idx         Stack index
-  edge        Bitmask of RESIZE_xxx flags
-  mouseX/Y    Current mouse position
-

wmResizeMove

-
void wmResizeMove(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, int32_t *mouseX, int32_t *mouseY);
-

Update window dimensions during an active resize. Enforces MIN_WINDOW_W/H and maxW/maxH constraints. Reallocates content buffer and calls onResize if size changed. mouseX/mouseY are in/out: clamped on return for cursor warping.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  mouseX/Y    In/out: mouse position (clamped on return)
-

wmResizeEnd

-
void wmResizeEnd(WindowStackT *stack);
-

End the current resize operation. Clears resizeWindow state.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-

Scrollbar Interaction

-

wmScrollbarClick

-
void wmScrollbarClick(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t idx, int32_t orient, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Handle an initial click on a scrollbar. Determines what was hit (arrows, trough, or thumb) and either adjusts the value immediately or begins a thumb drag.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  idx         Stack index of window
-  orient      SCROLL_VERTICAL or SCROLL_HORIZONTAL
-  mx, my      Click screen coordinates
-

wmScrollbarDrag

-
void wmScrollbarDrag(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Update the scroll value during an active thumb drag. Maps mouse position along the track to a proportional scroll value.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  mx, my      Current mouse position
-

wmScrollbarEnd

-
void wmScrollbarEnd(WindowStackT *stack);
-

End an active scrollbar thumb drag.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-

Minimize / Maximize / Restore

-

wmMaximize

-
void wmMaximize(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, WindowT *win);
-

Maximize a window. Saves current geometry, then expands to screen or maxW/maxH bounds.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  win         Window to maximize
-

wmMinimize

-
void wmMinimize(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, WindowT *win);
-

Minimize a window. Hides the window and shows an icon at the bottom of the screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  win         Window to minimize
-

wmRestore

-
void wmRestore(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, WindowT *win);
-

Restore a maximized window to its pre-maximize geometry.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  win         Maximized window to restore
-

wmRestoreMinimized

-
void wmRestoreMinimized(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, WindowT *win);
-

Restore a minimized window (show it again and remove the icon).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  win         Minimized window to restore
-

Minimized Icon Layout

-

wmMinimizedIconPos

-
void wmMinimizedIconPos(const DisplayT *d, int32_t index, int32_t *x, int32_t *y);
-

Compute the screen position of a minimized icon by ordinal index. Icons wrap into rows from bottom to top when the screen fills up.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  index       Ordinal index of the minimized icon
-  x, y        Output: screen position
-

wmMinimizedIconRect

-
void wmMinimizedIconRect(const WindowStackT *stack, const DisplayT *d, int32_t *y, int32_t *h);
-

Compute the screen rect covering all minimized icon rows. Used to dirty the icon area when windows are minimized or restored.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  d           Display context
-  y, h        Output: vertical extent of icon area
-

Miscellaneous

-

wmSetTitle

-
void wmSetTitle(WindowT *win, DirtyListT *dl, const char *title);
-

Set the window title and dirty the title bar for repaint.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  dl          Dirty list
-  title       New title text
-

wmSetIcon

-
int32_t wmSetIcon(WindowT *win, const char *path, const DisplayT *d);
-

Load an icon image for a window from a file. Converts to display pixel format.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  path        Image file path
-  d           Display context
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-
-
-

dvxApp.h -- Layer 5: Application API

-

dvxApp.h -- Layer 5: Application API

-

The topmost layer and the public-facing API. Aggregates all lower layers into a single AppContextT. Applications interact exclusively through dvx*() functions and window callbacks. The event loop follows a cooperative model: poll, dispatch, composite, yield.

-

AppContextT

-

Single monolithic context that owns all GUI state. Contains the display, window stack, dirty list, blit ops, font, color scheme, popup state, cursor state, mouse/keyboard state, tooltip state, wallpaper buffer, video mode list, and various configuration fields. Allocated on the caller's stack or statically.

-

Initialization and Shutdown

-

dvxInit

-
int32_t dvxInit(AppContextT *ctx, int32_t requestedW, int32_t requestedH, int32_t preferredBpp);
-

Initialize the entire GUI stack: video mode, input devices, font, color scheme, cursor shapes, and internal state. Single entry point for starting a DVX application.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  ctx              Application context to initialize
-  requestedW/H     Desired screen resolution
-  preferredBpp     Preferred bits per pixel
-

Returns: 0 on success, negative on failure.

-

dvxShutdown

-
void dvxShutdown(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Tear down the GUI stack in reverse order: destroy all windows, restore text mode, release input devices. Safe to call after a failed dvxInit().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxChangeVideoMode

-
int32_t dvxChangeVideoMode(AppContextT *ctx, int32_t requestedW, int32_t requestedH, int32_t preferredBpp);
-

Switch to a new video mode live. Reallocates the backbuffer, all window content buffers, repacks colors, rescales wallpaper, and repositions off-screen windows.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  ctx              Application context
-  requestedW/H     New resolution
-  preferredBpp     New bits per pixel
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure (old mode restored).

-

Event Loop

-

dvxRun

-
void dvxRun(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Enter the main event loop. Polls input, dispatches events, composites dirty regions, and yields on each iteration. Returns when ctx->running becomes false.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxUpdate

-
bool dvxUpdate(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Process exactly one frame of the event loop. For applications that integrate the GUI into their own main loop (e.g. polling serial ports between frames).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: false when the GUI wants to exit.

-

dvxQuit

-
void dvxQuit(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Request exit from the main event loop (sets ctx->running = false).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Window Management

-

dvxCreateWindow

-
WindowT *dvxCreateWindow(AppContextT *ctx, const char *title, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, bool resizable);
-

Create a window at an explicit screen position. The window is raised to the top, focused, and its entire region is dirtied.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  title       Window title
-  x, y        Screen position
-  w, h        Outer frame dimensions
-  resizable   true = allow user resize
-

Returns: Pointer to new WindowT.

-

dvxCreateWindowCentered

-
WindowT *dvxCreateWindowCentered(AppContextT *ctx, const char *title, int32_t w, int32_t h, bool resizable);
-

Convenience wrapper that centers the window on screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  title       Window title
-  w, h        Outer frame dimensions
-  resizable   true = allow user resize
-

Returns: Pointer to new WindowT.

-

dvxDestroyWindow

-
void dvxDestroyWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Destroy a window, free all its resources, and dirty its former region.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to destroy
-

dvxRaiseWindow

-
void dvxRaiseWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Raise a window to the top of the Z-order and give it focus.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to raise
-

dvxFitWindow

-
void dvxFitWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Resize a window to exactly fit its widget tree's computed minimum size (plus chrome). Used for dialog boxes and fixed-layout windows.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to fit
-

dvxFitWindowW

-
void dvxFitWindowW(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Resize window width only to fit widget tree's minimum width (plus chrome).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to fit
-

dvxFitWindowH

-
void dvxFitWindowH(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Resize window height only to fit widget tree's minimum height (plus chrome).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to fit
-

dvxResizeWindow

-
void dvxResizeWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, int32_t newW, int32_t newH);
-

Programmatically resize a window to the specified outer dimensions.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to resize
-  newW, newH  New outer frame dimensions
-

dvxMinimizeWindow

-
void dvxMinimizeWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Minimize a window (show as icon at bottom of screen).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to minimize
-

dvxMaximizeWindow

-
void dvxMaximizeWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Maximize a window (expand to fill screen or maxW/maxH).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to maximize
-

dvxHideWindow

-
void dvxHideWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Hide a window without destroying it. Marks the exposed region dirty.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to hide
-

dvxShowWindow

-
void dvxShowWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Show a previously hidden window. Marks its region dirty for repaint.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to show
-

Invalidation

-

dvxInvalidateRect

-
void dvxInvalidateRect(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Mark a sub-region of a window's content area as needing repaint. Coordinates are relative to the content area, not the screen. Triggers onPaint during the next composite pass.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  x, y, w, h Dirty rectangle in content-relative coordinates
-

dvxInvalidateWindow

-
void dvxInvalidateWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Mark the entire window content area as dirty.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to invalidate
-

Window Properties

-

dvxSetTitle

-
void dvxSetTitle(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, const char *title);
-

Set a window's title text and dirty the title bar.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  title       New title text
-

dvxSetWindowIcon

-
int32_t dvxSetWindowIcon(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, const char *path);
-

Load an icon for a window from an image file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  path        Image file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

dvxSetBusy

-
void dvxSetBusy(AppContextT *ctx, bool busy);
-

Set or clear busy state. While busy, the hourglass cursor is shown and input is blocked.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  busy        true = show hourglass, false = normal
-

Accessors

-

dvxGetFont

-
const BitmapFontT *dvxGetFont(const AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the default font.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the active BitmapFontT.

-

dvxGetColors

-
const ColorSchemeT *dvxGetColors(const AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the current color scheme.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the active ColorSchemeT.

-

dvxGetDisplay

-
DisplayT *dvxGetDisplay(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the display context.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the DisplayT.

-

dvxGetBlitOps

-
const BlitOpsT *dvxGetBlitOps(const AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the blit operations vtable.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the active BlitOpsT.

-

dvxGetVideoModes

-
const VideoModeInfoT *dvxGetVideoModes(const AppContextT *ctx, int32_t *count);
-

Return the list of available video modes enumerated at init time.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  count       Output: number of mode entries
-

Returns: Pointer to the VideoModeInfoT array.

-

Color Scheme

-

dvxSetColor

-
void dvxSetColor(AppContextT *ctx, ColorIdE id, uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b);
-

Set a single color by ID. Repacks to native pixel format and invalidates the entire screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  id          Color ID (ColorIdE)
-  r, g, b     RGB values (0-255)
-

dvxGetColor

-
void dvxGetColor(const AppContextT *ctx, ColorIdE id, uint8_t *r, uint8_t *g, uint8_t *b);
-

Get a color's RGB values by ID.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  id          Color ID (ColorIdE)
-  r, g, b     Output: RGB values
-

dvxApplyColorScheme

-
void dvxApplyColorScheme(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Apply all colors from ctx->colorRgb[] at once (repack + full repaint).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxResetColorScheme

-
void dvxResetColorScheme(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Reset all colors to the built-in defaults and repaint.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxLoadTheme

-
bool dvxLoadTheme(AppContextT *ctx, const char *filename);
-

Load a theme file (INI format with [colors] section) and apply it.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  filename    Path to theme INI file
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxSaveTheme

-
bool dvxSaveTheme(const AppContextT *ctx, const char *filename);
-

Save the current color scheme to a theme file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  filename    Output file path
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxColorName

-
const char *dvxColorName(ColorIdE id);
-

Return the INI key name for a color ID (e.g. "desktop", "windowFace").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  id          Color ID
-

Returns: Static string.

-

dvxColorLabel

-
const char *dvxColorLabel(ColorIdE id);
-

Return a human-readable display label (e.g. "Desktop", "Cursor Color").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  id          Color ID
-

Returns: Static string.

-

Wallpaper

-

dvxSetWallpaper

-
bool dvxSetWallpaper(AppContextT *ctx, const char *path);
-

Load and apply a wallpaper image using the current wallpaperMode (stretch/tile/center). Pass NULL to clear the wallpaper.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  path        Image file path, or NULL to clear
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxSetWallpaperMode

-
void dvxSetWallpaperMode(AppContextT *ctx, WallpaperModeE mode);
-

Change the wallpaper display mode and re-render. No effect if no wallpaper is loaded.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  mode        WallpaperStretchE, WallpaperTileE, or WallpaperCenterE
-

Mouse Configuration

-

dvxSetMouseConfig

-
void dvxSetMouseConfig(AppContextT *ctx, int32_t wheelDir, int32_t dblClickMs, int32_t accelThreshold);
-

Configure mouse behavior.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  ctx              Application context
-  wheelDir         1 = normal, -1 = reversed
-  dblClickMs       Double-click speed in milliseconds (e.g. 500)
-  accelThreshold   Double-speed threshold in mickeys/sec (0 = don't change)
-

Accelerators

-

dvxCreateAccelTable

-
AccelTableT *dvxCreateAccelTable(void);
-

Allocate a new accelerator table. Attach to a window via win->accelTable.

-

Returns: Pointer to new AccelTableT.

-

dvxFreeAccelTable

-
void dvxFreeAccelTable(AccelTableT *table);
-

Free an accelerator table and its entries.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  table       Table to free
-

dvxAddAccel

-
void dvxAddAccel(AccelTableT *table, int32_t key, int32_t modifiers, int32_t cmdId);
-

Register a keyboard shortcut. On match, fires the window's onMenu callback with cmdId.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  table       Accelerator table
-  key         ASCII character or KEY_Fxx constant
-  modifiers   Bitmask of ACCEL_CTRL / ACCEL_SHIFT / ACCEL_ALT
-  cmdId       Command ID passed to onMenu
-

Window Arrangement

-

dvxCascadeWindows

-
void dvxCascadeWindows(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Cascade all visible, non-minimized windows. Each is offset diagonally by the title bar height.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxTileWindows

-
void dvxTileWindows(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Arrange visible windows in an NxM grid filling the screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxTileWindowsH

-
void dvxTileWindowsH(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Tile windows horizontally (side by side, equal width, full height).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxTileWindowsV

-
void dvxTileWindowsV(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Tile windows vertically (stacked, full width, equal height).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Image I/O

-

dvxLoadImage

-
uint8_t *dvxLoadImage(const AppContextT *ctx, const char *path, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH, int32_t *outPitch);
-

Load an image file (BMP, PNG, JPEG, GIF) and convert to the display's native pixel format. Caller must free with dvxFreeImage().

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  ctx           Application context
-  path          Image file path
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-  outPitch      Output: row pitch in bytes
-

Returns: Pixel buffer, or NULL on failure.

-

dvxLoadImageFromMemory

-
uint8_t *dvxLoadImageFromMemory(const AppContextT *ctx, const uint8_t *data, int32_t dataLen, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH, int32_t *outPitch);
-

Load an image from a memory buffer. Same output format as dvxLoadImage(). Caller must free with dvxFreeImage().

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  ctx           Application context
-  data          Image data buffer
-  dataLen       Buffer size in bytes
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-  outPitch      Output: row pitch in bytes
-

Returns: Pixel buffer, or NULL on failure.

-

dvxFreeImage

-
void dvxFreeImage(uint8_t *data);
-

Free a pixel buffer returned by dvxLoadImage() or dvxLoadImageFromMemory().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  data        Buffer to free
-

dvxImageInfo

-
bool dvxImageInfo(const char *path, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH);
-

Query image dimensions without decoding the full file.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  path          Image file path
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxSaveImage

-
int32_t dvxSaveImage(const AppContextT *ctx, const uint8_t *data, int32_t w, int32_t h, int32_t pitch, const char *path);
-

Save native-format pixel data to a PNG file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  data        Pixel data in display native format
-  w, h        Image dimensions
-  pitch       Row pitch in bytes
-  path        Output file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

Screenshots

-

dvxScreenshot

-
int32_t dvxScreenshot(AppContextT *ctx, const char *path);
-

Save the entire screen (backbuffer contents) to a PNG file. Converts from native pixel format to RGB.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  path        Output PNG file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

dvxWindowScreenshot

-
int32_t dvxWindowScreenshot(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, const char *path);
-

Save a window's content to a PNG file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  path        Output PNG file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

Clipboard

-

dvxClipboardCopy

-
void dvxClipboardCopy(const char *text, int32_t len);
-

Copy text to the process-wide clipboard buffer. Simple static buffer (not inter-process).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  text        Text to copy
-  len         Length in bytes
-

dvxClipboardGet

-
const char *dvxClipboardGet(int32_t *outLen);
-

Retrieve the current clipboard contents. Returns a pointer to the internal buffer (valid until the next dvxClipboardCopy), or NULL if empty.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  outLen      Output: length of clipboard text
-

Returns: Clipboard text, or NULL.

-

Resource Loading

-

dvxResLoadIcon

-
uint8_t *dvxResLoadIcon(AppContextT *ctx, const char *dxePath, const char *resName, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH, int32_t *outPitch);
-

Load an icon/image resource from a DXE file and decode to native pixel format. Caller must free with dvxFreeImage().

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  ctx           Application context
-  dxePath       Path to DXE file
-  resName       Resource name within the DXE
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-  outPitch      Output: row pitch
-

Returns: Pixel buffer, or NULL if not found.

-

dvxResLoadText

-
bool dvxResLoadText(const char *dxePath, const char *resName, char *buf, int32_t bufSize);
-

Load a text resource from a DXE file into a caller-provided buffer. Null-terminated and truncated to fit bufSize.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dxePath     Path to DXE file
-  resName     Resource name
-  buf         Output buffer
-  bufSize     Buffer capacity
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxResLoadData

-
void *dvxResLoadData(const char *dxePath, const char *resName, uint32_t *outSize);
-

Load a raw binary resource from a DXE file. Returns a malloc'd buffer that the caller must free.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dxePath     Path to DXE file
-  resName     Resource name
-  outSize     Output: data size in bytes
-

Returns: Data buffer, or NULL if not found.

-

Utilities

-

dvxTextHash

-
uint32_t dvxTextHash(const char *text);
-

Compute a djb2-xor hash for cheap dirty detection. Compare at save time with the current hash to detect changes without a shadow copy. Not cryptographic.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  text        Null-terminated string to hash
-

Returns: 32-bit hash value.

-
-
-

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-

Retained-mode widget toolkit layered on the DVX window manager. Widgets form a tree (parent-child) rooted at a per-window VBox container. Layout is automatic: measure minimum sizes bottom-up, then allocate space top-down with flexbox-like weighted distribution. Widget types are registered dynamically at runtime via DXE plugins.

-

WidgetT Structure

-

Core widget structure. Generic across all widget types; type-specific data lives in the void *data pointer managed by each widget's DXE.

-
  Field                                       Description
-  -----                                       -----------
-  int32_t type                                Widget type ID (assigned by wgtRegisterClass)
-  const WidgetClassT *wclass                  Vtable for this widget type
-  char name[MAX_WIDGET_NAME]                  Widget name for lookup via wgtFind
-  parent, firstChild, lastChild, nextSibling  Tree linkage pointers
-  WindowT *window                             Owning window
-  int32_t x, y, w, h                         Computed geometry (relative to content area)
-  int32_t calcMinW, calcMinH                  Computed minimum size (from layout pass)
-  int32_t minW, minH, maxW, maxH, prefW, prefH  Size hints (tagged sizes)
-  int32_t weight                              Extra-space distribution weight (0=fixed, 100=normal)
-  WidgetAlignE align                          Main-axis alignment for children
-  int32_t spacing, padding                    Tagged sizes for child spacing and padding
-  uint32_t fgColor, bgColor                   Custom colors (0 = use scheme defaults)
-  bool visible, enabled, readOnly             State flags
-  bool swallowTab                             Tab key goes to widget, not focus navigation
-  char accelKey                               Accelerator character (0 = none)
-  void *userData, *data                       Application data and widget-private data
-  const char *tooltip                         Tooltip text (NULL = none)
-  MenuT *contextMenu                          Right-click menu (NULL = none)
-

Universal Callbacks:

-
  Callback                                           Description
-  --------                                           -----------
-  onClick(WidgetT *w)                                Widget clicked
-  onDblClick(WidgetT *w)                             Widget double-clicked
-  onChange(WidgetT *w)                               Value changed
-  onFocus(WidgetT *w)                                Widget gained focus
-  onBlur(WidgetT *w)                                 Widget lost focus
-  onKeyPress(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyAscii)           ASCII key press
-  onKeyDown(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)  Key down
-  onKeyUp(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)    Key up
-  onMouseDown(WidgetT *w, int32_t btn, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Mouse button pressed
-  onMouseUp(WidgetT *w, int32_t btn, int32_t x, int32_t y)    Mouse button released
-  onMouseMove(WidgetT *w, int32_t btn, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Mouse moved
-  onScroll(WidgetT *w, int32_t delta)                Mouse wheel
-  onValidate(WidgetT *w)                             Return false to cancel a write
-

Size Specification Macros

-
  Macro            Description
-  -----            -----------
-  wgtPixels(v)     Size in pixels
-  wgtChars(v)      Size in character widths (multiplied by charWidth at layout)
-  wgtPercent(v)    Size as percentage of parent dimension
-

Widget Class Flags

-
  Flag                        Description
-  ----                        -----------
-  WCLASS_FOCUSABLE            Can receive keyboard focus (Tab navigation)
-  WCLASS_HORIZ_CONTAINER      Lays out children horizontally (vs. vertical)
-  WCLASS_PAINTS_CHILDREN      Widget handles child rendering itself
-  WCLASS_NO_HIT_RECURSE       Hit testing stops here, no child recursion
-  WCLASS_FOCUS_FORWARD        Accel hit forwards focus to next focusable sibling
-  WCLASS_HAS_POPUP            Has dropdown popup overlay
-  WCLASS_SCROLLABLE           Accepts mouse wheel events
-  WCLASS_SCROLL_CONTAINER     Scroll container (ScrollPane)
-  WCLASS_NEEDS_POLL           Needs periodic polling
-  WCLASS_SWALLOWS_TAB         Tab key goes to widget, not focus navigation
-  WCLASS_RELAYOUT_ON_SCROLL   Full relayout on scrollbar drag
-  WCLASS_PRESS_RELEASE        Click = press + release (Button, ImageButton)
-  WCLASS_ACCEL_WHEN_HIDDEN    Accelerator matching works even when invisible
-

Window Integration

-

wgtInitWindow

-
WidgetT *wgtInitWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Initialize the widget system for a window. Creates a root VBox container that fills the content area, and installs callback handlers (onPaint, onMouse, onKey, onResize) for widget-based event dispatch. The window's userData is set to the AppContextT pointer.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to initialize
-

Returns: Root VBox widget (add children to this).

-

Widget Operations

-

wgtGetContext

-
AppContextT *wgtGetContext(const WidgetT *w);
-

Walk from any widget up the tree to the root, then retrieve the AppContextT stored in the window's userData. Lets any widget access the full application context.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Any widget in the tree
-

Returns: Pointer to the AppContextT.

-

wgtInvalidate

-
void wgtInvalidate(WidgetT *w);
-

Mark a widget as needing both re-layout (measure + position) and repaint. Propagates upward to ancestors. Use after structural changes (adding/removing children, text changes that affect size).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to invalidate
-

wgtInvalidatePaint

-
void wgtInvalidatePaint(WidgetT *w);
-

Mark a widget as needing repaint only, without re-layout. Use for visual-only changes (checkbox toggle, selection highlight, cursor blink).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to repaint
-

wgtSetText

-
void wgtSetText(WidgetT *w, const char *text);
-

Set widget text content (dispatches to the widget class's SET_TEXT handler).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  text        New text
-

wgtGetText

-
const char *wgtGetText(const WidgetT *w);
-

Get the widget's current text content.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-

Returns: Text string (empty string if no handler).

-

wgtSetEnabled

-
void wgtSetEnabled(WidgetT *w, bool enabled);
-

Enable or disable a widget. Disabled widgets are grayed out and do not receive input.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  enabled     true = enabled, false = disabled
-

wgtSetReadOnly

-
void wgtSetReadOnly(WidgetT *w, bool readOnly);
-

Set read-only mode. Allows scrolling and selection but blocks editing.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  readOnly    true = read-only
-

wgtSetFocused

-
void wgtSetFocused(WidgetT *w);
-

Set keyboard focus to a widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to focus
-

wgtGetFocused

-
WidgetT *wgtGetFocused(void);
-

Get the currently focused widget.

-

Returns: Focused widget, or NULL.

-

wgtSetVisible

-
void wgtSetVisible(WidgetT *w, bool visible);
-

Show or hide a widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  visible     true = visible, false = hidden
-

wgtSetName

-
void wgtSetName(WidgetT *w, const char *name);
-

Set a widget's name for lookup via wgtFind().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  name        Name string (max MAX_WIDGET_NAME chars)
-

wgtFind

-
WidgetT *wgtFind(WidgetT *root, const char *name);
-

Find a widget by name. Searches the subtree rooted at root.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  root        Root of subtree to search
-  name        Widget name to find
-

Returns: Matching widget, or NULL.

-

wgtDestroy

-
void wgtDestroy(WidgetT *w);
-

Destroy a widget and all its children. Removes from parent's child list.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to destroy
-

wgtSetTooltip

-
void wgtSetTooltip(WidgetT *w, const char *text);
-

Set tooltip text for a widget. Pass NULL to remove. Caller owns the string and it must outlive the widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  text        Tooltip text, or NULL
-

widgetOnResize

-
void widgetOnResize(WindowT *win, int32_t newW, int32_t newH);
-

Default window resize handler installed by wgtInitWindow(). Re-evaluates scrollbars and relayouts the widget tree. Call from custom onResize handlers to chain to the widget system.

-
  Parameter    Description
-  ---------    -----------
-  win          Window being resized
-  newW, newH   New content dimensions
-

Layout

-

wgtResolveSize

-
int32_t wgtResolveSize(int32_t taggedSize, int32_t parentSize, int32_t charWidth);
-

Decode a tagged size value (WGT_SIZE_PIXELS/CHARS/PERCENT) into a concrete pixel count. Returns 0 for a raw 0 input (meaning "auto").

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  taggedSize    Tagged size value
-  parentSize    Parent dimension (for PERCENT mode)
-  charWidth     Font character width (for CHARS mode)
-

Returns: Size in pixels.

-

wgtLayout

-
void wgtLayout(WidgetT *root, int32_t availW, int32_t availH, const BitmapFontT *font);
-

Execute the full two-pass layout algorithm. Pass 1 (bottom-up): compute minimum sizes. Pass 2 (top-down): allocate space with weighted distribution. Normally called automatically; exposed for cases where layout must be forced before the next paint.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  root          Root widget
-  availW/H      Available space
-  font          Bitmap font (for character-based sizing)
-

wgtPaint

-
void wgtPaint(WidgetT *root, DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, const ColorSchemeT *colors);
-

Paint the entire widget tree by depth-first traversal. Each widget's clip rect is set to its bounds. Overlays (popups, tooltips) are painted in a second pass on top.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  root        Root widget
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  colors      Color scheme
-

Debug

-

wgtSetDebugLayout

-
void wgtSetDebugLayout(AppContextT *ctx, bool enabled);
-

Draw colored borders around layout containers for debugging.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  enabled     true = draw debug borders
-

Dynamic Widget Registration

-

wgtRegisterClass

-
int32_t wgtRegisterClass(const WidgetClassT *wclass);
-

Register a new widget class at runtime. Appends to widgetClassTable. The WidgetClassT must remain valid for the lifetime of the process (typically static const in a DXE).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  wclass      Widget class vtable to register
-

Returns: Assigned type ID.

-

wgtRegisterApi

-
void wgtRegisterApi(const char *name, const void *api);
-

Register a widget API struct under a name. Each widget DXE registers its API during initialization. Callers retrieve it via wgtGetApi() and cast to the widget-specific type.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name (e.g. "button", "listbox")
-  api         Pointer to the widget's API struct
-

wgtGetApi

-
const void *wgtGetApi(const char *name);
-

Retrieve a registered widget API struct by name.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: Pointer to the API struct, or NULL if not found.

-

Widget Interface Descriptors

-

wgtRegisterIface

-
void wgtRegisterIface(const char *name, const WgtIfaceT *iface);
-

Register an interface descriptor for a widget type. Used by the BASIC form runtime and IDE for generic property/method dispatch.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-  iface       Interface descriptor
-

wgtGetIface

-
const WgtIfaceT *wgtGetIface(const char *name);
-

Retrieve an interface descriptor by widget type name.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: Interface descriptor, or NULL.

-

wgtFindByBasName

-
const char *wgtFindByBasName(const char *basName);
-

Find a widget type name by its VB-style name (e.g. "CommandButton" -> "button"). Case-insensitive search.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  basName     VB-style widget name
-

Returns: Internal type name, or NULL.

-

wgtIfaceCount

-
int32_t wgtIfaceCount(void);
-

Return the number of registered widget interfaces.

-

Returns: Count of registered interfaces.

-

wgtIfaceAt

-
const WgtIfaceT *wgtIfaceAt(int32_t idx, const char **outName);
-

Get a registered widget interface by index.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  idx         Index (0-based)
-  outName     Output: type name
-

Returns: Interface descriptor.

-

wgtIfaceGetPath

-
const char *wgtIfaceGetPath(const char *name);
-

Get the .wgt DXE file path for a registered widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: File path string.

-

wgtIfaceSetPath

-
void wgtIfaceSetPath(const char *name, const char *path);
-

Set the .wgt DXE file path for a registered widget (called by the loader).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-  path        DXE file path
-

wgtIfaceGetPathIndex

-
int32_t wgtIfaceGetPathIndex(const char *name);
-

Get the 1-based index of this widget within its .wgt file. Used to construct suffixed resource names (e.g. "name-2", "icon16-2").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: 1-based index within the DXE file.

-

Typed Dispatch Helpers

-

The following inline functions provide type-safe dispatch through the WidgetClassT handler table. Each checks for a non-NULL handler before calling.

-
  Function                                Method ID                          Description
-  --------                                ---------                          -----------
-  wclsHas(w, methodId)                    --                                 Check if handler exists
-  wclsPaint(w, d, ops, font, colors)      WGT_METHOD_PAINT                   Paint the widget
-  wclsPaintOverlay(w, d, ops, font, colors) WGT_METHOD_PAINT_OVERLAY         Paint overlay (popups)
-  wclsCalcMinSize(w, font)                WGT_METHOD_CALC_MIN_SIZE           Compute minimum size
-  wclsLayout(w, font)                     WGT_METHOD_LAYOUT                  Layout children
-  wclsGetLayoutMetrics(w, font, ...)      WGT_METHOD_GET_LAYOUT_METRICS      Get pad, gap, extraTop, borderW
-  wclsOnMouse(w, root, vx, vy)           WGT_METHOD_ON_MOUSE                Handle mouse event
-  wclsOnKey(w, key, mod)                  WGT_METHOD_ON_KEY                  Handle key event
-  wclsOnAccelActivate(w, root)            WGT_METHOD_ON_ACCEL_ACTIVATE       Handle accelerator
-  wclsDestroy(w)                          WGT_METHOD_DESTROY                 Destroy widget data
-  wclsOnChildChanged(parent, child)       WGT_METHOD_ON_CHILD_CHANGED        Notify parent of change
-  wclsGetText(w)                          WGT_METHOD_GET_TEXT                Get widget text
-  wclsSetText(w, text)                    WGT_METHOD_SET_TEXT                Set widget text
-  wclsClearSelection(w)                   WGT_METHOD_CLEAR_SELECTION         Clear text selection
-  wclsClosePopup(w)                       WGT_METHOD_CLOSE_POPUP             Close dropdown popup
-  wclsGetPopupRect(w, font, ...)          WGT_METHOD_GET_POPUP_RECT          Get popup screen rect
-  wclsOnDragUpdate(w, root, x, y)         WGT_METHOD_ON_DRAG_UPDATE          Update during drag
-  wclsOnDragEnd(w, root, x, y)            WGT_METHOD_ON_DRAG_END             End drag operation
-  wclsGetCursorShape(w, vx, vy)           WGT_METHOD_GET_CURSOR_SHAPE        Get cursor for position
-  wclsPoll(w, win)                        WGT_METHOD_POLL                    Periodic polling
-  wclsQuickRepaint(w, outY, outH)         WGT_METHOD_QUICK_REPAINT           Fast partial repaint
-  wclsScrollChildIntoView(parent, child)  WGT_METHOD_SCROLL_CHILD_INTO_VIEW  Scroll child visible
-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvx_architecture.html b/docs/dvx_architecture.html deleted file mode 100644 index c993f94..0000000 --- a/docs/dvx_architecture.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,610 +0,0 @@ - - - - -DVX Architecture Overview - - - - -
-
-

DVX Architecture Overview

-

DVX Architecture Overview

-

DOS Visual eXecutive -- A Windowing GUI for DJGPP/DPMI

-

DVX (DOS Visual eXecutive) is a complete windowing GUI compositor targeting DJGPP/DPMI on DOS. It provides overlapping windows with Motif-style chrome, a retained-mode widget toolkit, cooperative multitasking of DXE-loaded applications, and a dirty-rectangle compositor optimized for 486/Pentium hardware.

-

Key Design Constraints

- -

No external font or cursor files -- all bitmaps are compiled in as static const data.

-

The runtime environment consists of a bootstrap loader (dvx.exe) that loads core DXE libraries, widget plugins, and the shell, which in turn loads and manages DXE application modules.

-

Contents

-

Five-Layer Architecture

-

Display Pipeline

-

Window System

-

Widget System

-

DXE Module System

-

Event Model

-

Font System

-

Color System

-

Platform Layer

-

Build System

-
-
-

Five-Layer Architecture

-

Five-Layer Architecture

-

DVX is organized into five layers, each implemented as a single .h/.c pair. Every header includes dvxTypes.h (the shared type definitions) to avoid circular dependencies. The layers are strictly stacked: each layer depends only on the layers below it.

-
 Applications (DXE .app modules)
- ==================================================
- |                                                |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 5: dvxApp  (Application API)      |  |  dvxApp.h / dvxApp.c
- |  |  Event loop, window creation, public API  |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 4: dvxWm   (Window Manager)       |  |  dvxWm.h / dvxWm.c
- |  |  Window stack, chrome, drag, resize      |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 3: dvxComp  (Compositor)          |  |  dvxComp.h / dvxComp.c
- |  |  Dirty rect tracking, merge, LFB flush   |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 2: dvxDraw  (Drawing Primitives)  |  |  dvxDraw.h / dvxDraw.c
- |  |  Rects, bevels, text, blits, cursors     |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 1: dvxVideo (Video Backend)       |  |  dvxVideo.h / dvxVideo.c
- |  |  VESA VBE, LFB mapping, pixel format     |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |                                                |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Platform Layer (dvxPlatform.h)          |  |  dvxPlatformDos.c
- |  |  OS-specific: video, input, asm spans    |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |                                                |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Shared Types (dvxTypes.h)               |  |
- |  |  DisplayT, WindowT, RectT, ColorSchemeT  |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- ==================================================
-

Layer Summary

-
  Layer               Header         Responsibility
-  -----               ------         --------------
-  1 - Video           dvxVideo.h     VESA VBE mode negotiation, LFB mapping via DPMI, backbuffer allocation, packColor() (RGB to native pixel format), display-wide clip rectangle.
-  2 - Draw            dvxDraw.h      All 2D drawing: rectFill, rectCopy, drawBevel, drawText/drawTextN, drawMaskedBitmap (cursor), drawTermRow (batch terminal row). Stateless beyond clip rect. Dispatches hot inner loops through BlitOpsT function pointers.
-  3 - Compositor      dvxComp.h      Dirty rectangle tracking (dirtyListAdd), pairwise merge of overlapping rects (dirtyListMerge), and flushRect to copy dirty regions from backBuf to LFB.
-  4 - Window Manager  dvxWm.h        Window lifecycle, Z-order stack, chrome drawing (title bars, bevels, close/minimize/maximize gadgets), hit testing, drag/resize, menu bars, scrollbars, system menu, keyboard move/resize, minimized icon bar.
-  5 - Application     dvxApp.h       Public API aggregating all layers into AppContextT. Provides dvxInit/dvxShutdown, dvxRun/dvxUpdate, window creation helpers, image loading, clipboard, accelerator tables, theme management, wallpaper, video mode switching, screenshot capture.
-
-
-

Display Pipeline

-

Display Pipeline

-

The double-buffer strategy is the single most important performance decision in DVX. All drawing goes to a system RAM backbuffer (DisplayT.backBuf); only dirty rectangles are flushed to the linear framebuffer (DisplayT.lfb) in video memory.

-

This matters because writes to video memory over the PCI bus are 10-50x slower than writes to main RAM on 486/Pentium hardware for random-access patterns.

-

Per-Frame Compositing Pipeline

-
  1. Input poll (mouse, keyboard)
-         |
-  2. Event dispatch (focus window callbacks)
-         |
-  3. Layers call dirtyListAdd() for changed regions
-         |
-  4. dirtyListMerge() consolidates overlapping rects
-         |
-  5. For each merged dirty rect:
-     a. Clip and redraw desktop background (or wallpaper)
-     b. For each window (back-to-front, painter's algorithm):
-        - wmDrawChrome()   -- frame, title bar, gadgets, menu bar
-        - wmDrawContent()  -- blit per-window content buffer
-        - wmDrawScrollbars()
-     c. Draw minimized window icons
-     d. Draw popup menus / tooltips (overlay pass)
-     e. Draw software mouse cursor
-         |
-  6. flushRect() -- copy each dirty rect from backBuf to LFB
-         |
-  7. Yield (platformYield)
-

Key Data Structures

-

DisplayT -- Central display context: width, height, pitch, pixel format, LFB pointer, backbuffer pointer, palette, clip rectangle. Passed by pointer through every layer -- no globals.

-

BlitOpsT -- Vtable of span fill/copy function pointers resolved at init time for the active pixel depth. On DOS these dispatch to hand-written rep stosl / rep movsd asm inner loops.

-

DirtyListT -- Fixed-capacity dynamic array of RectT. Linear scanning for merge candidates is cache-friendly at typical sizes (under 128 rects). If the list fills up, the compositor merges aggressively or falls back to full-screen repaint.

-

Why This Works on a 486

- -

Per-window content buffers persist across frames, so windows don't repaint on expose -- only when their own content changes.

-
-
-

Window System

-

Window System

-

WindowT Structure

-

Each WindowT is the central object of the window manager. Key fields:

-
  Field Group                              Purpose
-  -----------                              -------
-  Geometry (x, y, w, h)                   Outer frame rectangle (including chrome).
-  Content area (contentX/Y/W/H)           Computed from frame minus chrome. Where application content lives.
-  Content buffer (contentBuf, contentPitch) Per-window backbuffer in native pixel format. Persists across frames.
-  Chrome state (menuBar, vScroll, hScroll) Optional menu bar and scrollbars. Affect content area computation.
-  Widget tree (widgetRoot)                 Root of the retained-mode widget tree (NULL if using raw callbacks).
-  Callbacks                                onPaint, onKey, onKeyUp, onMouse, onResize, onClose, onMenu, onScroll, onFocus, onBlur, onCursorQuery.
-

Window Stack (Z-Order)

-

WindowStackT is an array of WindowT* ordered front-to-back: index count-1 is the topmost window. This allows:

- -

Reordering by pointer swap (no copying of large WindowT structs).

-

Only one drag/resize/scroll operation can be active system-wide at a time (single mouse), so that state lives on the stack, not on individual windows.

-

Chrome Layout

-
  +-------------------------------------------+
-  |  4px outer border (raised bevel)          |
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  | [X] Title Bar Text     [_] [^] [X]  |  |  20px title height
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  | 2px inner border                    |  |
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  | Menu Bar (optional, 20px)           |  |
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  |                                     |  |
-  |  |          Content Area               |  |
-  |  |                                     |  |
-  |  |                               |  S  |  |  S = vertical scrollbar
-  |  |                               |  B  |  |      (16px wide)
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  |  Horizontal Scrollbar (optional)    |  |  16px tall
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  4px outer border                         |
-  +-------------------------------------------+
-

Chrome constants are compile-time defines:

-
  CHROME_BORDER_WIDTH   = 4px
-  CHROME_TITLE_HEIGHT   = 20px
-  CHROME_INNER_BORDER   = 2px
-  CHROME_MENU_HEIGHT    = 20px
-  SCROLLBAR_WIDTH       = 16px
-  CHROME_CLOSE_BTN_SIZE = 16px
-

Hit Test Regions

-

wmHitTest() iterates the stack front-to-back and returns a hit-part identifier: HIT_CONTENT, HIT_TITLE, HIT_CLOSE, HIT_RESIZE, HIT_MENU, HIT_VSCROLL, HIT_HSCROLL, HIT_MINIMIZE, HIT_MAXIMIZE. Resize edge detection returns a bitmask of RESIZE_LEFT, RESIZE_RIGHT, RESIZE_TOP, RESIZE_BOTTOM (corners combine two edges).

-

Menu System

-

Menus use fixed-size arrays with inline char buffers (no heap strings). Up to 8 menus per bar, items dynamically allocated. Supports cascading submenus via MenuItemT.subMenu pointer. Item types: normal, checkbox, radio. Separators are non-interactive items. The popup state (PopupStateT) tracks a stack of parent frames for cascading submenu nesting.

-

Minimized Windows

-

Minimized windows display as 64x64 icons at the bottom of the screen with beveled borders, similar to a classic desktop icon bar. Icons show a scaled-down preview of the window's content buffer, refreshed one per frame in a round-robin fashion to amortize the scaling cost.

-
-
-

Widget System

-

Widget System

-

The widget system (dvxWidget.h) is a retained-mode toolkit layered on top of the window manager. Widgets form a tree rooted at a per-window VBox container.

-

WidgetT Base Structure

-

Every widget shares the same WidgetT struct. The type field is a runtime-assigned integer ID. The wclass pointer references the widget's WidgetClassT vtable. Widget-specific private data is stored in w->data (opaque void*).

-

Tree linkage: parent, firstChild, lastChild, nextSibling. No prevSibling -- this halves pointer overhead and removal is still O(n) for typical tree depths of 5-10.

-

Layout Engine

-

Two-pass flexbox-like algorithm:

- -

Top-down (layout) -- allocate space within available bounds, distributing extra space according to weight values (0 = fixed, 100 = normal stretch).

-

Size hints use a tagged encoding: the top 2 bits of an int32_t select the unit (pixels, character widths, or percentage of parent), the low 30 bits hold the value. Macros: wgtPixels(v), wgtChars(v), wgtPercent(v).

-

Widget Class Dispatch (WidgetClassT)

-

Each widget type provides a WidgetClassT with a handlers[] array indexed by stable method IDs. Method IDs are never reordered or reused -- new methods append at the end. This provides ABI-stable dispatch so that widget DXEs compiled against an older DVX version continue to work.

-

Methods include: PAINT, PAINT_OVERLAY, CALC_MIN_SIZE, LAYOUT, ON_MOUSE, ON_KEY, ON_ACCEL_ACTIVATE, DESTROY, GET_TEXT, SET_TEXT, POLL, and more (21 defined, room for 32).

-

Class Flags

-
  Flag                    Meaning
-  ----                    -------
-  WCLASS_FOCUSABLE        Can receive keyboard focus (Tab navigation)
-  WCLASS_HORIZ_CONTAINER  Lays out children horizontally (HBox)
-  WCLASS_PAINTS_CHILDREN  Widget handles child rendering itself
-  WCLASS_SCROLLABLE       Accepts mouse wheel events
-  WCLASS_SCROLL_CONTAINER ScrollPane -- scrolling viewport
-  WCLASS_NEEDS_POLL       Needs periodic polling (e.g. AnsiTerm comms)
-  WCLASS_SWALLOWS_TAB     Tab key goes to widget, not focus navigation
-  WCLASS_PRESS_RELEASE    Click = press + release (buttons)
-

Available Widget Types

-

Each widget is a separate .wgt DXE module. 29 widget types are included:

-
  Widget                  Description
-  ------                  -----------
-  Box (VBox/HBox)         Vertical and horizontal layout containers
-  Button                  Clickable push button with label
-  Canvas                  Raw drawing surface for custom painting
-  Checkbox                Boolean toggle with checkmark
-  ComboBox                Text input with dropdown list
-  DataCtrl                Data-bound control for database operations
-  DbGrid                  Database grid (tabular data display)
-  Dropdown                Dropdown selection list
-  Image                   Static image display
-  ImageButton             Button with bitmap icon
-  Label                   Static text label
-  ListBox                 Scrollable selection list
-  ListView                Multi-column list with headers and sorting
-  ProgressBar             Determinate progress indicator
-  Radio                   Radio button (mutual exclusion group)
-  ScrollPane              Scrollable viewport container
-  Separator               Visual divider line
-  Slider                  Value selection via draggable thumb
-  Spacer                  Empty space for layout
-  Spinner                 Numeric input with up/down arrows
-  Splitter                Resizable split pane
-  StatusBar               Window status bar with sections
-  TabControl              Tabbed page container
-  Terminal (AnsiTerm)     ANSI terminal emulator widget
-  TextInput               Single-line text entry field
-  Timer                   Periodic timer events
-  Toolbar                 Toolbar with icon buttons
-  TreeView                Hierarchical tree display
-  WrapBox                 Flow layout (wrapping horizontal container)
-

Widget API Registry

-

Each widget DXE registers a small API struct under a name during wgtRegister(). Callers retrieve it via wgtGetApi("button") and cast to the widget-specific API type. Per-widget headers provide typed accessors so callers avoid manual casts. Adding a new widget requires zero changes to the core.

-

Widget Interface Descriptors (WgtIfaceT)

-

Each widget can register an interface descriptor that describes its BASIC-facing properties, methods, and events. These descriptors are used by the form runtime and IDE for generic dispatch and property panel enumeration. Properties have typed getters/setters (WGT_IFACE_STRING, WGT_IFACE_INT, WGT_IFACE_BOOL, WGT_IFACE_ENUM).

-
-
-

DXE Module System

-

DXE Module System

-

DVX uses DJGPP's DXE3 (Dynamic eXtension) format for all loadable modules. DXE3 supports RTLD_GLOBAL symbol sharing -- symbols exported by one module are visible to all subsequently loaded modules. This is critical: widget DXEs call core API functions (e.g. rectFill, wgtInvalidate) that are exported by the core library DXE.

-

Module Types

-
  Extension  Directory   Purpose                                             Examples
-  ---------  ---------   -------                                             --------
-  .lib       LIBS/       Core libraries loaded first. Provide infrastructure APIs.  libtasks.lib, libdvx.lib, dvxshell.lib
-  .wgt       WIDGETS/    Widget type plugins. Each exports wgtRegister().    button.wgt, listview.wgt, terminal.wgt
-  .app       APPS/*/     Application modules. Each exports appDescriptor and appMain(). Loaded on demand by the shell.  progman.app, notepad.app, cpanel.app
-

Boot Sequence

-
  dvx.exe (loader)
-     |
-     +-- Enter VGA mode 13h, display splash screen with progress bar
-     |
-     +-- Scan LIBS/ for *.lib, WIDGETS/ for *.wgt
-     |
-     +-- Read .dep files for each module (dependency base names)
-     |
-     +-- Topological sort: load modules in dependency order
-     |     - dlopen() with RTLD_GLOBAL
-     |     - Each .wgt that exports wgtRegister() has it called
-     |
-     +-- Find and call shellMain() (exported by dvxshell.lib)
-           |
-           +-- dvxInit() -- video mode, input, font, colors, cursors
-           |
-           +-- Load desktop app (progman.app)
-           |
-           +-- Main loop:
-                 dvxUpdate() -> tsYield() -> shellReapApps()
-

Application Lifecycle

-

Two kinds of DXE apps:

-

Callback-only (hasMainLoop = false)

-

appMain() creates windows, registers callbacks, and returns. The app lives through GUI callbacks driven by the shell's main loop. Lifecycle ends when the last window is closed. No extra task stack needed -- simpler and cheaper.

-

Main-loop (hasMainLoop = true)

-

A dedicated cooperative task is created. appMain() runs in that task with its own loop, calling tsYield() to share CPU. Needed for apps with continuous work (terminal emulators, games). Lifecycle ends when appMain() returns.

-

Crash Recovery

-

The platform layer installs signal handlers for SIGSEGV, SIGFPE, SIGILL. On crash, the handler logs platform-specific diagnostics (register dump on DJGPP), then longjmps back to the shell's main loop. The crashed app is killed; other apps and the shell survive. This provides Windows 3.1-style fault tolerance.

-

Per-App Memory Tracking

-

All allocations route through dvxMalloc/dvxFree wrappers that prepend a 16-byte header recording the owning app ID and allocation size. The Task Manager displays per-app memory usage, and leaks are detected at app termination.

-
-
-

Event Model

-

Event Model

-

DVX uses a cooperative polling model. The main loop (dvxRun / dvxUpdate) runs this cycle each frame:

- -

Yield -- platformYield() or idle callback.

-

Event Dispatch Chain

-
  Mouse/Keyboard Input
-       |
-  Global handlers (Ctrl+Esc, modal filter)
-       |
-  Accelerator table check (focused window)
-       |
-  Window callback (onMouse / onKey)
-       |
-  [If widget tree installed:]
-       |
-  widgetOnMouse / widgetOnKey
-       |
-  Widget hit test (widgetHitTest)
-       |
-  wclsOnMouse / wclsOnKey (vtable dispatch)
-       |
-  Universal callbacks (onClick, onChange, etc.)
-

Accelerator Tables

-

Per-window accelerator tables map key + modifier combinations to command IDs. The runtime normalizes key/modifier at registration time (uppercase key, strip shift from modifiers) so matching at dispatch time is two integer comparisons per entry. Matched accelerators fire the window's onMenu callback with the command ID, unifying the menu and hotkey code paths.

-

Mouse Cursor

-

Software-rendered cursor using the classic AND/XOR mask approach. Seven cursor shapes are compiled in: arrow, horizontal resize, vertical resize, NW-SE diagonal resize, NE-SW diagonal resize, busy (hourglass), and crosshair. The cursor is painted into the backbuffer on top of the composited frame and the affected region is flushed to the LFB each frame.

-

Double-Click Detection

-

Timestamp-based: two clicks on the same target (title bar, minimized icon, close gadget) within the configurable double-click interval trigger the double-click action. Separate tracking for each target type.

-
-
-

Font System

-

Font System

-

DVX uses fixed-width 8-pixel-wide bitmap fonts only. One size is provided: 8x16, matching the standard VGA ROM font and CP437 encoding (256 glyphs).

-

BitmapFontT

-
  typedef struct {
-      int32_t        charWidth;    // fixed width per glyph (always 8)
-      int32_t        charHeight;   // 16
-      int32_t        firstChar;    // typically 0
-      int32_t        numChars;     // typically 256
-      const uint8_t *glyphData;    // packed 1bpp, charHeight bytes per glyph
-  } BitmapFontT;
-

Design rationale:

- -

8-pixel width aligns with byte boundaries -- no bit shifting in per-scanline rendering.

-

Text Rendering Functions

-

drawChar() -- Renders a single character. Supports opaque (background fill) and transparent modes.

-

drawTextN() -- Optimized batch rendering for a known character count. Clips once for the entire run, fills background in a single rectFill, then overlays glyph foreground pixels. Significantly faster than per-character rendering for long runs.

-

drawTermRow() -- Renders an 80-column terminal row in a single pass, with per-cell foreground/background from a 16-color palette, blink attribute support, and cursor rendering. Exists because per-character terminal rendering is unacceptably slow on target hardware.

-

drawTextAccel() -- Renders text with & accelerator markers. The character after & is underlined to indicate the keyboard shortcut.

-

Performance Optimization

-

AppContextT stores a fixed-point 16.16 reciprocal of font.charHeight (charHeightRecip) so that dividing by charHeight (for pixel-to-row conversion in terminal/text widgets) becomes a multiply+shift instead of an integer divide, which costs 40+ cycles on a 486.

-
-
-

Color System

-

Color System

-

Pixel Format

-

PixelFormatT describes the active VESA mode's pixel encoding. Populated once from the VBE mode info block. Stores shift, mask, and bit count for each channel so packColor() can convert RGB to native format with shift-and-mask arithmetic -- no per-pixel computation.

-

Supported depths:

-
  Depth    Bytes/Pixel  Notes
-  -----    -----------  -----
-  8 bpp    1            Palette mode. Nearest-index via 6x6x6 color cube + grey ramp.
-  15 bpp   2            5-5-5 RGB (1 bit unused).
-  16 bpp   2            5-6-5 RGB.
-  32 bpp   4            8-8-8 RGB (8 bits unused).
-

ColorSchemeT -- Theming

-

All 20 UI colors are pre-packed into display pixel format at init time. Every color is a uint32_t that can be written directly to the framebuffer with zero per-pixel conversion. The scheme must be regenerated on video mode change, but mode changes require re-init anyway.

-

Color roles mirror classic Motif/Windows 3.x conventions:

- -

cursorFg/Bg -- mouse cursor colors

-

Source RGB values are kept in AppContextT.colorRgb[] for theme save/load. Themes are stored as INI files with a [colors] section. The API provides dvxLoadTheme(), dvxSaveTheme(), dvxSetColor(), and dvxResetColorScheme().

-

Bevel Styles

-

Bevels are the defining visual element of the Motif aesthetic. Convenience macros create bevel style descriptors by swapping highlight and shadow colors:

-
  BEVEL_RAISED(colorScheme, borderWidth)       -- raised 3D look
-  BEVEL_SUNKEN(colorScheme, face, borderWidth) -- sunken/inset look
-  BEVEL_TROUGH(colorScheme)                    -- 1px scrollbar trough
-  BEVEL_SB_BUTTON(colorScheme)                 -- scrollbar button
-
-
-

Platform Layer

-

Platform Layer

-

All OS-specific and CPU-specific code is isolated behind dvxPlatform.h. To port DVX, implement a new dvxPlatformXxx.c against this header.

-

Implementations

-
  File                Target        Details
-  ----                ------        -------
-  dvxPlatformDos.c    DJGPP/DPMI    Real VESA VBE, INT 33h mouse, INT 16h keyboard, rep movsd/rep stosl asm spans, DPMI physical memory mapping for LFB, INT 9 hook for key-up, CuteMouse Wheel API.
-

Abstraction Areas

-

Video

-

platformVideoInit() -- mode probe and framebuffer setup. platformVideoShutdown() -- restore previous mode. platformVideoEnumModes() -- enumerate available modes.

-

Framebuffer Flush

-

platformFlushRect() -- copy dirty rect from backBuf to LFB. On DOS, each scanline uses rep movsd for near-optimal aligned 32-bit writes over the PCI bus.

-

Optimized Memory Spans

-

Six functions: platformSpanFill8/16/32() and platformSpanCopy8/16/32(). Called once per scanline of every rectangle fill, blit, and text draw. On DOS these use inline assembly for critical inner loops.

-

Mouse Input

-

Polling model. platformMousePoll() returns position and button bitmask. Wheel support via CuteMouse API.

-

Keyboard Input

-

platformKeyboardRead() -- non-blocking key read. platformKeyUpRead() -- key release detection (requires INT 9 hook on DOS). platformAltScanToChar() -- scancode-to-ASCII lookup for Alt+key combinations.

-

Crash Recovery

-

platformInstallCrashHandler() -- signal handlers + longjmp for fault tolerance.

-

DXE Support

-

platformRegisterDxeExports() -- register C runtime and platform symbols for DXE resolution. platformRegisterSymOverrides() -- register function pointer overrides for module loader.

-
-
-

Build System

-

Build System

-

Cross-Compilation

-

DVX is cross-compiled from Linux using a DJGPP cross-compiler (i586-pc-msdosdjgpp-gcc). The top-level Makefile orchestrates building all subsystems in dependency order.

-
  make               -- build everything
-  ./mkcd.sh          -- build + create ISO for 86Box
-

Build Targets

-
  all: core tasks loader texthelp listhelp tools widgets shell taskmgr serial sql apps
-
  Target     Output                    Description
-  ------     ------                    -----------
-  core       bin/libs/libdvx.lib       GUI core library (draw, comp, wm, app, widget infrastructure)
-  tasks      bin/libs/libtasks.lib     Cooperative task switcher
-  loader     bin/dvx.exe               Bootstrap loader (the DOS executable)
-  widgets    bin/widgets/*.wgt         29 widget type plugins
-  shell      bin/libs/dvxshell.lib     DVX Shell (app management, desktop)
-  taskmgr    bin/libs/taskmgr.lib      Task Manager (loaded as a separate DXE)
-  texthelp   shared library            Shared text editing helpers (clipboard, word boundaries)
-  listhelp   shared library            Shared dropdown/list helpers
-  apps       bin/apps/*/*.app          Application modules (progman, notepad, clock, etc.)
-  tools      bin/dvxres                Resource compiler (runs on Linux, builds resource sections into DXEs)
-  serial     serial DXE libs           UART driver, HDLC packets, security, seclink
-  sql        SQL DXE lib               SQLite integration
-

DXE3 Build Process

-

Each DXE module is compiled to an object file with GCC, then linked with dxe3gen:

-
  # Compile
-  i586-pc-msdosdjgpp-gcc -O2 -march=i486 -mtune=i586 -c -o widget.o widget.c
-
-  # Link as DXE with exported symbols
-  dxe3gen -o widget.wgt -E _wgtRegister -U widget.o
-
-  # Optionally append resources
-  dvxres build widget.wgt widget.res
-

The -E flag specifies exported symbols (prefixed with underscore per DJGPP convention). -U marks unresolved symbols as OK (they'll be resolved at load time from previously loaded DXEs).

-

Deployment (mkcd.sh)

- -

Places the ISO at ~/.var/app/net._86box._86Box/data/86Box/dvx.iso for 86Box to mount as CD-ROM.

-

Compiler Flags

-
  -O2                  Optimization level 2
-  -march=i486          486 instruction set baseline
-  -mtune=i586          Optimize scheduling for Pentium
-  -Wall -Wextra        Full warnings
-

Directory Layout

-
  dvxgui/
-  +-- core/              Core library sources (dvxVideo, dvxDraw, dvxComp, dvxWm, dvxApp, widget infra)
-  |   +-- platform/      Platform abstraction (dvxPlatform.h, dvxPlatformDos.c)
-  |   +-- thirdparty/    stb_image, stb_ds, stb_image_write
-  +-- loader/            Bootstrap loader (dvx.exe)
-  +-- tasks/             Cooperative task switcher (libtasks.lib)
-  +-- shell/             DVX Shell (dvxshell.lib)
-  +-- widgets/           Widget DXE modules (*.wgt), each in its own subdirectory
-  |   +-- box/           VBox/HBox layout containers
-  |   +-- button/        Push button
-  |   +-- textInput/     Text entry field
-  |   +-- listView/      Multi-column list
-  |   +-- ...            (29 widget types total)
-  +-- texthelp/          Shared text editing helpers
-  +-- listhelp/          Shared dropdown/list helpers
-  +-- apps/              Application DXE modules (*.app)
-  |   +-- progman/       Program Manager (desktop)
-  |   +-- notepad/       Text editor
-  |   +-- cpanel/        Control Panel
-  |   +-- imgview/       Image viewer
-  |   +-- clock/         Clock
-  |   +-- dvxdemo/       Demo / showcase app
-  |   +-- dvxbasic/      DVX BASIC compiler and VM
-  +-- tools/             Build tools (dvxres resource compiler)
-  +-- rs232/             ISR-driven UART driver
-  +-- packet/            HDLC framing, CRC-16, sliding window
-  +-- security/          DH key exchange, XTEA cipher, DRBG RNG
-  +-- seclink/           Encrypted channel wrapper
-  +-- serial/            Combined serial stack DXE
-  +-- proxy/             Linux proxy (86Box <-> secLink <-> telnet)
-  +-- sql/               SQLite integration
-  +-- bin/               Build output (dvx.exe, libs/, widgets/, apps/, config/)
-  +-- obj/               Intermediate object files
-  +-- docs/              Documentation
-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvx_help.html b/docs/dvx_help.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6193005..0000000 --- a/docs/dvx_help.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3699 +0,0 @@ - - - - -DVX Architecture Overview - - - - -
-
-

DVX Architecture Overview

-

DVX Architecture Overview

-

DOS Visual eXecutive -- A Windowing GUI for DJGPP/DPMI

-

DVX (DOS Visual eXecutive) is a complete windowing GUI compositor targeting DJGPP/DPMI on DOS. It provides overlapping windows with Motif-style chrome, a retained-mode widget toolkit, cooperative multitasking of DXE-loaded applications, and a dirty-rectangle compositor optimized for 486/Pentium hardware.

-

Key Design Constraints

- -

No external font or cursor files -- all bitmaps are compiled in as static const data.

-

The runtime environment consists of a bootstrap loader (dvx.exe) that loads core DXE libraries, widget plugins, and the shell, which in turn loads and manages DXE application modules.

-

Contents

-

Five-Layer Architecture

-

Display Pipeline

-

Window System

-

Widget System

-

DXE Module System

-

Event Model

-

Font System

-

Color System

-

Platform Layer

-

Build System

-
-
-

Five-Layer Architecture

-

Five-Layer Architecture

-

DVX is organized into five layers, each implemented as a single .h/.c pair. Every header includes dvxTypes.h (the shared type definitions) to avoid circular dependencies. The layers are strictly stacked: each layer depends only on the layers below it.

-
 Applications (DXE .app modules)
- ==================================================
- |                                                |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 5: dvxApp  (Application API)      |  |  dvxApp.h / dvxApp.c
- |  |  Event loop, window creation, public API  |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 4: dvxWm   (Window Manager)       |  |  dvxWm.h / dvxWm.c
- |  |  Window stack, chrome, drag, resize      |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 3: dvxComp  (Compositor)          |  |  dvxComp.h / dvxComp.c
- |  |  Dirty rect tracking, merge, LFB flush   |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 2: dvxDraw  (Drawing Primitives)  |  |  dvxDraw.h / dvxDraw.c
- |  |  Rects, bevels, text, blits, cursors     |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Layer 1: dvxVideo (Video Backend)       |  |  dvxVideo.h / dvxVideo.c
- |  |  VESA VBE, LFB mapping, pixel format     |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |                                                |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Platform Layer (dvxPlatform.h)          |  |  dvxPlatformDos.c
- |  |  OS-specific: video, input, asm spans    |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |                                                |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- |  |  Shared Types (dvxTypes.h)               |  |
- |  |  DisplayT, WindowT, RectT, ColorSchemeT  |  |
- |  +------------------------------------------+  |
- ==================================================
-

Layer Summary

-
  Layer               Header         Responsibility
-  -----               ------         --------------
-  1 - Video           dvxVideo.h     VESA VBE mode negotiation, LFB mapping via DPMI, backbuffer allocation, packColor() (RGB to native pixel format), display-wide clip rectangle.
-  2 - Draw            dvxDraw.h      All 2D drawing: rectFill, rectCopy, drawBevel, drawText/drawTextN, drawMaskedBitmap (cursor), drawTermRow (batch terminal row). Stateless beyond clip rect. Dispatches hot inner loops through BlitOpsT function pointers.
-  3 - Compositor      dvxComp.h      Dirty rectangle tracking (dirtyListAdd), pairwise merge of overlapping rects (dirtyListMerge), and flushRect to copy dirty regions from backBuf to LFB.
-  4 - Window Manager  dvxWm.h        Window lifecycle, Z-order stack, chrome drawing (title bars, bevels, close/minimize/maximize gadgets), hit testing, drag/resize, menu bars, scrollbars, system menu, keyboard move/resize, minimized icon bar.
-  5 - Application     dvxApp.h       Public API aggregating all layers into AppContextT. Provides dvxInit/dvxShutdown, dvxRun/dvxUpdate, window creation helpers, image loading, clipboard, accelerator tables, theme management, wallpaper, video mode switching, screenshot capture.
-
-
-

Display Pipeline

-

Display Pipeline

-

The double-buffer strategy is the single most important performance decision in DVX. All drawing goes to a system RAM backbuffer (DisplayT.backBuf); only dirty rectangles are flushed to the linear framebuffer (DisplayT.lfb) in video memory.

-

This matters because writes to video memory over the PCI bus are 10-50x slower than writes to main RAM on 486/Pentium hardware for random-access patterns.

-

Per-Frame Compositing Pipeline

-
  1. Input poll (mouse, keyboard)
-         |
-  2. Event dispatch (focus window callbacks)
-         |
-  3. Layers call dirtyListAdd() for changed regions
-         |
-  4. dirtyListMerge() consolidates overlapping rects
-         |
-  5. For each merged dirty rect:
-     a. Clip and redraw desktop background (or wallpaper)
-     b. For each window (back-to-front, painter's algorithm):
-        - wmDrawChrome()   -- frame, title bar, gadgets, menu bar
-        - wmDrawContent()  -- blit per-window content buffer
-        - wmDrawScrollbars()
-     c. Draw minimized window icons
-     d. Draw popup menus / tooltips (overlay pass)
-     e. Draw software mouse cursor
-         |
-  6. flushRect() -- copy each dirty rect from backBuf to LFB
-         |
-  7. Yield (platformYield)
-

Key Data Structures

-

DisplayT -- Central display context: width, height, pitch, pixel format, LFB pointer, backbuffer pointer, palette, clip rectangle. Passed by pointer through every layer -- no globals.

-

BlitOpsT -- Vtable of span fill/copy function pointers resolved at init time for the active pixel depth. On DOS these dispatch to hand-written rep stosl / rep movsd asm inner loops.

-

DirtyListT -- Fixed-capacity dynamic array of RectT. Linear scanning for merge candidates is cache-friendly at typical sizes (under 128 rects). If the list fills up, the compositor merges aggressively or falls back to full-screen repaint.

-

Why This Works on a 486

- -

Per-window content buffers persist across frames, so windows don't repaint on expose -- only when their own content changes.

-
-
-

Window System

-

Window System

-

WindowT Structure

-

Each WindowT is the central object of the window manager. Key fields:

-
  Field Group                              Purpose
-  -----------                              -------
-  Geometry (x, y, w, h)                   Outer frame rectangle (including chrome).
-  Content area (contentX/Y/W/H)           Computed from frame minus chrome. Where application content lives.
-  Content buffer (contentBuf, contentPitch) Per-window backbuffer in native pixel format. Persists across frames.
-  Chrome state (menuBar, vScroll, hScroll) Optional menu bar and scrollbars. Affect content area computation.
-  Widget tree (widgetRoot)                 Root of the retained-mode widget tree (NULL if using raw callbacks).
-  Callbacks                                onPaint, onKey, onKeyUp, onMouse, onResize, onClose, onMenu, onScroll, onFocus, onBlur, onCursorQuery.
-

Window Stack (Z-Order)

-

WindowStackT is an array of WindowT* ordered front-to-back: index count-1 is the topmost window. This allows:

- -

Reordering by pointer swap (no copying of large WindowT structs).

-

Only one drag/resize/scroll operation can be active system-wide at a time (single mouse), so that state lives on the stack, not on individual windows.

-

Chrome Layout

-
  +-------------------------------------------+
-  |  4px outer border (raised bevel)          |
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  | [X] Title Bar Text     [_] [^] [X]  |  |  20px title height
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  | 2px inner border                    |  |
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  | Menu Bar (optional, 20px)           |  |
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  |                                     |  |
-  |  |          Content Area               |  |
-  |  |                                     |  |
-  |  |                               |  S  |  |  S = vertical scrollbar
-  |  |                               |  B  |  |      (16px wide)
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  |  Horizontal Scrollbar (optional)    |  |  16px tall
-  |  +-------------------------------------+  |
-  |  4px outer border                         |
-  +-------------------------------------------+
-

Chrome constants are compile-time defines:

-
  CHROME_BORDER_WIDTH   = 4px
-  CHROME_TITLE_HEIGHT   = 20px
-  CHROME_INNER_BORDER   = 2px
-  CHROME_MENU_HEIGHT    = 20px
-  SCROLLBAR_WIDTH       = 16px
-  CHROME_CLOSE_BTN_SIZE = 16px
-

Hit Test Regions

-

wmHitTest() iterates the stack front-to-back and returns a hit-part identifier: HIT_CONTENT, HIT_TITLE, HIT_CLOSE, HIT_RESIZE, HIT_MENU, HIT_VSCROLL, HIT_HSCROLL, HIT_MINIMIZE, HIT_MAXIMIZE. Resize edge detection returns a bitmask of RESIZE_LEFT, RESIZE_RIGHT, RESIZE_TOP, RESIZE_BOTTOM (corners combine two edges).

-

Menu System

-

Menus use fixed-size arrays with inline char buffers (no heap strings). Up to 8 menus per bar, items dynamically allocated. Supports cascading submenus via MenuItemT.subMenu pointer. Item types: normal, checkbox, radio. Separators are non-interactive items. The popup state (PopupStateT) tracks a stack of parent frames for cascading submenu nesting.

-

Minimized Windows

-

Minimized windows display as 64x64 icons at the bottom of the screen with beveled borders, similar to a classic desktop icon bar. Icons show a scaled-down preview of the window's content buffer, refreshed one per frame in a round-robin fashion to amortize the scaling cost.

-
-
-

Widget System

-

Widget System

-

The widget system (dvxWidget.h) is a retained-mode toolkit layered on top of the window manager. Widgets form a tree rooted at a per-window VBox container.

-

WidgetT Base Structure

-

Every widget shares the same WidgetT struct. The type field is a runtime-assigned integer ID. The wclass pointer references the widget's WidgetClassT vtable. Widget-specific private data is stored in w->data (opaque void*).

-

Tree linkage: parent, firstChild, lastChild, nextSibling. No prevSibling -- this halves pointer overhead and removal is still O(n) for typical tree depths of 5-10.

-

Layout Engine

-

Two-pass flexbox-like algorithm:

- -

Top-down (layout) -- allocate space within available bounds, distributing extra space according to weight values (0 = fixed, 100 = normal stretch).

-

Size hints use a tagged encoding: the top 2 bits of an int32_t select the unit (pixels, character widths, or percentage of parent), the low 30 bits hold the value. Macros: wgtPixels(v), wgtChars(v), wgtPercent(v).

-

Widget Class Dispatch (WidgetClassT)

-

Each widget type provides a WidgetClassT with a handlers[] array indexed by stable method IDs. Method IDs are never reordered or reused -- new methods append at the end. This provides ABI-stable dispatch so that widget DXEs compiled against an older DVX version continue to work.

-

Methods include: PAINT, PAINT_OVERLAY, CALC_MIN_SIZE, LAYOUT, ON_MOUSE, ON_KEY, ON_ACCEL_ACTIVATE, DESTROY, GET_TEXT, SET_TEXT, POLL, and more (21 defined, room for 32).

-

Class Flags

-
  Flag                    Meaning
-  ----                    -------
-  WCLASS_FOCUSABLE        Can receive keyboard focus (Tab navigation)
-  WCLASS_HORIZ_CONTAINER  Lays out children horizontally (HBox)
-  WCLASS_PAINTS_CHILDREN  Widget handles child rendering itself
-  WCLASS_SCROLLABLE       Accepts mouse wheel events
-  WCLASS_SCROLL_CONTAINER ScrollPane -- scrolling viewport
-  WCLASS_NEEDS_POLL       Needs periodic polling (e.g. AnsiTerm comms)
-  WCLASS_SWALLOWS_TAB     Tab key goes to widget, not focus navigation
-  WCLASS_PRESS_RELEASE    Click = press + release (buttons)
-

Available Widget Types

-

Each widget is a separate .wgt DXE module. 29 widget types are included:

-
  Widget                  Description
-  ------                  -----------
-  Box (VBox/HBox)         Vertical and horizontal layout containers
-  Button                  Clickable push button with label
-  Canvas                  Raw drawing surface for custom painting
-  Checkbox                Boolean toggle with checkmark
-  ComboBox                Text input with dropdown list
-  DataCtrl                Data-bound control for database operations
-  DbGrid                  Database grid (tabular data display)
-  Dropdown                Dropdown selection list
-  Image                   Static image display
-  ImageButton             Button with bitmap icon
-  Label                   Static text label
-  ListBox                 Scrollable selection list
-  ListView                Multi-column list with headers and sorting
-  ProgressBar             Determinate progress indicator
-  Radio                   Radio button (mutual exclusion group)
-  ScrollPane              Scrollable viewport container
-  Separator               Visual divider line
-  Slider                  Value selection via draggable thumb
-  Spacer                  Empty space for layout
-  Spinner                 Numeric input with up/down arrows
-  Splitter                Resizable split pane
-  StatusBar               Window status bar with sections
-  TabControl              Tabbed page container
-  Terminal (AnsiTerm)     ANSI terminal emulator widget
-  TextInput               Single-line text entry field
-  Timer                   Periodic timer events
-  Toolbar                 Toolbar with icon buttons
-  TreeView                Hierarchical tree display
-  WrapBox                 Flow layout (wrapping horizontal container)
-

Widget API Registry

-

Each widget DXE registers a small API struct under a name during wgtRegister(). Callers retrieve it via wgtGetApi("button") and cast to the widget-specific API type. Per-widget headers provide typed accessors so callers avoid manual casts. Adding a new widget requires zero changes to the core.

-

Widget Interface Descriptors (WgtIfaceT)

-

Each widget can register an interface descriptor that describes its BASIC-facing properties, methods, and events. These descriptors are used by the form runtime and IDE for generic dispatch and property panel enumeration. Properties have typed getters/setters (WGT_IFACE_STRING, WGT_IFACE_INT, WGT_IFACE_BOOL, WGT_IFACE_ENUM).

-
-
-

DXE Module System

-

DXE Module System

-

DVX uses DJGPP's DXE3 (Dynamic eXtension) format for all loadable modules. DXE3 supports RTLD_GLOBAL symbol sharing -- symbols exported by one module are visible to all subsequently loaded modules. This is critical: widget DXEs call core API functions (e.g. rectFill, wgtInvalidate) that are exported by the core library DXE.

-

Module Types

-
  Extension  Directory   Purpose                                             Examples
-  ---------  ---------   -------                                             --------
-  .lib       LIBS/       Core libraries loaded first. Provide infrastructure APIs.  libtasks.lib, libdvx.lib, dvxshell.lib
-  .wgt       WIDGETS/    Widget type plugins. Each exports wgtRegister().    button.wgt, listview.wgt, terminal.wgt
-  .app       APPS/*/     Application modules. Each exports appDescriptor and appMain(). Loaded on demand by the shell.  progman.app, notepad.app, cpanel.app
-

Boot Sequence

-
  dvx.exe (loader)
-     |
-     +-- Enter VGA mode 13h, display splash screen with progress bar
-     |
-     +-- Scan LIBS/ for *.lib, WIDGETS/ for *.wgt
-     |
-     +-- Read .dep files for each module (dependency base names)
-     |
-     +-- Topological sort: load modules in dependency order
-     |     - dlopen() with RTLD_GLOBAL
-     |     - Each .wgt that exports wgtRegister() has it called
-     |
-     +-- Find and call shellMain() (exported by dvxshell.lib)
-           |
-           +-- dvxInit() -- video mode, input, font, colors, cursors
-           |
-           +-- Load desktop app (progman.app)
-           |
-           +-- Main loop:
-                 dvxUpdate() -> tsYield() -> shellReapApps()
-

Application Lifecycle

-

Two kinds of DXE apps:

-

Callback-only (hasMainLoop = false)

-

appMain() creates windows, registers callbacks, and returns. The app lives through GUI callbacks driven by the shell's main loop. Lifecycle ends when the last window is closed. No extra task stack needed -- simpler and cheaper.

-

Main-loop (hasMainLoop = true)

-

A dedicated cooperative task is created. appMain() runs in that task with its own loop, calling tsYield() to share CPU. Needed for apps with continuous work (terminal emulators, games). Lifecycle ends when appMain() returns.

-

Crash Recovery

-

The platform layer installs signal handlers for SIGSEGV, SIGFPE, SIGILL. On crash, the handler logs platform-specific diagnostics (register dump on DJGPP), then longjmps back to the shell's main loop. The crashed app is killed; other apps and the shell survive. This provides Windows 3.1-style fault tolerance.

-

Per-App Memory Tracking

-

All allocations route through dvxMalloc/dvxFree wrappers that prepend a 16-byte header recording the owning app ID and allocation size. The Task Manager displays per-app memory usage, and leaks are detected at app termination.

-
-
-

Event Model

-

Event Model

-

DVX uses a cooperative polling model. The main loop (dvxRun / dvxUpdate) runs this cycle each frame:

- -

Yield -- platformYield() or idle callback.

-

Event Dispatch Chain

-
  Mouse/Keyboard Input
-       |
-  Global handlers (Ctrl+Esc, modal filter)
-       |
-  Accelerator table check (focused window)
-       |
-  Window callback (onMouse / onKey)
-       |
-  [If widget tree installed:]
-       |
-  widgetOnMouse / widgetOnKey
-       |
-  Widget hit test (widgetHitTest)
-       |
-  wclsOnMouse / wclsOnKey (vtable dispatch)
-       |
-  Universal callbacks (onClick, onChange, etc.)
-

Accelerator Tables

-

Per-window accelerator tables map key + modifier combinations to command IDs. The runtime normalizes key/modifier at registration time (uppercase key, strip shift from modifiers) so matching at dispatch time is two integer comparisons per entry. Matched accelerators fire the window's onMenu callback with the command ID, unifying the menu and hotkey code paths.

-

Mouse Cursor

-

Software-rendered cursor using the classic AND/XOR mask approach. Seven cursor shapes are compiled in: arrow, horizontal resize, vertical resize, NW-SE diagonal resize, NE-SW diagonal resize, busy (hourglass), and crosshair. The cursor is painted into the backbuffer on top of the composited frame and the affected region is flushed to the LFB each frame.

-

Double-Click Detection

-

Timestamp-based: two clicks on the same target (title bar, minimized icon, close gadget) within the configurable double-click interval trigger the double-click action. Separate tracking for each target type.

-
-
-

Font System

-

Font System

-

DVX uses fixed-width 8-pixel-wide bitmap fonts only. One size is provided: 8x16, matching the standard VGA ROM font and CP437 encoding (256 glyphs).

-

BitmapFontT

-
  typedef struct {
-      int32_t        charWidth;    // fixed width per glyph (always 8)
-      int32_t        charHeight;   // 16
-      int32_t        firstChar;    // typically 0
-      int32_t        numChars;     // typically 256
-      const uint8_t *glyphData;    // packed 1bpp, charHeight bytes per glyph
-  } BitmapFontT;
-

Design rationale:

- -

8-pixel width aligns with byte boundaries -- no bit shifting in per-scanline rendering.

-

Text Rendering Functions

-

drawChar() -- Renders a single character. Supports opaque (background fill) and transparent modes.

-

drawTextN() -- Optimized batch rendering for a known character count. Clips once for the entire run, fills background in a single rectFill, then overlays glyph foreground pixels. Significantly faster than per-character rendering for long runs.

-

drawTermRow() -- Renders an 80-column terminal row in a single pass, with per-cell foreground/background from a 16-color palette, blink attribute support, and cursor rendering. Exists because per-character terminal rendering is unacceptably slow on target hardware.

-

drawTextAccel() -- Renders text with & accelerator markers. The character after & is underlined to indicate the keyboard shortcut.

-

Performance Optimization

-

AppContextT stores a fixed-point 16.16 reciprocal of font.charHeight (charHeightRecip) so that dividing by charHeight (for pixel-to-row conversion in terminal/text widgets) becomes a multiply+shift instead of an integer divide, which costs 40+ cycles on a 486.

-
-
-

Color System

-

Color System

-

Pixel Format

-

PixelFormatT describes the active VESA mode's pixel encoding. Populated once from the VBE mode info block. Stores shift, mask, and bit count for each channel so packColor() can convert RGB to native format with shift-and-mask arithmetic -- no per-pixel computation.

-

Supported depths:

-
  Depth    Bytes/Pixel  Notes
-  -----    -----------  -----
-  8 bpp    1            Palette mode. Nearest-index via 6x6x6 color cube + grey ramp.
-  15 bpp   2            5-5-5 RGB (1 bit unused).
-  16 bpp   2            5-6-5 RGB.
-  32 bpp   4            8-8-8 RGB (8 bits unused).
-

ColorSchemeT -- Theming

-

All 20 UI colors are pre-packed into display pixel format at init time. Every color is a uint32_t that can be written directly to the framebuffer with zero per-pixel conversion. The scheme must be regenerated on video mode change, but mode changes require re-init anyway.

-

Color roles mirror classic Motif/Windows 3.x conventions:

- -

cursorFg/Bg -- mouse cursor colors

-

Source RGB values are kept in AppContextT.colorRgb[] for theme save/load. Themes are stored as INI files with a [colors] section. The API provides dvxLoadTheme(), dvxSaveTheme(), dvxSetColor(), and dvxResetColorScheme().

-

Bevel Styles

-

Bevels are the defining visual element of the Motif aesthetic. Convenience macros create bevel style descriptors by swapping highlight and shadow colors:

-
  BEVEL_RAISED(colorScheme, borderWidth)       -- raised 3D look
-  BEVEL_SUNKEN(colorScheme, face, borderWidth) -- sunken/inset look
-  BEVEL_TROUGH(colorScheme)                    -- 1px scrollbar trough
-  BEVEL_SB_BUTTON(colorScheme)                 -- scrollbar button
-
-
-

Platform Layer

-

Platform Layer

-

All OS-specific and CPU-specific code is isolated behind dvxPlatform.h. To port DVX, implement a new dvxPlatformXxx.c against this header.

-

Implementations

-
  File                Target        Details
-  ----                ------        -------
-  dvxPlatformDos.c    DJGPP/DPMI    Real VESA VBE, INT 33h mouse, INT 16h keyboard, rep movsd/rep stosl asm spans, DPMI physical memory mapping for LFB, INT 9 hook for key-up, CuteMouse Wheel API.
-

Abstraction Areas

-

Video

-

platformVideoInit() -- mode probe and framebuffer setup. platformVideoShutdown() -- restore previous mode. platformVideoEnumModes() -- enumerate available modes.

-

Framebuffer Flush

-

platformFlushRect() -- copy dirty rect from backBuf to LFB. On DOS, each scanline uses rep movsd for near-optimal aligned 32-bit writes over the PCI bus.

-

Optimized Memory Spans

-

Six functions: platformSpanFill8/16/32() and platformSpanCopy8/16/32(). Called once per scanline of every rectangle fill, blit, and text draw. On DOS these use inline assembly for critical inner loops.

-

Mouse Input

-

Polling model. platformMousePoll() returns position and button bitmask. Wheel support via CuteMouse API.

-

Keyboard Input

-

platformKeyboardRead() -- non-blocking key read. platformKeyUpRead() -- key release detection (requires INT 9 hook on DOS). platformAltScanToChar() -- scancode-to-ASCII lookup for Alt+key combinations.

-

Crash Recovery

-

platformInstallCrashHandler() -- signal handlers + longjmp for fault tolerance.

-

DXE Support

-

platformRegisterDxeExports() -- register C runtime and platform symbols for DXE resolution. platformRegisterSymOverrides() -- register function pointer overrides for module loader.

-
-
-

Build System

-

Build System

-

Cross-Compilation

-

DVX is cross-compiled from Linux using a DJGPP cross-compiler (i586-pc-msdosdjgpp-gcc). The top-level Makefile orchestrates building all subsystems in dependency order.

-
  make               -- build everything
-  ./mkcd.sh          -- build + create ISO for 86Box
-

Build Targets

-
  all: core tasks loader texthelp listhelp tools widgets shell taskmgr serial sql apps
-
  Target     Output                    Description
-  ------     ------                    -----------
-  core       bin/libs/libdvx.lib       GUI core library (draw, comp, wm, app, widget infrastructure)
-  tasks      bin/libs/libtasks.lib     Cooperative task switcher
-  loader     bin/dvx.exe               Bootstrap loader (the DOS executable)
-  widgets    bin/widgets/*.wgt         29 widget type plugins
-  shell      bin/libs/dvxshell.lib     DVX Shell (app management, desktop)
-  taskmgr    bin/libs/taskmgr.lib      Task Manager (loaded as a separate DXE)
-  texthelp   shared library            Shared text editing helpers (clipboard, word boundaries)
-  listhelp   shared library            Shared dropdown/list helpers
-  apps       bin/apps/*/*.app          Application modules (progman, notepad, clock, etc.)
-  tools      bin/dvxres                Resource compiler (runs on Linux, builds resource sections into DXEs)
-  serial     serial DXE libs           UART driver, HDLC packets, security, seclink
-  sql        SQL DXE lib               SQLite integration
-

DXE3 Build Process

-

Each DXE module is compiled to an object file with GCC, then linked with dxe3gen:

-
  # Compile
-  i586-pc-msdosdjgpp-gcc -O2 -march=i486 -mtune=i586 -c -o widget.o widget.c
-
-  # Link as DXE with exported symbols
-  dxe3gen -o widget.wgt -E _wgtRegister -U widget.o
-
-  # Optionally append resources
-  dvxres build widget.wgt widget.res
-

The -E flag specifies exported symbols (prefixed with underscore per DJGPP convention). -U marks unresolved symbols as OK (they'll be resolved at load time from previously loaded DXEs).

-

Deployment (mkcd.sh)

- -

Places the ISO at ~/.var/app/net._86box._86Box/data/86Box/dvx.iso for 86Box to mount as CD-ROM.

-

Compiler Flags

-
  -O2                  Optimization level 2
-  -march=i486          486 instruction set baseline
-  -mtune=i586          Optimize scheduling for Pentium
-  -Wall -Wextra        Full warnings
-

Directory Layout

-
  dvxgui/
-  +-- core/              Core library sources (dvxVideo, dvxDraw, dvxComp, dvxWm, dvxApp, widget infra)
-  |   +-- platform/      Platform abstraction (dvxPlatform.h, dvxPlatformDos.c)
-  |   +-- thirdparty/    stb_image, stb_ds, stb_image_write
-  +-- loader/            Bootstrap loader (dvx.exe)
-  +-- tasks/             Cooperative task switcher (libtasks.lib)
-  +-- shell/             DVX Shell (dvxshell.lib)
-  +-- widgets/           Widget DXE modules (*.wgt), each in its own subdirectory
-  |   +-- box/           VBox/HBox layout containers
-  |   +-- button/        Push button
-  |   +-- textInput/     Text entry field
-  |   +-- listView/      Multi-column list
-  |   +-- ...            (29 widget types total)
-  +-- texthelp/          Shared text editing helpers
-  +-- listhelp/          Shared dropdown/list helpers
-  +-- apps/              Application DXE modules (*.app)
-  |   +-- progman/       Program Manager (desktop)
-  |   +-- notepad/       Text editor
-  |   +-- cpanel/        Control Panel
-  |   +-- imgview/       Image viewer
-  |   +-- clock/         Clock
-  |   +-- dvxdemo/       Demo / showcase app
-  |   +-- dvxbasic/      DVX BASIC compiler and VM
-  +-- tools/             Build tools (dvxres resource compiler)
-  +-- rs232/             ISR-driven UART driver
-  +-- packet/            HDLC framing, CRC-16, sliding window
-  +-- security/          DH key exchange, XTEA cipher, DRBG RNG
-  +-- seclink/           Encrypted channel wrapper
-  +-- serial/            Combined serial stack DXE
-  +-- proxy/             Linux proxy (86Box <-> secLink <-> telnet)
-  +-- sql/               SQLite integration
-  +-- bin/               Build output (dvx.exe, libs/, widgets/, apps/, config/)
-  +-- obj/               Intermediate object files
-  +-- docs/              Documentation
-
-
-

DVX GUI API Reference

-

DVX GUI API Reference

-

DOS Visual eXecutive -- Complete public API documentation generated from source headers.

-

The DVX GUI is built as a five-layer architecture. Each layer is defined in its own header file. This reference covers every public function, type, and constant.

-

Layers

- -

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-

dvxTypes.h -- Shared Type Definitions

-

dvxCursor.h -- Cursor Definitions

-

dvxVideo.h -- Layer 1: VESA VBE Video Backend

-

dvxDraw.h -- Layer 2: Drawing Primitives

-

dvxComp.h -- Layer 3: Dirty Rectangle Compositor

-

dvxWm.h -- Layer 4: Window Manager

-

dvxApp.h -- Layer 5: Application API

-

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-
-
-

dvxTypes.h -- Shared Type Definitions

-

dvxTypes.h -- Shared Type Definitions

-

Central type definitions shared across all five layers of the DVX GUI stack. Every header includes this file. Contains no function definitions -- only structs, enums, typedefs, and compile-time constants.

-

Core Structures

-

PixelFormatT

-

Describes the pixel encoding for the active VESA video mode. Populated once at startup from the VBE mode info block, then treated as read-only.

-
  Field                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  int32_t bitsPerPixel                         8, 15, 16, or 32
-  int32_t bytesPerPixel                        1, 2, 2, or 4
-  uint32_t redMask, greenMask, blueMask        Bitmasks for each color channel
-  int32_t redShift, greenShift, blueShift      Bit position of each color field
-  int32_t redBits, greenBits, blueBits         Number of bits per channel
-

DisplayT

-

Single display context passed by pointer through every layer. All drawing targets the backBuf; only dirty rects are flushed to lfb.

-
  Field                                  Description
-  -----                                  -----------
-  int32_t width, height                  Screen dimensions in pixels
-  int32_t pitch                          Bytes per scanline
-  PixelFormatT format                    Active pixel format
-  uint8_t *lfb                           Mapped linear framebuffer (VESA LFB)
-  uint8_t *backBuf                       System RAM backbuffer
-  uint8_t *palette                       768 bytes for 8-bit mode, NULL otherwise
-  int32_t clipX, clipY, clipW, clipH     Current clip rectangle
-

RectT

-

Rectangle in origin + extent form. Used throughout the compositor, window manager, and widget layout engine.

-
  Field              Description
-  -----              -----------
-  int32_t x, y       Top-left corner
-  int32_t w, h       Width and height
-

BlitOpsT

-

Vtable for hot-path span operations. Resolved at init time based on pixel depth. On DOS, these dispatch to hand-written asm (rep stosl / rep movsd).

-
  Field                    Description
-  -----                    -----------
-  SpanFillFnT spanFill     Fill a horizontal span with a solid color
-  SpanCopyFnT spanCopy     Copy a horizontal span between buffers
-  int32_t bytesPerPixel    Bytes per pixel for the active mode
-  int32_t pitch            Bytes per scanline
-

BevelStyleT

-

Bevel drawing parameters. Swapping highlight/shadow flips raised vs. sunken appearance.

-
  Field                  Description
-  -----                  -----------
-  uint32_t highlight     Lighter color (top/left edges)
-  uint32_t shadow        Darker color (bottom/right edges)
-  uint32_t face          Interior fill color (0 = no fill)
-  int32_t width          Border thickness in pixels (typically 2)
-

BitmapFontT

-

Fixed-width 8-pixel-wide bitmap font descriptor. One size provided: 8x16 (standard VGA ROM font, CP437 encoding).

-
  Field                          Description
-  -----                          -----------
-  int32_t charWidth              Fixed width per glyph (always 8)
-  int32_t charHeight             Glyph height (14 or 16)
-  int32_t firstChar              ASCII code of first glyph (typically 0)
-  int32_t numChars               Number of glyphs (typically 256)
-  const uint8_t *glyphData       Packed 1bpp data, charHeight bytes per glyph
-

ColorSchemeT

-

All UI colors pre-packed into display pixel format at init time. Theme support is achieved by swapping this struct.

-
  Field                                              Description
-  -----                                              -----------
-  uint32_t desktop                                   Desktop background color
-  uint32_t windowFace                                Window body / chrome face
-  uint32_t windowHighlight                           Bevel highlight (top/left edge)
-  uint32_t windowShadow                              Bevel shadow (bottom/right edge)
-  uint32_t activeTitleBg, activeTitleFg              Focused window title bar
-  uint32_t inactiveTitleBg, inactiveTitleFg          Unfocused window title bar
-  uint32_t contentBg, contentFg                      Window content area default colors
-  uint32_t menuBg, menuFg                            Menu bar and popup background/text
-  uint32_t menuHighlightBg, menuHighlightFg          Menu item highlight
-  uint32_t buttonFace                                Button face color
-  uint32_t scrollbarBg, scrollbarFg, scrollbarTrough Scrollbar element colors
-  uint32_t cursorFg, cursorBg                        Mouse cursor colors
-

ColorIdE

-

Enum for addressing individual colors in ColorSchemeT. Order matches struct field order.

-

Values: ColorDesktopE, ColorWindowFaceE, ColorWindowHighlightE, ColorWindowShadowE, ColorActiveTitleBgE, ColorActiveTitleFgE, ColorInactiveTitleBgE, ColorInactiveTitleFgE, ColorContentBgE, ColorContentFgE, ColorMenuBgE, ColorMenuFgE, ColorMenuHighlightBgE, ColorMenuHighlightFgE, ColorButtonFaceE, ColorScrollbarBgE, ColorScrollbarFgE, ColorScrollbarTroughE, ColorCursorFgE, ColorCursorBgE, ColorCountE.

-

DirtyListT

-

Fixed-capacity list of dirty rectangles. Dynamic array, grows on demand.

-
  Field              Description
-  -----              -----------
-  RectT *rects       Dynamic array of dirty rectangles
-  int32_t count      Current number of dirty rects
-  int32_t cap        Allocated capacity
-

WindowT

-

Central window object. Each window owns a persistent content backbuffer and receives events through callback function pointers.

-
  Field                                                          Description
-  -----                                                          -----------
-  int32_t id                                                     Unique window identifier
-  int32_t appId                                                  Shell app ID (0 = shell itself)
-  int32_t x, y, w, h                                            Outer frame position and dimensions
-  int32_t contentX, contentY, contentW, contentH                 Content area inset from frame
-  char title[MAX_TITLE_LEN]                                      Window title text (max 128 chars)
-  bool visible, focused, minimized, maximized, resizable, modal  Window state flags
-  bool contentDirty                                              true when contentBuf has changed
-  bool needsPaint                                                true until first onPaint call
-  int32_t maxW, maxH                                             Maximum dimensions
-  int32_t preMaxX, preMaxY, preMaxW, preMaxH                    Saved geometry before maximize
-  uint8_t *contentBuf                                            Per-window content backbuffer
-  int32_t contentPitch                                           Content buffer bytes per row
-  uint8_t *iconData                                              Icon pixel data, NULL if none
-  int32_t iconW, iconH, iconPitch                                Icon image dimensions and pitch
-  MenuBarT *menuBar                                              Menu bar (NULL if no menus)
-  ScrollbarT *vScroll, *hScroll                                  Scrollbars (NULL if not present)
-  struct WidgetT *widgetRoot                                     Widget tree root (NULL if none)
-  MenuT *contextMenu                                             Right-click context menu
-  AccelTableT *accelTable                                        Keyboard accelerator table
-  void *userData                                                 Application-defined data pointer
-

Callbacks:

-
  Callback                                                     Description
-  --------                                                     -----------
-  onPaint(WindowT *win, RectT *dirtyArea)                      Content repaint requested
-  onKey(WindowT *win, int32_t key, int32_t mod)                Key press
-  onKeyUp(WindowT *win, int32_t scancode, int32_t mod)         Key release
-  onMouse(WindowT *win, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t btn)    Mouse event (content-relative)
-  onResize(WindowT *win, int32_t newW, int32_t newH)           Window resized
-  onClose(WindowT *win)                                        Close requested
-  onMenu(WindowT *win, int32_t menuId)                         Menu item or accelerator activated
-  onScroll(WindowT *win, ScrollbarOrientE orient, int32_t val) Scrollbar value changed
-  onCursorQuery(WindowT *win, int32_t x, int32_t y)            Return CURSOR_* for hit position
-  onFocus(WindowT *win)                                        Window gained focus
-  onBlur(WindowT *win)                                         Window lost focus
-

WindowStackT

-

Z-ordered window stack (front-to-back: index count-1 is topmost). Owns system-wide drag/resize/scroll interaction state.

-
  Field                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  WindowT **windows                            Dynamic array of window pointers
-  int32_t count, cap                           Current count and allocated capacity
-  int32_t focusedIdx                           Stack index of focused window
-  int32_t dragWindow, dragOffX, dragOffY       Active drag state
-  int32_t resizeWindow, resizeEdge             Active resize state
-  int32_t scrollWindow, scrollOrient, scrollDragOff  Active scroll drag state
-

MenuT / MenuItemT / MenuBarT

-

Menu system types. Fixed-size label buffers (MAX_MENU_LABEL = 32). Cascading submenus supported via MenuItemT.subMenu pointer.

-
  Field                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  MenuItemT.label              Item text (supports & accelerator markers)
-  MenuItemT.id                 Application-defined command ID
-  MenuItemT.type               MenuItemNormalE, MenuItemCheckE, or MenuItemRadioE
-  MenuItemT.separator          true = horizontal divider line
-  MenuItemT.enabled, checked   Item state
-  MenuItemT.subMenu            Child menu for cascading (NULL if leaf)
-  MenuBarT.activeIdx           Open popup index (-1 = none)
-

ScrollbarT

-

Window-level scrollbar state. Managed by the WM layer, drawn after content.

-
  Field                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  ScrollbarOrientE orient      ScrollbarVerticalE or ScrollbarHorizontalE
-  int32_t min, max             Scroll range
-  int32_t value                Current position
-  int32_t pageSize             Visible portion (for proportional thumb sizing)
-  int32_t x, y, length         Computed screen position and track length
-

AccelTableT / AccelEntryT

-

Per-window keyboard accelerator table. Entries are matched against keystrokes in the event loop and fire onMenu(cmdId) on match.

-
  Field                      Description
-  -----                      -----------
-  AccelEntryT.key            ASCII character or KEY_Fxx constant
-  AccelEntryT.modifiers      Bitmask of ACCEL_CTRL, ACCEL_SHIFT, ACCEL_ALT
-  AccelEntryT.cmdId          Command ID passed to onMenu
-

VideoModeInfoT

-

Describes an available video mode (enumerated at init).

-
  Field            Description
-  -----            -----------
-  int32_t w, h     Resolution
-  int32_t bpp      Bits per pixel
-

CursorT

-

Software-rendered 16x16 cursor using AND/XOR mask encoding.

-
  Field                          Description
-  -----                          -----------
-  int32_t width, height          Cursor dimensions (always 16x16)
-  int32_t hotX, hotY             Hot spot coordinates
-  const uint16_t *andMask        AND mask (0 = draw pixel, 1 = transparent)
-  const uint16_t *xorData        XOR data (0 = black, 1 = white where AND = 0)
-

Bevel Convenience Macros

-
  Macro                      Description
-  -----                      -----------
-  BEVEL_RAISED(cs, bw)       Raised bevel style from ColorSchemeT ptr and border width
-  BEVEL_SUNKEN(cs, face, bw) Sunken bevel style with explicit face color
-  BEVEL_TROUGH(cs)           1px sunken trough (for scrollbar tracks)
-  BEVEL_SB_BUTTON(cs)        1px raised scrollbar button
-

Chrome Constants

-
  Define                  Value   Description
-  ------                  -----   -----------
-  CHROME_BORDER_WIDTH     4       Outer frame border width
-  CHROME_TITLE_HEIGHT     20      Title bar height
-  CHROME_TITLE_PAD        4       Title text padding
-  CHROME_INNER_BORDER     2       Inner chrome border
-  CHROME_MENU_HEIGHT      20      Menu bar height
-  CHROME_TOTAL_TOP        26      Total inset from top of frame to content
-  CHROME_TOTAL_SIDE       6       Total inset from side of frame to content
-  CHROME_TOTAL_BOTTOM     6       Total inset from bottom of frame to content
-  CHROME_CLOSE_BTN_SIZE   16      Close button gadget size
-

Hit Test Constants

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  HIT_CONTENT     0       Content area
-  HIT_TITLE       1       Title bar
-  HIT_CLOSE       2       Close gadget
-  HIT_RESIZE      3       Resize border
-  HIT_MENU        4       Menu bar
-  HIT_VSCROLL     5       Vertical scrollbar
-  HIT_HSCROLL     6       Horizontal scrollbar
-  HIT_MINIMIZE    7       Minimize gadget
-  HIT_MAXIMIZE    8       Maximize gadget
-  HIT_NONE        -1      No window hit (desktop)
-

Mouse Button Flags

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  MOUSE_LEFT      1       Left mouse button
-  MOUSE_RIGHT     2       Right mouse button
-  MOUSE_MIDDLE    4       Middle mouse button
-

Accelerator Modifier Flags

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  ACCEL_SHIFT     0x03    Shift key (matches BIOS shift state bits)
-  ACCEL_CTRL      0x04    Ctrl key
-  ACCEL_ALT       0x08    Alt key
-

Extended Key Codes

-
  Define                  Description
-  ------                  -----------
-  KEY_F1 .. KEY_F12       Function keys (scancode | 0x100)
-  KEY_INSERT              Insert key
-  KEY_DELETE              Delete key
-  KEY_HOME                Home key
-  KEY_END                 End key
-  KEY_PGUP                Page Up key
-  KEY_PGDN                Page Down key
-

Resize Edge Flags

-
  Define          Value   Description
-  ------          -----   -----------
-  RESIZE_NONE     0       No resize edge
-  RESIZE_LEFT     1       Left edge
-  RESIZE_RIGHT    2       Right edge
-  RESIZE_TOP      4       Top edge
-  RESIZE_BOTTOM   8       Bottom edge (combinable via OR for corners)
-

Utility Macros

-
  Macro           Description
-  -----           -----------
-  DVX_MIN(a, b)   Return the smaller of two values
-  DVX_MAX(a, b)   Return the larger of two values
-
-
-

dvxCursor.h -- Cursor Definitions

-

dvxCursor.h -- Cursor Definitions

-

Embedded 16x16 mouse cursor bitmaps compiled as static const data. No external cursor files. Uses the standard AND/XOR mask encoding from the IBM VGA hardware cursor spec.

-

Cursor Shape IDs

-
  Define                      Value   Description
-  ------                      -----   -----------
-  CURSOR_ARROW                0       Standard arrow (hot spot at tip)
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_H             1       Horizontal resize (left/right arrows)
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_V             2       Vertical resize (up/down arrows)
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_DIAG_NWSE     3       NW-SE diagonal resize
-  CURSOR_RESIZE_DIAG_NESW     4       NE-SW diagonal resize
-  CURSOR_BUSY                 5       Hourglass (wait)
-  CURSOR_CROSSHAIR            6       Crosshair for placement
-  CURSOR_COUNT                7       Total number of cursor shapes
-

Data

-

dvxCursors[CURSOR_COUNT]

-

Static const array of CursorT structs, indexed by CURSOR_xxx constants. Each entry includes the AND mask, XOR data, dimensions, and hot spot coordinates.

-
-
-

dvxVideo.h -- Layer 1: VESA VBE Video Backend

-

dvxVideo.h -- Layer 1: VESA VBE Video Backend

-

The lowest layer. Responsible for VESA VBE mode negotiation, LFB mapping via DPMI, system RAM backbuffer allocation, pixel format discovery, and color packing. LFB-only design: bank switching is deliberately unsupported.

-

videoInit

-
int32_t videoInit(DisplayT *d, int32_t requestedW, int32_t requestedH, int32_t preferredBpp);
-

Probe VBE for a mode matching the requested resolution and depth, enable it, map the LFB into DPMI linear address space, and allocate a system RAM backbuffer. preferredBpp is a hint; the closest available depth is used if an exact match is not found.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  d                Display context to initialize
-  requestedW/H     Desired screen resolution
-  preferredBpp     Preferred bits per pixel (8, 15, 16, or 32)
-

Returns: 0 on success, negative on failure.

-

videoShutdown

-
void videoShutdown(DisplayT *d);
-

Restore VGA text mode (mode 3), unmap the LFB, and free the backbuffer. Safe to call even if videoInit() failed.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context to shut down
-

packColor

-
uint32_t packColor(const DisplayT *d, uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b);
-

Pack an RGB triplet into the display's native pixel format. For direct-color modes (15/16/32 bpp), returns a packed pixel value using shift/mask fields. For 8-bit mode, returns the nearest palette index via Euclidean distance in RGB space.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context (provides pixel format)
-  r, g, b     Color components (0-255)
-

Returns: Native pixel value suitable for direct framebuffer write.

-

setClipRect

-
void setClipRect(DisplayT *d, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Set the clip rectangle on the display. All subsequent draw operations clip to this rectangle. The caller must save and restore the clip rect around scoped operations.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  x, y, w, h Clip rectangle in screen coordinates
-

resetClipRect

-
void resetClipRect(DisplayT *d);
-

Reset the clip rectangle to the full display dimensions.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-
-
-

dvxDraw.h -- Layer 2: Drawing Primitives

-

dvxDraw.h -- Layer 2: Drawing Primitives

-

All 2D drawing operations: rectangle fills, bitmap blits, text rendering, bevels, lines, and cursor rendering. Every function draws into the display's backbuffer and clips to the current clip rectangle. This layer is stateless beyond the clip rect on DisplayT.

-

drawInit

-
void drawInit(BlitOpsT *ops, const DisplayT *d);
-

Populate a BlitOpsT with the correct span functions for the display's pixel depth. Must be called once after videoInit().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ops         BlitOpsT to populate
-  d           Initialized display context
-

rectFill

-
void rectFill(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, uint32_t color);
-

Fill a rectangle with a solid color. Clips to the display clip rect. Workhorse for backgrounds, window fills, and clear operations.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y, w, h Rectangle to fill
-  color       Packed pixel color
-

rectCopy

-
void rectCopy(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t dstX, int32_t dstY, const uint8_t *srcBuf, int32_t srcPitch, int32_t srcX, int32_t srcY, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Copy a rectangle from an arbitrary source buffer into the backbuffer. Used to blit per-window content buffers during compositing.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  d             Display context
-  ops           Blit operations vtable
-  dstX, dstY    Destination position in backbuffer
-  srcBuf        Source pixel buffer
-  srcPitch      Source buffer bytes per row
-  srcX, srcY    Origin within source buffer
-  w, h          Rectangle dimensions to copy
-

rectCopyGrayscale

-
void rectCopyGrayscale(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t dstX, int32_t dstY, const uint8_t *srcBuf, int32_t srcPitch, int32_t srcX, int32_t srcY, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Copy a rectangle with grayscale conversion. Each pixel's RGB is converted to luminance (0.299R + 0.587G + 0.114B) for a disabled/grayed appearance.

-
  Parameter       Description
-  ---------       -----------
-  d               Display context
-  ops             Blit operations vtable
-  dstX, dstY      Destination position
-  srcBuf, srcPitch Source buffer and pitch
-  srcX, srcY      Source origin
-  w, h            Rectangle dimensions
-

drawBevel

-
void drawBevel(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, const BevelStyleT *style);
-

Draw a beveled frame. Top/left edges in highlight color, bottom/right in shadow. Interior filled with face color if non-zero.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y, w, h Outer bevel rectangle
-  style       Bevel colors and width
-

drawChar

-
int32_t drawChar(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, char ch, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Draw a single character glyph. When opaque is true, the background fills the entire cell; when false, only foreground pixels are drawn (transparent background).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Character position
-  ch          Character to draw
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

Returns: Advance width (always charWidth).

-

drawText

-
void drawText(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, const char *text, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Draw a null-terminated string. Calls drawChar per character.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Start position
-  text        Null-terminated string
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

drawTextN

-
void drawTextN(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, const char *text, int32_t count, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Optimized batch text rendering for a known character count. Computes clip bounds once, fills background in a single rectFill, then overlays glyph foreground pixels. Significantly faster than per-character drawChar for long runs (terminal rows, list items).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Start position
-  text        Character buffer (not required to be null-terminated)
-  count       Number of characters to render
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

textWidth

-
int32_t textWidth(const BitmapFontT *font, const char *text);
-

Return the pixel width of a null-terminated string (strlen(text) * charWidth).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  font        Bitmap font
-  text        Null-terminated string
-

Returns: Width in pixels.

-

accelParse

-
char accelParse(const char *text);
-

Scan text for an & prefix and return the following character as a lowercase accelerator key. "&File" returns 'f', "E&xit" returns 'x'.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  text        Text with optional & accelerator marker
-

Returns: Lowercase accelerator character, or 0 if none.

-

drawTextAccel

-
void drawTextAccel(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, const char *text, uint32_t fg, uint32_t bg, bool opaque);
-

Draw text with & accelerator markers. The character after & is drawn underlined to indicate the keyboard shortcut. && produces a literal &. Used for menu items and button labels.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  x, y        Start position
-  text        Text with & markers
-  fg, bg      Foreground and background packed colors
-  opaque      true = fill background, false = transparent
-

textWidthAccel

-
int32_t textWidthAccel(const BitmapFontT *font, const char *text);
-

Measure text width excluding & markers (so "&File" measures as 4 chars).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  font        Bitmap font
-  text        Text with optional & markers
-

Returns: Width in pixels.

-

drawMaskedBitmap

-
void drawMaskedBitmap(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, const uint16_t *andMask, const uint16_t *xorData, uint32_t fgColor, uint32_t bgColor);
-

Draw a 1-bit AND/XOR masked bitmap. Used for software-rendered mouse cursors.

-
  Parameter       Description
-  ---------       -----------
-  d               Display context
-  ops             Blit operations vtable
-  x, y            Screen position
-  w, h            Bitmap dimensions
-  andMask         AND transparency mask (one uint16_t per row)
-  xorData         XOR color data
-  fgColor, bgColor Cursor foreground and background packed colors
-

drawTermRow

-
void drawTermRow(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t cols, const uint8_t *lineData, const uint32_t *palette, bool blinkVisible, int32_t cursorCol);
-

Render an entire row of terminal character cells (ch/attr byte pairs) in a single pass. Colors looked up from a 16-color palette. Attribute bit 7 controls blink.

-
  Parameter       Description
-  ---------       -----------
-  d               Display context
-  ops             Blit operations vtable
-  font            Bitmap font
-  x, y            Row start position
-  cols            Number of columns
-  lineData        Packed ch/attr byte pairs (2 bytes per cell)
-  palette         16-entry packed color palette
-  blinkVisible    false = hide blinking characters
-  cursorCol       Column for inverted text cursor (-1 = none)
-

drawFocusRect

-
void drawFocusRect(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, uint32_t color);
-

Draw a 1px dotted rectangle (alternating pixels). Used for keyboard focus indicators, matching the Windows 3.x focus rectangle convention.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y, w, h Focus rectangle bounds
-  color       Dot color (packed)
-

drawHLine

-
void drawHLine(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, uint32_t color);
-

Draw a horizontal line (1px tall).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y        Start position
-  w           Width in pixels
-  color       Packed pixel color
-

drawVLine

-
void drawVLine(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t h, uint32_t color);
-

Draw a vertical line (1px wide).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  x, y        Start position
-  h           Height in pixels
-  color       Packed pixel color
-
-
-

dvxComp.h -- Layer 3: Dirty Rectangle Compositor

-

dvxComp.h -- Layer 3: Dirty Rectangle Compositor

-

Tracks changed screen regions and ensures only dirty regions are redrawn and flushed to video memory. The compositing pipeline: mark dirty, merge overlapping rects, redraw desktop + windows (back-to-front, painter's algorithm), flush to LFB.

-

dirtyListInit

-
void dirtyListInit(DirtyListT *dl);
-

Zero the dirty rect count. Called at the start of each frame.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list to initialize
-

dirtyListAdd

-
void dirtyListAdd(DirtyListT *dl, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Enqueue a dirty rectangle. Grows dynamically; triggers merge at a soft capacity limit.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list
-  x, y, w, h Dirty rectangle in screen coordinates
-

dirtyListMerge

-
void dirtyListMerge(DirtyListT *dl);
-

Consolidate the dirty list by merging overlapping and adjacent rects. Uses iterative pairwise merge: if combining two rects does not increase total area beyond a threshold, they are merged. Reduces compositor passes and LFB flush operations.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list to merge
-

dirtyListClear

-
void dirtyListClear(DirtyListT *dl);
-

Reset the dirty list to empty (sets count to 0).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dl          Dirty list to clear
-

flushRect

-
void flushRect(DisplayT *d, const RectT *r);
-

Copy a rectangle from the system RAM backbuffer to the LFB (video memory). This is the only place the real framebuffer is written. Uses platform-specific fast copy (rep movsd on DOS) for each scanline.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  r           Rectangle to flush
-

rectIntersect

-
bool rectIntersect(const RectT *a, const RectT *b, RectT *result);
-

Compute the intersection of two rectangles.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  a, b        Input rectangles
-  result      Output: intersection rectangle (valid only when return is true)
-

Returns: true if the rectangles overlap, false if disjoint.

-

rectIsEmpty

-
bool rectIsEmpty(const RectT *r);
-

Test whether a rectangle has zero or negative area.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  r           Rectangle to test
-

Returns: true if w <= 0 or h <= 0.

-
-
-

dvxWm.h -- Layer 4: Window Manager

-

dvxWm.h -- Layer 4: Window Manager

-

Manages the window lifecycle, Z-order stack, chrome drawing, hit testing, and interactive operations (drag, resize, scroll). The WM owns window geometry and chrome; content is owned by the application via callbacks or the widget system.

-

Initialization

-

wmInit

-
void wmInit(WindowStackT *stack);
-

Zero the window stack. Must be called before any other WM function.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack to initialize
-

Window Lifecycle

-

wmCreateWindow

-
WindowT *wmCreateWindow(WindowStackT *stack, DisplayT *d, const char *title, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, bool resizable);
-

Allocate a new window, initialize its geometry and content buffer, and push it to the top of the Z-order stack. Returns with all callbacks NULL; the caller should set onPaint/onKey/etc. before the next event loop iteration.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  d           Display context
-  title       Window title text
-  x, y        Initial position
-  w, h        Initial outer frame dimensions
-  resizable   true = allow user resize
-

Returns: Pointer to new WindowT, or NULL on failure.

-

wmDestroyWindow

-
void wmDestroyWindow(WindowStackT *stack, WindowT *win);
-

Free the window's content buffer and all attached resources (menu bar, scrollbars, widget tree), remove it from the stack, and dirty the vacated region.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  win         Window to destroy
-

Z-Order and Focus

-

wmRaiseWindow

-
void wmRaiseWindow(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t idx);
-

Move window at stack index idx to the top of the Z-order. Dirties both old and new top positions so overlapping windows get repainted.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list for repaint marking
-  idx         Stack index of window to raise
-

wmSetFocus

-
void wmSetFocus(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t idx);
-

Transfer keyboard focus to the window at stack index idx. Unfocuses the previously focused window and dirties both title bars.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  idx         Stack index of window to focus
-

Geometry

-

wmUpdateContentRect

-
void wmUpdateContentRect(WindowT *win);
-

Recompute contentX/Y/W/H from the window's outer frame dimensions, accounting for chrome borders, title bar, menu bar, and scrollbars. Must be called after any change to frame size or chrome configuration.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to update
-

wmReallocContentBuf

-
int32_t wmReallocContentBuf(WindowT *win, const DisplayT *d);
-

Reallocate the per-window content backbuffer to match current contentW/H. Old buffer contents are lost; caller should trigger a full repaint via onPaint afterward.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to reallocate
-  d           Display context (for bytes-per-pixel)
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on allocation failure.

-

wmMinWindowSize

-
void wmMinWindowSize(const WindowT *win, int32_t *minW, int32_t *minH);
-

Get the minimum window size. Accounts for chrome, gadgets, and menu bar.

-
  Parameter    Description
-  ---------    -----------
-  win          Window
-  minW, minH   Output: minimum width and height
-

Menu Bar

-

wmAddMenuBar

-
MenuBarT *wmAddMenuBar(WindowT *win);
-

Allocate and attach a menu bar to a window. Adjusts content area to make room (CHROME_MENU_HEIGHT pixels). One menu bar per window.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to add menu bar to
-

Returns: Pointer to the new MenuBarT.

-

wmDestroyMenuBar

-
void wmDestroyMenuBar(WindowT *win);
-

Free the menu bar and reclaim the content area.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window to remove menu bar from
-

wmAddMenu

-
MenuT *wmAddMenu(MenuBarT *bar, const char *label);
-

Append a dropdown menu to the menu bar. The label supports & accelerator markers (e.g. "&File").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  label       Menu label text
-

Returns: Pointer to the new MenuT to populate with items.

-

wmAddMenuItem

-
void wmAddMenuItem(MenuT *menu, const char *label, int32_t id);
-

Append a clickable item to a menu. The id is passed to the window's onMenu callback when selected.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append to
-  label       Item label (supports & markers)
-  id          Application-defined command ID
-

wmAddMenuCheckItem

-
void wmAddMenuCheckItem(MenuT *menu, const char *label, int32_t id, bool checked);
-

Add a checkbox-style menu item. Check state toggles on click; rendered with a checkmark glyph.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append to
-  label       Item label
-  id          Command ID
-  checked     Initial checked state
-

wmAddMenuRadioItem

-
void wmAddMenuRadioItem(MenuT *menu, const char *label, int32_t id, bool checked);
-

Add a radio-style menu item. Radio groups are defined implicitly by consecutive radio items; selecting one unchecks the others in the group.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append to
-  label       Item label
-  id          Command ID
-  checked     Initial checked state
-

wmAddMenuSeparator

-
void wmAddMenuSeparator(MenuT *menu);
-

Insert a horizontal separator line. Separators are not interactive.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to append separator to
-

wmMenuItemIsChecked

-
bool wmMenuItemIsChecked(MenuBarT *bar, int32_t id);
-

Query the checked state of a menu item by command ID. Searches all menus in the bar.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  id          Command ID to query
-

Returns: true if checked.

-

wmMenuItemSetChecked

-
void wmMenuItemSetChecked(MenuBarT *bar, int32_t id, bool checked);
-

Set the checked state of a menu item by command ID. For radio items, setting checked=true also unchecks other radio items in the same group.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  id          Command ID
-  checked     New checked state
-

wmMenuItemSetEnabled

-
void wmMenuItemSetEnabled(MenuBarT *bar, int32_t id, bool enabled);
-

Enable or disable a menu item by command ID.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  bar         Menu bar
-  id          Command ID
-  enabled     true = enabled, false = grayed out
-

wmAddSubMenu

-
MenuT *wmAddSubMenu(MenuT *parentMenu, const char *label);
-

Create a cascading submenu attached to a parent menu. The child MenuT is heap-allocated and freed when the parent window is destroyed.

-
  Parameter    Description
-  ---------    -----------
-  parentMenu   Parent menu to attach submenu to
-  label        Submenu label text
-

Returns: Pointer to the child MenuT, or NULL on allocation failure.

-

wmCreateMenu

-
MenuT *wmCreateMenu(void);
-

Allocate a heap-resident MenuT for use as a context menu (right-click). Unlike menu bar menus, context menus are standalone allocations. Free with wmFreeMenu().

-

Returns: Pointer to the new MenuT.

-

wmFreeMenu

-
void wmFreeMenu(MenuT *menu);
-

Free a standalone menu allocated with wmCreateMenu(). Also frees any heap-allocated submenu children recursively.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  menu        Menu to free
-

Scrollbars

-

wmAddVScrollbar

-
ScrollbarT *wmAddVScrollbar(WindowT *win, int32_t min, int32_t max, int32_t pageSize);
-

Attach a vertical scrollbar to the right edge of the window's content area. Shrinks contentW by SCROLLBAR_WIDTH pixels.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  min, max    Scroll value range
-  pageSize    Visible portion (controls thumb size)
-

Returns: Pointer to the new ScrollbarT.

-

wmAddHScrollbar

-
ScrollbarT *wmAddHScrollbar(WindowT *win, int32_t min, int32_t max, int32_t pageSize);
-

Attach a horizontal scrollbar to the bottom edge. Shrinks contentH by SCROLLBAR_WIDTH pixels.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  min, max    Scroll value range
-  pageSize    Visible portion
-

Returns: Pointer to the new ScrollbarT.

-

Drawing

-

wmDrawChrome

-
void wmDrawChrome(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, const ColorSchemeT *colors, WindowT *win, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Draw the window frame: outer bevel, title bar with text, close/minimize/maximize gadgets, and menu bar if present. Drawing is clipped to the intersection with clipTo.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font for title text
-  colors      Color scheme
-  win         Window to draw chrome for
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle to clip drawing to
-

wmDrawContent

-
void wmDrawContent(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, WindowT *win, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Blit the window's content backbuffer into the display backbuffer, clipped to the dirty rect. Pure copy operation (no drawing).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  win         Window
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle
-

wmDrawScrollbars

-
void wmDrawScrollbars(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const ColorSchemeT *colors, WindowT *win, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Draw scrollbars (track, arrows, proportional thumb) for a window. Drawn after content so scrollbars overlay the content area edge.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  colors      Color scheme
-  win         Window
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle
-

wmDrawMinimizedIcons

-
void wmDrawMinimizedIcons(DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const ColorSchemeT *colors, const WindowStackT *stack, const RectT *clipTo);
-

Draw icons for all minimized windows along the bottom of the screen. Each icon shows a scaled preview of the window's content with a beveled border.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  colors      Color scheme
-  stack       Window stack
-  clipTo      Dirty rectangle
-

Hit Testing

-

wmHitTest

-
int32_t wmHitTest(const WindowStackT *stack, int32_t mx, int32_t my, int32_t *hitPart);
-

Determine which window and chrome region is under the given screen coordinates. Iterates front-to-back (highest Z first) so the topmost window wins.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  mx, my      Screen coordinates
-  hitPart     Output: HIT_CONTENT, HIT_TITLE, HIT_CLOSE, etc.
-

Returns: Stack index of hit window, or -1 for desktop.

-

wmResizeEdgeHit

-
int32_t wmResizeEdgeHit(const WindowT *win, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Determine which edge(s) of a window's border zone are targeted for resize.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  mx, my      Screen coordinates
-

Returns: Bitmask of RESIZE_LEFT / RESIZE_RIGHT / RESIZE_TOP / RESIZE_BOTTOM.

-

wmMinimizedIconHit

-
int32_t wmMinimizedIconHit(const WindowStackT *stack, const DisplayT *d, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Hit-test minimized icons at the bottom of the screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  d           Display context
-  mx, my      Screen coordinates
-

Returns: Stack index of the minimized window, or -1.

-

Drag and Resize

-

wmDragBegin

-
void wmDragBegin(WindowStackT *stack, int32_t idx, int32_t mouseX, int32_t mouseY);
-

Begin a window drag operation. Records the mouse offset from the window origin.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  stack         Window stack
-  idx           Stack index of window to drag
-  mouseX/Y      Current mouse position
-

wmDragMove

-
void wmDragMove(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t mouseX, int32_t mouseY, int32_t screenW, int32_t screenH);
-

Update window position during an active drag. Dirties both old and new positions.

-
  Parameter      Description
-  ---------      -----------
-  stack          Window stack
-  dl             Dirty list
-  mouseX/Y       Current mouse position
-  screenW/H      Screen dimensions (for clamping)
-

wmDragEnd

-
void wmDragEnd(WindowStackT *stack);
-

End the current drag operation. Clears dragWindow state.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-

wmResizeBegin

-
void wmResizeBegin(WindowStackT *stack, int32_t idx, int32_t edge, int32_t mouseX, int32_t mouseY);
-

Begin a window resize operation. Records which edge(s) are being dragged.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  idx         Stack index
-  edge        Bitmask of RESIZE_xxx flags
-  mouseX/Y    Current mouse position
-

wmResizeMove

-
void wmResizeMove(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, int32_t *mouseX, int32_t *mouseY);
-

Update window dimensions during an active resize. Enforces MIN_WINDOW_W/H and maxW/maxH constraints. Reallocates content buffer and calls onResize if size changed. mouseX/mouseY are in/out: clamped on return for cursor warping.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  mouseX/Y    In/out: mouse position (clamped on return)
-

wmResizeEnd

-
void wmResizeEnd(WindowStackT *stack);
-

End the current resize operation. Clears resizeWindow state.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-

Scrollbar Interaction

-

wmScrollbarClick

-
void wmScrollbarClick(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t idx, int32_t orient, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Handle an initial click on a scrollbar. Determines what was hit (arrows, trough, or thumb) and either adjusts the value immediately or begins a thumb drag.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  idx         Stack index of window
-  orient      SCROLL_VERTICAL or SCROLL_HORIZONTAL
-  mx, my      Click screen coordinates
-

wmScrollbarDrag

-
void wmScrollbarDrag(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, int32_t mx, int32_t my);
-

Update the scroll value during an active thumb drag. Maps mouse position along the track to a proportional scroll value.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  mx, my      Current mouse position
-

wmScrollbarEnd

-
void wmScrollbarEnd(WindowStackT *stack);
-

End an active scrollbar thumb drag.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-

Minimize / Maximize / Restore

-

wmMaximize

-
void wmMaximize(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, WindowT *win);
-

Maximize a window. Saves current geometry, then expands to screen or maxW/maxH bounds.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  win         Window to maximize
-

wmMinimize

-
void wmMinimize(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, WindowT *win);
-

Minimize a window. Hides the window and shows an icon at the bottom of the screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  win         Window to minimize
-

wmRestore

-
void wmRestore(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, WindowT *win);
-

Restore a maximized window to its pre-maximize geometry.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  win         Maximized window to restore
-

wmRestoreMinimized

-
void wmRestoreMinimized(WindowStackT *stack, DirtyListT *dl, const DisplayT *d, WindowT *win);
-

Restore a minimized window (show it again and remove the icon).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  dl          Dirty list
-  d           Display context
-  win         Minimized window to restore
-

Minimized Icon Layout

-

wmMinimizedIconPos

-
void wmMinimizedIconPos(const DisplayT *d, int32_t index, int32_t *x, int32_t *y);
-

Compute the screen position of a minimized icon by ordinal index. Icons wrap into rows from bottom to top when the screen fills up.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  d           Display context
-  index       Ordinal index of the minimized icon
-  x, y        Output: screen position
-

wmMinimizedIconRect

-
void wmMinimizedIconRect(const WindowStackT *stack, const DisplayT *d, int32_t *y, int32_t *h);
-

Compute the screen rect covering all minimized icon rows. Used to dirty the icon area when windows are minimized or restored.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  stack       Window stack
-  d           Display context
-  y, h        Output: vertical extent of icon area
-

Miscellaneous

-

wmSetTitle

-
void wmSetTitle(WindowT *win, DirtyListT *dl, const char *title);
-

Set the window title and dirty the title bar for repaint.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  dl          Dirty list
-  title       New title text
-

wmSetIcon

-
int32_t wmSetIcon(WindowT *win, const char *path, const DisplayT *d);
-

Load an icon image for a window from a file. Converts to display pixel format.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  win         Window
-  path        Image file path
-  d           Display context
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-
-
-

dvxApp.h -- Layer 5: Application API

-

dvxApp.h -- Layer 5: Application API

-

The topmost layer and the public-facing API. Aggregates all lower layers into a single AppContextT. Applications interact exclusively through dvx*() functions and window callbacks. The event loop follows a cooperative model: poll, dispatch, composite, yield.

-

AppContextT

-

Single monolithic context that owns all GUI state. Contains the display, window stack, dirty list, blit ops, font, color scheme, popup state, cursor state, mouse/keyboard state, tooltip state, wallpaper buffer, video mode list, and various configuration fields. Allocated on the caller's stack or statically.

-

Initialization and Shutdown

-

dvxInit

-
int32_t dvxInit(AppContextT *ctx, int32_t requestedW, int32_t requestedH, int32_t preferredBpp);
-

Initialize the entire GUI stack: video mode, input devices, font, color scheme, cursor shapes, and internal state. Single entry point for starting a DVX application.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  ctx              Application context to initialize
-  requestedW/H     Desired screen resolution
-  preferredBpp     Preferred bits per pixel
-

Returns: 0 on success, negative on failure.

-

dvxShutdown

-
void dvxShutdown(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Tear down the GUI stack in reverse order: destroy all windows, restore text mode, release input devices. Safe to call after a failed dvxInit().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxChangeVideoMode

-
int32_t dvxChangeVideoMode(AppContextT *ctx, int32_t requestedW, int32_t requestedH, int32_t preferredBpp);
-

Switch to a new video mode live. Reallocates the backbuffer, all window content buffers, repacks colors, rescales wallpaper, and repositions off-screen windows.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  ctx              Application context
-  requestedW/H     New resolution
-  preferredBpp     New bits per pixel
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure (old mode restored).

-

Event Loop

-

dvxRun

-
void dvxRun(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Enter the main event loop. Polls input, dispatches events, composites dirty regions, and yields on each iteration. Returns when ctx->running becomes false.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxUpdate

-
bool dvxUpdate(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Process exactly one frame of the event loop. For applications that integrate the GUI into their own main loop (e.g. polling serial ports between frames).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: false when the GUI wants to exit.

-

dvxQuit

-
void dvxQuit(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Request exit from the main event loop (sets ctx->running = false).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Window Management

-

dvxCreateWindow

-
WindowT *dvxCreateWindow(AppContextT *ctx, const char *title, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h, bool resizable);
-

Create a window at an explicit screen position. The window is raised to the top, focused, and its entire region is dirtied.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  title       Window title
-  x, y        Screen position
-  w, h        Outer frame dimensions
-  resizable   true = allow user resize
-

Returns: Pointer to new WindowT.

-

dvxCreateWindowCentered

-
WindowT *dvxCreateWindowCentered(AppContextT *ctx, const char *title, int32_t w, int32_t h, bool resizable);
-

Convenience wrapper that centers the window on screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  title       Window title
-  w, h        Outer frame dimensions
-  resizable   true = allow user resize
-

Returns: Pointer to new WindowT.

-

dvxDestroyWindow

-
void dvxDestroyWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Destroy a window, free all its resources, and dirty its former region.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to destroy
-

dvxRaiseWindow

-
void dvxRaiseWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Raise a window to the top of the Z-order and give it focus.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to raise
-

dvxFitWindow

-
void dvxFitWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Resize a window to exactly fit its widget tree's computed minimum size (plus chrome). Used for dialog boxes and fixed-layout windows.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to fit
-

dvxFitWindowW

-
void dvxFitWindowW(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Resize window width only to fit widget tree's minimum width (plus chrome).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to fit
-

dvxFitWindowH

-
void dvxFitWindowH(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Resize window height only to fit widget tree's minimum height (plus chrome).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to fit
-

dvxResizeWindow

-
void dvxResizeWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, int32_t newW, int32_t newH);
-

Programmatically resize a window to the specified outer dimensions.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to resize
-  newW, newH  New outer frame dimensions
-

dvxMinimizeWindow

-
void dvxMinimizeWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Minimize a window (show as icon at bottom of screen).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to minimize
-

dvxMaximizeWindow

-
void dvxMaximizeWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Maximize a window (expand to fill screen or maxW/maxH).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to maximize
-

dvxHideWindow

-
void dvxHideWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Hide a window without destroying it. Marks the exposed region dirty.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to hide
-

dvxShowWindow

-
void dvxShowWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Show a previously hidden window. Marks its region dirty for repaint.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to show
-

Invalidation

-

dvxInvalidateRect

-
void dvxInvalidateRect(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, int32_t x, int32_t y, int32_t w, int32_t h);
-

Mark a sub-region of a window's content area as needing repaint. Coordinates are relative to the content area, not the screen. Triggers onPaint during the next composite pass.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  x, y, w, h Dirty rectangle in content-relative coordinates
-

dvxInvalidateWindow

-
void dvxInvalidateWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Mark the entire window content area as dirty.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to invalidate
-

Window Properties

-

dvxSetTitle

-
void dvxSetTitle(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, const char *title);
-

Set a window's title text and dirty the title bar.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  title       New title text
-

dvxSetWindowIcon

-
int32_t dvxSetWindowIcon(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, const char *path);
-

Load an icon for a window from an image file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  path        Image file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

dvxSetBusy

-
void dvxSetBusy(AppContextT *ctx, bool busy);
-

Set or clear busy state. While busy, the hourglass cursor is shown and input is blocked.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  busy        true = show hourglass, false = normal
-

Accessors

-

dvxGetFont

-
const BitmapFontT *dvxGetFont(const AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the default font.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the active BitmapFontT.

-

dvxGetColors

-
const ColorSchemeT *dvxGetColors(const AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the current color scheme.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the active ColorSchemeT.

-

dvxGetDisplay

-
DisplayT *dvxGetDisplay(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the display context.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the DisplayT.

-

dvxGetBlitOps

-
const BlitOpsT *dvxGetBlitOps(const AppContextT *ctx);
-

Get a pointer to the blit operations vtable.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Returns: Pointer to the active BlitOpsT.

-

dvxGetVideoModes

-
const VideoModeInfoT *dvxGetVideoModes(const AppContextT *ctx, int32_t *count);
-

Return the list of available video modes enumerated at init time.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  count       Output: number of mode entries
-

Returns: Pointer to the VideoModeInfoT array.

-

Color Scheme

-

dvxSetColor

-
void dvxSetColor(AppContextT *ctx, ColorIdE id, uint8_t r, uint8_t g, uint8_t b);
-

Set a single color by ID. Repacks to native pixel format and invalidates the entire screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  id          Color ID (ColorIdE)
-  r, g, b     RGB values (0-255)
-

dvxGetColor

-
void dvxGetColor(const AppContextT *ctx, ColorIdE id, uint8_t *r, uint8_t *g, uint8_t *b);
-

Get a color's RGB values by ID.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  id          Color ID (ColorIdE)
-  r, g, b     Output: RGB values
-

dvxApplyColorScheme

-
void dvxApplyColorScheme(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Apply all colors from ctx->colorRgb[] at once (repack + full repaint).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxResetColorScheme

-
void dvxResetColorScheme(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Reset all colors to the built-in defaults and repaint.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxLoadTheme

-
bool dvxLoadTheme(AppContextT *ctx, const char *filename);
-

Load a theme file (INI format with [colors] section) and apply it.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  filename    Path to theme INI file
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxSaveTheme

-
bool dvxSaveTheme(const AppContextT *ctx, const char *filename);
-

Save the current color scheme to a theme file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  filename    Output file path
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxColorName

-
const char *dvxColorName(ColorIdE id);
-

Return the INI key name for a color ID (e.g. "desktop", "windowFace").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  id          Color ID
-

Returns: Static string.

-

dvxColorLabel

-
const char *dvxColorLabel(ColorIdE id);
-

Return a human-readable display label (e.g. "Desktop", "Cursor Color").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  id          Color ID
-

Returns: Static string.

-

Wallpaper

-

dvxSetWallpaper

-
bool dvxSetWallpaper(AppContextT *ctx, const char *path);
-

Load and apply a wallpaper image using the current wallpaperMode (stretch/tile/center). Pass NULL to clear the wallpaper.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  path        Image file path, or NULL to clear
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxSetWallpaperMode

-
void dvxSetWallpaperMode(AppContextT *ctx, WallpaperModeE mode);
-

Change the wallpaper display mode and re-render. No effect if no wallpaper is loaded.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  mode        WallpaperStretchE, WallpaperTileE, or WallpaperCenterE
-

Mouse Configuration

-

dvxSetMouseConfig

-
void dvxSetMouseConfig(AppContextT *ctx, int32_t wheelDir, int32_t dblClickMs, int32_t accelThreshold);
-

Configure mouse behavior.

-
  Parameter        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  ctx              Application context
-  wheelDir         1 = normal, -1 = reversed
-  dblClickMs       Double-click speed in milliseconds (e.g. 500)
-  accelThreshold   Double-speed threshold in mickeys/sec (0 = don't change)
-

Accelerators

-

dvxCreateAccelTable

-
AccelTableT *dvxCreateAccelTable(void);
-

Allocate a new accelerator table. Attach to a window via win->accelTable.

-

Returns: Pointer to new AccelTableT.

-

dvxFreeAccelTable

-
void dvxFreeAccelTable(AccelTableT *table);
-

Free an accelerator table and its entries.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  table       Table to free
-

dvxAddAccel

-
void dvxAddAccel(AccelTableT *table, int32_t key, int32_t modifiers, int32_t cmdId);
-

Register a keyboard shortcut. On match, fires the window's onMenu callback with cmdId.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  table       Accelerator table
-  key         ASCII character or KEY_Fxx constant
-  modifiers   Bitmask of ACCEL_CTRL / ACCEL_SHIFT / ACCEL_ALT
-  cmdId       Command ID passed to onMenu
-

Window Arrangement

-

dvxCascadeWindows

-
void dvxCascadeWindows(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Cascade all visible, non-minimized windows. Each is offset diagonally by the title bar height.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxTileWindows

-
void dvxTileWindows(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Arrange visible windows in an NxM grid filling the screen.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxTileWindowsH

-
void dvxTileWindowsH(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Tile windows horizontally (side by side, equal width, full height).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

dvxTileWindowsV

-
void dvxTileWindowsV(AppContextT *ctx);
-

Tile windows vertically (stacked, full width, equal height).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-

Image I/O

-

dvxLoadImage

-
uint8_t *dvxLoadImage(const AppContextT *ctx, const char *path, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH, int32_t *outPitch);
-

Load an image file (BMP, PNG, JPEG, GIF) and convert to the display's native pixel format. Caller must free with dvxFreeImage().

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  ctx           Application context
-  path          Image file path
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-  outPitch      Output: row pitch in bytes
-

Returns: Pixel buffer, or NULL on failure.

-

dvxLoadImageFromMemory

-
uint8_t *dvxLoadImageFromMemory(const AppContextT *ctx, const uint8_t *data, int32_t dataLen, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH, int32_t *outPitch);
-

Load an image from a memory buffer. Same output format as dvxLoadImage(). Caller must free with dvxFreeImage().

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  ctx           Application context
-  data          Image data buffer
-  dataLen       Buffer size in bytes
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-  outPitch      Output: row pitch in bytes
-

Returns: Pixel buffer, or NULL on failure.

-

dvxFreeImage

-
void dvxFreeImage(uint8_t *data);
-

Free a pixel buffer returned by dvxLoadImage() or dvxLoadImageFromMemory().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  data        Buffer to free
-

dvxImageInfo

-
bool dvxImageInfo(const char *path, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH);
-

Query image dimensions without decoding the full file.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  path          Image file path
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxSaveImage

-
int32_t dvxSaveImage(const AppContextT *ctx, const uint8_t *data, int32_t w, int32_t h, int32_t pitch, const char *path);
-

Save native-format pixel data to a PNG file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  data        Pixel data in display native format
-  w, h        Image dimensions
-  pitch       Row pitch in bytes
-  path        Output file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

Screenshots

-

dvxScreenshot

-
int32_t dvxScreenshot(AppContextT *ctx, const char *path);
-

Save the entire screen (backbuffer contents) to a PNG file. Converts from native pixel format to RGB.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  path        Output PNG file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

dvxWindowScreenshot

-
int32_t dvxWindowScreenshot(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win, const char *path);
-

Save a window's content to a PNG file.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window
-  path        Output PNG file path
-

Returns: 0 on success, -1 on failure.

-

Clipboard

-

dvxClipboardCopy

-
void dvxClipboardCopy(const char *text, int32_t len);
-

Copy text to the process-wide clipboard buffer. Simple static buffer (not inter-process).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  text        Text to copy
-  len         Length in bytes
-

dvxClipboardGet

-
const char *dvxClipboardGet(int32_t *outLen);
-

Retrieve the current clipboard contents. Returns a pointer to the internal buffer (valid until the next dvxClipboardCopy), or NULL if empty.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  outLen      Output: length of clipboard text
-

Returns: Clipboard text, or NULL.

-

Resource Loading

-

dvxResLoadIcon

-
uint8_t *dvxResLoadIcon(AppContextT *ctx, const char *dxePath, const char *resName, int32_t *outW, int32_t *outH, int32_t *outPitch);
-

Load an icon/image resource from a DXE file and decode to native pixel format. Caller must free with dvxFreeImage().

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  ctx           Application context
-  dxePath       Path to DXE file
-  resName       Resource name within the DXE
-  outW, outH    Output: image dimensions
-  outPitch      Output: row pitch
-

Returns: Pixel buffer, or NULL if not found.

-

dvxResLoadText

-
bool dvxResLoadText(const char *dxePath, const char *resName, char *buf, int32_t bufSize);
-

Load a text resource from a DXE file into a caller-provided buffer. Null-terminated and truncated to fit bufSize.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dxePath     Path to DXE file
-  resName     Resource name
-  buf         Output buffer
-  bufSize     Buffer capacity
-

Returns: true on success.

-

dvxResLoadData

-
void *dvxResLoadData(const char *dxePath, const char *resName, uint32_t *outSize);
-

Load a raw binary resource from a DXE file. Returns a malloc'd buffer that the caller must free.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  dxePath     Path to DXE file
-  resName     Resource name
-  outSize     Output: data size in bytes
-

Returns: Data buffer, or NULL if not found.

-

Utilities

-

dvxTextHash

-
uint32_t dvxTextHash(const char *text);
-

Compute a djb2-xor hash for cheap dirty detection. Compare at save time with the current hash to detect changes without a shadow copy. Not cryptographic.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  text        Null-terminated string to hash
-

Returns: 32-bit hash value.

-
-
-

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-

dvxWidget.h -- Widget System

-

Retained-mode widget toolkit layered on the DVX window manager. Widgets form a tree (parent-child) rooted at a per-window VBox container. Layout is automatic: measure minimum sizes bottom-up, then allocate space top-down with flexbox-like weighted distribution. Widget types are registered dynamically at runtime via DXE plugins.

-

WidgetT Structure

-

Core widget structure. Generic across all widget types; type-specific data lives in the void *data pointer managed by each widget's DXE.

-
  Field                                       Description
-  -----                                       -----------
-  int32_t type                                Widget type ID (assigned by wgtRegisterClass)
-  const WidgetClassT *wclass                  Vtable for this widget type
-  char name[MAX_WIDGET_NAME]                  Widget name for lookup via wgtFind
-  parent, firstChild, lastChild, nextSibling  Tree linkage pointers
-  WindowT *window                             Owning window
-  int32_t x, y, w, h                         Computed geometry (relative to content area)
-  int32_t calcMinW, calcMinH                  Computed minimum size (from layout pass)
-  int32_t minW, minH, maxW, maxH, prefW, prefH  Size hints (tagged sizes)
-  int32_t weight                              Extra-space distribution weight (0=fixed, 100=normal)
-  WidgetAlignE align                          Main-axis alignment for children
-  int32_t spacing, padding                    Tagged sizes for child spacing and padding
-  uint32_t fgColor, bgColor                   Custom colors (0 = use scheme defaults)
-  bool visible, enabled, readOnly             State flags
-  bool swallowTab                             Tab key goes to widget, not focus navigation
-  char accelKey                               Accelerator character (0 = none)
-  void *userData, *data                       Application data and widget-private data
-  const char *tooltip                         Tooltip text (NULL = none)
-  MenuT *contextMenu                          Right-click menu (NULL = none)
-

Universal Callbacks:

-
  Callback                                           Description
-  --------                                           -----------
-  onClick(WidgetT *w)                                Widget clicked
-  onDblClick(WidgetT *w)                             Widget double-clicked
-  onChange(WidgetT *w)                               Value changed
-  onFocus(WidgetT *w)                                Widget gained focus
-  onBlur(WidgetT *w)                                 Widget lost focus
-  onKeyPress(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyAscii)           ASCII key press
-  onKeyDown(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)  Key down
-  onKeyUp(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)    Key up
-  onMouseDown(WidgetT *w, int32_t btn, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Mouse button pressed
-  onMouseUp(WidgetT *w, int32_t btn, int32_t x, int32_t y)    Mouse button released
-  onMouseMove(WidgetT *w, int32_t btn, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Mouse moved
-  onScroll(WidgetT *w, int32_t delta)                Mouse wheel
-  onValidate(WidgetT *w)                             Return false to cancel a write
-

Size Specification Macros

-
  Macro            Description
-  -----            -----------
-  wgtPixels(v)     Size in pixels
-  wgtChars(v)      Size in character widths (multiplied by charWidth at layout)
-  wgtPercent(v)    Size as percentage of parent dimension
-

Widget Class Flags

-
  Flag                        Description
-  ----                        -----------
-  WCLASS_FOCUSABLE            Can receive keyboard focus (Tab navigation)
-  WCLASS_HORIZ_CONTAINER      Lays out children horizontally (vs. vertical)
-  WCLASS_PAINTS_CHILDREN      Widget handles child rendering itself
-  WCLASS_NO_HIT_RECURSE       Hit testing stops here, no child recursion
-  WCLASS_FOCUS_FORWARD        Accel hit forwards focus to next focusable sibling
-  WCLASS_HAS_POPUP            Has dropdown popup overlay
-  WCLASS_SCROLLABLE           Accepts mouse wheel events
-  WCLASS_SCROLL_CONTAINER     Scroll container (ScrollPane)
-  WCLASS_NEEDS_POLL           Needs periodic polling
-  WCLASS_SWALLOWS_TAB         Tab key goes to widget, not focus navigation
-  WCLASS_RELAYOUT_ON_SCROLL   Full relayout on scrollbar drag
-  WCLASS_PRESS_RELEASE        Click = press + release (Button, ImageButton)
-  WCLASS_ACCEL_WHEN_HIDDEN    Accelerator matching works even when invisible
-

Window Integration

-

wgtInitWindow

-
WidgetT *wgtInitWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win);
-

Initialize the widget system for a window. Creates a root VBox container that fills the content area, and installs callback handlers (onPaint, onMouse, onKey, onResize) for widget-based event dispatch. The window's userData is set to the AppContextT pointer.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  win         Window to initialize
-

Returns: Root VBox widget (add children to this).

-

Widget Operations

-

wgtGetContext

-
AppContextT *wgtGetContext(const WidgetT *w);
-

Walk from any widget up the tree to the root, then retrieve the AppContextT stored in the window's userData. Lets any widget access the full application context.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Any widget in the tree
-

Returns: Pointer to the AppContextT.

-

wgtInvalidate

-
void wgtInvalidate(WidgetT *w);
-

Mark a widget as needing both re-layout (measure + position) and repaint. Propagates upward to ancestors. Use after structural changes (adding/removing children, text changes that affect size).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to invalidate
-

wgtInvalidatePaint

-
void wgtInvalidatePaint(WidgetT *w);
-

Mark a widget as needing repaint only, without re-layout. Use for visual-only changes (checkbox toggle, selection highlight, cursor blink).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to repaint
-

wgtSetText

-
void wgtSetText(WidgetT *w, const char *text);
-

Set widget text content (dispatches to the widget class's SET_TEXT handler).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  text        New text
-

wgtGetText

-
const char *wgtGetText(const WidgetT *w);
-

Get the widget's current text content.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-

Returns: Text string (empty string if no handler).

-

wgtSetEnabled

-
void wgtSetEnabled(WidgetT *w, bool enabled);
-

Enable or disable a widget. Disabled widgets are grayed out and do not receive input.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  enabled     true = enabled, false = disabled
-

wgtSetReadOnly

-
void wgtSetReadOnly(WidgetT *w, bool readOnly);
-

Set read-only mode. Allows scrolling and selection but blocks editing.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  readOnly    true = read-only
-

wgtSetFocused

-
void wgtSetFocused(WidgetT *w);
-

Set keyboard focus to a widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to focus
-

wgtGetFocused

-
WidgetT *wgtGetFocused(void);
-

Get the currently focused widget.

-

Returns: Focused widget, or NULL.

-

wgtSetVisible

-
void wgtSetVisible(WidgetT *w, bool visible);
-

Show or hide a widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  visible     true = visible, false = hidden
-

wgtSetName

-
void wgtSetName(WidgetT *w, const char *name);
-

Set a widget's name for lookup via wgtFind().

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  name        Name string (max MAX_WIDGET_NAME chars)
-

wgtFind

-
WidgetT *wgtFind(WidgetT *root, const char *name);
-

Find a widget by name. Searches the subtree rooted at root.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  root        Root of subtree to search
-  name        Widget name to find
-

Returns: Matching widget, or NULL.

-

wgtDestroy

-
void wgtDestroy(WidgetT *w);
-

Destroy a widget and all its children. Removes from parent's child list.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget to destroy
-

wgtSetTooltip

-
void wgtSetTooltip(WidgetT *w, const char *text);
-

Set tooltip text for a widget. Pass NULL to remove. Caller owns the string and it must outlive the widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  w           Widget
-  text        Tooltip text, or NULL
-

widgetOnResize

-
void widgetOnResize(WindowT *win, int32_t newW, int32_t newH);
-

Default window resize handler installed by wgtInitWindow(). Re-evaluates scrollbars and relayouts the widget tree. Call from custom onResize handlers to chain to the widget system.

-
  Parameter    Description
-  ---------    -----------
-  win          Window being resized
-  newW, newH   New content dimensions
-

Layout

-

wgtResolveSize

-
int32_t wgtResolveSize(int32_t taggedSize, int32_t parentSize, int32_t charWidth);
-

Decode a tagged size value (WGT_SIZE_PIXELS/CHARS/PERCENT) into a concrete pixel count. Returns 0 for a raw 0 input (meaning "auto").

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  taggedSize    Tagged size value
-  parentSize    Parent dimension (for PERCENT mode)
-  charWidth     Font character width (for CHARS mode)
-

Returns: Size in pixels.

-

wgtLayout

-
void wgtLayout(WidgetT *root, int32_t availW, int32_t availH, const BitmapFontT *font);
-

Execute the full two-pass layout algorithm. Pass 1 (bottom-up): compute minimum sizes. Pass 2 (top-down): allocate space with weighted distribution. Normally called automatically; exposed for cases where layout must be forced before the next paint.

-
  Parameter     Description
-  ---------     -----------
-  root          Root widget
-  availW/H      Available space
-  font          Bitmap font (for character-based sizing)
-

wgtPaint

-
void wgtPaint(WidgetT *root, DisplayT *d, const BlitOpsT *ops, const BitmapFontT *font, const ColorSchemeT *colors);
-

Paint the entire widget tree by depth-first traversal. Each widget's clip rect is set to its bounds. Overlays (popups, tooltips) are painted in a second pass on top.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  root        Root widget
-  d           Display context
-  ops         Blit operations vtable
-  font        Bitmap font
-  colors      Color scheme
-

Debug

-

wgtSetDebugLayout

-
void wgtSetDebugLayout(AppContextT *ctx, bool enabled);
-

Draw colored borders around layout containers for debugging.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  ctx         Application context
-  enabled     true = draw debug borders
-

Dynamic Widget Registration

-

wgtRegisterClass

-
int32_t wgtRegisterClass(const WidgetClassT *wclass);
-

Register a new widget class at runtime. Appends to widgetClassTable. The WidgetClassT must remain valid for the lifetime of the process (typically static const in a DXE).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  wclass      Widget class vtable to register
-

Returns: Assigned type ID.

-

wgtRegisterApi

-
void wgtRegisterApi(const char *name, const void *api);
-

Register a widget API struct under a name. Each widget DXE registers its API during initialization. Callers retrieve it via wgtGetApi() and cast to the widget-specific type.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name (e.g. "button", "listbox")
-  api         Pointer to the widget's API struct
-

wgtGetApi

-
const void *wgtGetApi(const char *name);
-

Retrieve a registered widget API struct by name.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: Pointer to the API struct, or NULL if not found.

-

Widget Interface Descriptors

-

wgtRegisterIface

-
void wgtRegisterIface(const char *name, const WgtIfaceT *iface);
-

Register an interface descriptor for a widget type. Used by the BASIC form runtime and IDE for generic property/method dispatch.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-  iface       Interface descriptor
-

wgtGetIface

-
const WgtIfaceT *wgtGetIface(const char *name);
-

Retrieve an interface descriptor by widget type name.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: Interface descriptor, or NULL.

-

wgtFindByBasName

-
const char *wgtFindByBasName(const char *basName);
-

Find a widget type name by its VB-style name (e.g. "CommandButton" -> "button"). Case-insensitive search.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  basName     VB-style widget name
-

Returns: Internal type name, or NULL.

-

wgtIfaceCount

-
int32_t wgtIfaceCount(void);
-

Return the number of registered widget interfaces.

-

Returns: Count of registered interfaces.

-

wgtIfaceAt

-
const WgtIfaceT *wgtIfaceAt(int32_t idx, const char **outName);
-

Get a registered widget interface by index.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  idx         Index (0-based)
-  outName     Output: type name
-

Returns: Interface descriptor.

-

wgtIfaceGetPath

-
const char *wgtIfaceGetPath(const char *name);
-

Get the .wgt DXE file path for a registered widget.

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: File path string.

-

wgtIfaceSetPath

-
void wgtIfaceSetPath(const char *name, const char *path);
-

Set the .wgt DXE file path for a registered widget (called by the loader).

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-  path        DXE file path
-

wgtIfaceGetPathIndex

-
int32_t wgtIfaceGetPathIndex(const char *name);
-

Get the 1-based index of this widget within its .wgt file. Used to construct suffixed resource names (e.g. "name-2", "icon16-2").

-
  Parameter   Description
-  ---------   -----------
-  name        Widget type name
-

Returns: 1-based index within the DXE file.

-

Typed Dispatch Helpers

-

The following inline functions provide type-safe dispatch through the WidgetClassT handler table. Each checks for a non-NULL handler before calling.

-
  Function                                Method ID                          Description
-  --------                                ---------                          -----------
-  wclsHas(w, methodId)                    --                                 Check if handler exists
-  wclsPaint(w, d, ops, font, colors)      WGT_METHOD_PAINT                   Paint the widget
-  wclsPaintOverlay(w, d, ops, font, colors) WGT_METHOD_PAINT_OVERLAY         Paint overlay (popups)
-  wclsCalcMinSize(w, font)                WGT_METHOD_CALC_MIN_SIZE           Compute minimum size
-  wclsLayout(w, font)                     WGT_METHOD_LAYOUT                  Layout children
-  wclsGetLayoutMetrics(w, font, ...)      WGT_METHOD_GET_LAYOUT_METRICS      Get pad, gap, extraTop, borderW
-  wclsOnMouse(w, root, vx, vy)           WGT_METHOD_ON_MOUSE                Handle mouse event
-  wclsOnKey(w, key, mod)                  WGT_METHOD_ON_KEY                  Handle key event
-  wclsOnAccelActivate(w, root)            WGT_METHOD_ON_ACCEL_ACTIVATE       Handle accelerator
-  wclsDestroy(w)                          WGT_METHOD_DESTROY                 Destroy widget data
-  wclsOnChildChanged(parent, child)       WGT_METHOD_ON_CHILD_CHANGED        Notify parent of change
-  wclsGetText(w)                          WGT_METHOD_GET_TEXT                Get widget text
-  wclsSetText(w, text)                    WGT_METHOD_SET_TEXT                Set widget text
-  wclsClearSelection(w)                   WGT_METHOD_CLEAR_SELECTION         Clear text selection
-  wclsClosePopup(w)                       WGT_METHOD_CLOSE_POPUP             Close dropdown popup
-  wclsGetPopupRect(w, font, ...)          WGT_METHOD_GET_POPUP_RECT          Get popup screen rect
-  wclsOnDragUpdate(w, root, x, y)         WGT_METHOD_ON_DRAG_UPDATE          Update during drag
-  wclsOnDragEnd(w, root, x, y)            WGT_METHOD_ON_DRAG_END             End drag operation
-  wclsGetCursorShape(w, vx, vy)           WGT_METHOD_GET_CURSOR_SHAPE        Get cursor for position
-  wclsPoll(w, win)                        WGT_METHOD_POLL                    Periodic polling
-  wclsQuickRepaint(w, outY, outH)         WGT_METHOD_QUICK_REPAINT           Fast partial repaint
-  wclsScrollChildIntoView(parent, child)  WGT_METHOD_SCROLL_CHILD_INTO_VIEW  Scroll child visible
-
-
-

Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations)

-

DVX Widget System

-

Complete reference for the DVX GUI widget toolkit. All widgets are implemented as dynamically loaded DXE modules. They are created via convenience macros that wrap the per-widget API function tables. The base WidgetT structure is defined in core/dvxWidget.h; individual widget headers live in widgets/.

-

Individual widgets are documented in their own sections. See the table of contents for the full list.

-

Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations)

-

Every widget inherits from the WidgetT structure defined in core/dvxWidget.h. The fields and callbacks listed here are available on all widget types.

-

Common Properties

-
  Field              Type                Description
-  -----              ----                -----------
-  name               char[32]            Widget name for lookup via wgtFind().
-  x, y, w, h         int32_t             Computed geometry relative to the window content area (set by layout).
-  minW, minH          int32_t (tagged)    Minimum size hints. Use wgtPixels(), wgtChars(), or wgtPercent(). 0 = auto.
-  maxW, maxH          int32_t (tagged)    Maximum size constraints. 0 = no limit.
-  prefW, prefH        int32_t (tagged)    Preferred size. 0 = auto.
-  weight             int32_t             Extra-space distribution weight. 0 = fixed, 100 = normal. A widget with weight=200 gets twice the extra space of one with weight=100.
-  align              WidgetAlignE        Main-axis alignment for children: AlignStartE, AlignCenterE, AlignEndE.
-  spacing            int32_t (tagged)    Spacing between children (containers only). 0 = default.
-  padding            int32_t (tagged)    Internal padding (containers only). 0 = default.
-  fgColor            uint32_t            Foreground color override. 0 = use color scheme default.
-  bgColor            uint32_t            Background color override. 0 = use color scheme default.
-  visible            bool                Visibility state.
-  enabled            bool                Enabled state. Disabled widgets are grayed out and ignore input.
-  readOnly           bool                Read-only mode: allows scrolling/selection but blocks editing.
-  swallowTab         bool                When true, Tab key goes to the widget instead of navigating focus.
-  accelKey           char                Lowercase accelerator character. 0 if none.
-  tooltip            const char *        Tooltip text. NULL = none. Caller owns the string.
-  contextMenu        MenuT *             Right-click context menu. NULL = none. Caller owns.
-  userData           void *              Application-defined user data pointer.
-

Size Specification Macros

-
  Macro              Description
-  -----              -----------
-  wgtPixels(v)       Size in pixels.
-  wgtChars(v)        Size in character widths (multiplied by font charWidth).
-  wgtPercent(v)      Size as a percentage of parent dimension.
-

Common Events (Callbacks)

-

These callback function pointers are available on every WidgetT. Set them directly on the widget struct.

-
  Callback           Signature                                                   Description
-  --------           ---------                                                   -----------
-  onClick            void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires on mouse click / activation.
-  onDblClick         void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires on double-click.
-  onChange           void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget's value changes (text, selection, check state, etc.).
-  onFocus            void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget receives keyboard focus.
-  onBlur             void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget loses keyboard focus.
-  onKeyPress         void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyAscii)                      Fires on a printable key press (ASCII value).
-  onKeyDown          void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)        Fires on key down (scan code + shift state).
-  onKeyUp            void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)        Fires on key up.
-  onMouseDown        void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse button press.
-  onMouseUp          void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse button release.
-  onMouseMove        void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse movement over the widget.
-  onScroll           void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t delta)                         Fires on mouse wheel scroll.
-  onValidate         bool (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Validation callback. Return false to cancel a pending write.
-

Common Operations

-
  Function                                                    Description
-  --------                                                    -----------
-  WidgetT *wgtInitWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win)      Initialize widgets for a window. Returns the root VBox container.
-  AppContextT *wgtGetContext(const WidgetT *w)                 Walk up from any widget to retrieve the AppContextT.
-  void wgtInvalidate(WidgetT *w)                               Mark widget for re-layout and repaint. Propagates to ancestors.
-  void wgtInvalidatePaint(WidgetT *w)                          Mark widget for repaint only (no layout recalculation).
-  void wgtSetText(WidgetT *w, const char *text)                Set widget text (label, button, textinput, etc.).
-  const char *wgtGetText(const WidgetT *w)                     Get widget text.
-  void wgtSetEnabled(WidgetT *w, bool enabled)                 Enable or disable a widget.
-  void wgtSetReadOnly(WidgetT *w, bool readOnly)               Set read-only mode.
-  void wgtSetFocused(WidgetT *w)                               Set keyboard focus to a widget.
-  WidgetT *wgtGetFocused(void)                                 Get the currently focused widget.
-  void wgtSetVisible(WidgetT *w, bool visible)                 Show or hide a widget.
-  void wgtSetName(WidgetT *w, const char *name)                Set widget name for lookup.
-  WidgetT *wgtFind(WidgetT *root, const char *name)            Find a widget by name in the subtree.
-  void wgtDestroy(WidgetT *w)                                  Destroy a widget and all its children.
-  void wgtSetTooltip(WidgetT *w, const char *text)             Set tooltip text. Pass NULL to remove.
-
-
-

AnsiTerm

-

AnsiTerm

-

A VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal emulator widget designed for connecting to BBS systems over the serial link. Uses a traditional text-mode cell buffer (character + attribute byte pairs) with the CP437 character set and 16-color CGA palette. Supports cursor movement, screen/line erase, scrolling regions, SGR colors, and scrollback history. Communication is abstracted through read/write function pointers, allowing the terminal to work with raw serial ports, the secLink encrypted channel, or any other byte-oriented transport.

-

Header: widgets/widgetAnsiTerm.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *term = wgtAnsiTerm(parent, 80, 25);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                              Description
-  -----                                              -----------
-  wgtAnsiTerm(parent, cols, rows)                    Create an ANSI terminal widget with the given column and row dimensions.
-  wgtAnsiTermWrite(w, data, len)                     Write raw bytes into the terminal's ANSI parser. data is a const uint8_t * buffer, len is the byte count.
-  wgtAnsiTermClear(w)                                Clear the terminal screen and reset the cursor to the home position.
-  wgtAnsiTermSetComm(w, ctx, readFn, writeFn)        Attach a communication channel. readFn and writeFn are I/O callbacks; ctx is passed as their first argument.
-  wgtAnsiTermSetScrollback(w, maxLines)              Set the maximum number of scrollback lines. Lines scrolled off the top are saved in a circular buffer.
-  wgtAnsiTermPoll(w)                                 Poll the communication channel for incoming data and feed it into the ANSI parser.
-  wgtAnsiTermRepaint(w, outY, outH)                  Fast repaint path that renders dirty rows directly into the window's content buffer, bypassing the widget pipeline. Returns the dirty region via outY/outH.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Cols         Integer    Read-only    Number of columns.
-  Rows         Integer    Read-only    Number of rows.
-  Scrollback   Integer    Write-only   Maximum scrollback lines.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Clear        Clear the terminal screen.
-  Write        Write a string into the terminal.
-

Events

-

AnsiTerm uses the common events only. No widget-specific events are defined.

-
-
-

Box (VBox / HBox / Frame)

-

Box (VBox / HBox / Frame)

-

Container widgets that arrange their children in a vertical column (VBox), horizontal row (HBox), or a titled group box (Frame). These are the primary layout building blocks. Children are laid out using a flexbox-like algorithm with weight-based extra-space distribution.

-

Header: widgets/widgetBox.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  wgtVBox(parent)              Create a vertical box container. Children are stacked top to bottom.
-  wgtHBox(parent)              Create a horizontal box container. Children are placed left to right.
-  wgtFrame(parent, title)      Create a titled group box (a VBox with a border and label).
-

Properties

-

Box containers use the common WidgetT fields for layout control:

-
  Property     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  align        Main-axis alignment of children. HBox: Start=left, Center=center, End=right. VBox: Start=top, Center=center, End=bottom.
-  spacing      Gap between children (tagged size).
-  padding      Internal padding around children (tagged size).
-  weight       Controls how the box itself stretches within its parent.
-

Events

-

Containers use the common events only. No widget-specific events.

-
-
-

Button

-

Button

-

A push button with a text label. Fires onClick when pressed and released. Supports keyboard activation via accelerator keys.

-

Header: widgets/widgetButton.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *btn = wgtButton(parent, "OK");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  wgtButton(parent, text)      Create a push button with the given label text.
-

Properties

-

Uses common WidgetT properties. Set accelKey for keyboard shortcut. Use wgtSetText() / wgtGetText() to change the label.

-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when the button is clicked (press + release).
-
-
-

Canvas

-

Canvas

-

A freeform drawing surface with a fixed-size pixel buffer. Provides drawing primitives (lines, rectangles, circles, text, individual pixels) and supports save/load to BMP files. Mouse interaction is available via a callback.

-

Header: widgets/widgetCanvas.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *cv = wgtCanvas(parent, 320, 200);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                    Description
-  -----                                    -----------
-  wgtCanvas(parent, w, h)                  Create a canvas with the given pixel dimensions.
-  wgtCanvasClear(w, color)                 Fill the entire canvas with a solid color.
-  wgtCanvasSetPenColor(w, color)           Set the drawing pen color.
-  wgtCanvasSetPenSize(w, size)             Set the drawing pen size in pixels.
-  wgtCanvasDrawLine(w, x0, y0, x1, y1)    Draw a line from (x0,y0) to (x1,y1).
-  wgtCanvasDrawRect(w, x, y, width, height)    Draw a rectangle outline.
-  wgtCanvasFillRect(w, x, y, width, height)    Draw a filled rectangle.
-  wgtCanvasFillCircle(w, cx, cy, radius)   Draw a filled circle.
-  wgtCanvasSetPixel(w, x, y, color)        Set a single pixel to the given color.
-  wgtCanvasGetPixel(w, x, y)              Get the color of a single pixel.
-  wgtCanvasDrawText(w, x, y, text)         Draw text at the given position using the current pen color.
-  wgtCanvasSetMouseCallback(w, cb)         Set a mouse interaction callback. Signature: void (*cb)(WidgetT *w, int32_t cx, int32_t cy, bool drag). Receives canvas-relative coordinates and whether the mouse is being dragged.
-  wgtCanvasSave(w, path)                   Save the canvas contents to a BMP file.
-  wgtCanvasLoad(w, path)                   Load a BMP file into the canvas.
-

Events

-
  Callback                                     Description
-  --------                                     -----------
-  onClick                                      Fires when the canvas is clicked.
-  Mouse callback (via wgtCanvasSetMouseCallback)   Fires on mouse down and drag with canvas-local coordinates.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Clear        Clear the canvas to a given color.
-
-
-

Checkbox

-

Checkbox

-

A toggle control with a text label. Clicking toggles between checked and unchecked states.

-

Header: widgets/widgetCheckbox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *cb = wgtCheckbox(parent, "Enable logging");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                  Description
-  -----                                  -----------
-  wgtCheckbox(parent, text)              Create a checkbox with the given label text.
-  wgtCheckboxIsChecked(w)                Returns true if the checkbox is checked.
-  wgtCheckboxSetChecked(w, checked)      Set the checked state programmatically.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when clicked (after toggle).
-  onChange     Fires when the checked state changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Boolean    Read/Write   Whether the checkbox is checked.
-
-
-

ComboBox

-

ComboBox

-

A combination of a text input and a dropdown list. The user can either type a value or select from a list of predefined options. Unlike Dropdown, the text field is editable.

-

Header: widgets/widgetComboBox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *cb = wgtComboBox(parent, 128);
-const char *items[] = { "Arial", "Courier", "Times" };
-wgtComboBoxSetItems(cb, items, 3);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                    Description
-  -----                                    -----------
-  wgtComboBox(parent, maxLen)              Create a combo box. maxLen is the maximum text input length.
-  wgtComboBoxSetItems(w, items, count)     Set the dropdown items.
-  wgtComboBoxGetSelected(w)                Get the index of the selected item (-1 if the text does not match any item).
-  wgtComboBoxSetSelected(w, idx)           Set the selected item by index.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the text or selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected item.
-
-
-

DataCtrl

-

DataCtrl

-

A VB3-style Data control for database binding. Displays a visible navigation bar that connects to a SQLite database via dvxSql* functions. Reads all rows from the RecordSource query into an in-memory cache for bidirectional navigation. Fires Reposition events when the cursor moves so bound controls can update. Supports master-detail linking between Data controls.

-

Header: widgets/widgetDataCtrl.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *data = wgtDataCtrl(parent);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtDataCtrl(parent)                            Create a Data control.
-  wgtDataCtrlRefresh(w)                          Re-execute the RecordSource query and rebuild the row cache.
-  wgtDataCtrlMoveFirst(w)                        Move the cursor to the first row.
-  wgtDataCtrlMovePrev(w)                         Move the cursor to the previous row.
-  wgtDataCtrlMoveNext(w)                         Move the cursor to the next row.
-  wgtDataCtrlMoveLast(w)                         Move the cursor to the last row.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetField(w, colName)                Get the value of a column in the current row. Returns const char *.
-  wgtDataCtrlSetField(w, colName, value)         Set the value of a column in the current row (marks the row dirty).
-  wgtDataCtrlUpdateRow(w)                        Write the current row's pending changes back to the database.
-  wgtDataCtrlUpdate(w)                           Flush all pending changes to the database.
-  wgtDataCtrlAddNew(w)                           Begin a new row. Sets dirty state; call Update to commit.
-  wgtDataCtrlDelete(w)                           Delete the current row from the database.
-  wgtDataCtrlSetMasterValue(w, val)              Set the master-detail filter value for this control.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetRowCount(w)                      Get the total number of cached rows.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetColCount(w)                      Get the number of columns in the result set.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetColName(w, col)                  Get the name of a column by index. Returns const char *.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetCellText(w, row, col)            Get the text of a specific cell by row and column index. Returns const char *.
-  wgtDataCtrlSetCurrentRow(w, row)               Set the current row by index (0-based).
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property       Type       Access       Description
-  --------       ----       ------       -----------
-  DatabaseName   String     Read/Write   Path to the SQLite database file.
-  RecordSource   String     Read/Write   SQL query or table name for the result set.
-  KeyColumn      String     Read/Write   Primary key column name (used for UPDATE/DELETE).
-  MasterSource   String     Read/Write   Name of the master Data control for master-detail linking.
-  MasterField    String     Read/Write   Column in the master control to read for the filter value.
-  DetailField    String     Read/Write   Column in this table to filter by the master value.
-  Caption        String     Read/Write   Text displayed on the navigation bar.
-  BOF            Boolean    Read-only    True when the cursor is before the first row.
-  EOF            Boolean    Read-only    True when the cursor is past the last row.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method         Description
-  ------         -----------
-  AddNew         Begin a new row.
-  Delete         Delete the current row.
-  MoveFirst      Move to the first row.
-  MoveLast       Move to the last row.
-  MoveNext       Move to the next row.
-  MovePrevious   Move to the previous row.
-  Refresh        Re-execute the query and rebuild the cache.
-  Update         Write pending changes to the database.
-

Events

-
  Event          Description
-  -----          -----------
-  Reposition     Fires when the current row changes (navigation, refresh, etc.). Default event.
-  Validate       Fires before writing changes. Return false to cancel.
-
-
-

DbGrid

-

DbGrid

-

A database grid widget that displays all records from a Data control in a scrollable, sortable table. Columns auto-populate from the Data control's column names and can be hidden, resized, and renamed by the application. Clicking a column header sorts the display. Selecting a row syncs the Data control's cursor position. The grid reads directly from the Data control's cached rows, so there is no separate copy of the data.

-

Header: widgets/widgetDbGrid.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *grid = wgtDbGrid(parent);
-wgtDbGridSetDataWidget(grid, dataCtrl);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                                  Description
-  -----                                                  -----------
-  wgtDbGrid(parent)                                      Create a database grid widget.
-  wgtDbGridSetDataWidget(w, dataWidget)                  Bind the grid to a Data control. The grid reads rows from this widget.
-  wgtDbGridRefresh(w)                                    Re-read the Data control's state and repaint the grid.
-  wgtDbGridSetColumnVisible(w, fieldName, visible)       Show or hide a column by field name.
-  wgtDbGridSetColumnHeader(w, fieldName, header)         Set a display header for a column (overrides the field name).
-  wgtDbGridSetColumnWidth(w, fieldName, width)           Set the width of a column by field name (tagged size, 0 = auto).
-  wgtDbGridGetSelectedRow(w)                             Get the index of the currently selected data row (-1 if none).
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  GridLines    Boolean    Read/Write   Whether to draw grid lines between cells.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Refresh      Re-read the Data control and repaint.
-

Events

-
  Event        Description
-  -----        -----------
-  Click        Fires when a row is clicked.
-  DblClick     Fires when a row is double-clicked. Default event.
-
-
-

Dropdown

-

Dropdown

-

A drop-down list that displays a single selected item and expands to show all options when clicked. Read-only selection (the user cannot type into it).

-

Header: widgets/widgetDropdown.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *dd = wgtDropdown(parent);
-const char *items[] = { "Red", "Green", "Blue" };
-wgtDropdownSetItems(dd, items, 3);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                    Description
-  -----                                    -----------
-  wgtDropdown(parent)                      Create a dropdown list.
-  wgtDropdownSetItems(w, items, count)     Set the list of items. items is a const char ** array.
-  wgtDropdownGetSelected(w)                Get the index of the selected item (-1 if none).
-  wgtDropdownSetSelected(w, idx)           Set the selected item by index.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the selected item changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected item.
-
-
-

ImageButton

-

ImageButton

-

A clickable button that displays an image instead of text. Has press/release visual feedback like a regular button. Can be created from raw pixel data or a BMP file.

-

Header: widgets/widgetImageButton.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                                            Description
-  -----                                            -----------
-  wgtImageButton(parent, data, w, h, pitch)        Create an image button from raw pixel data.
-  wgtImageButtonFromFile(parent, path)             Create an image button by loading a BMP file.
-

Methods

-
  Macro                                                Description
-  -----                                                -----------
-  wgtImageButtonSetData(w, data, imgW, imgH, pitch)   Replace the image with new raw pixel data.
-  wgtImageButtonLoadFile(w, path)                      Replace the image by loading a new file.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when the image button is clicked (press + release).
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property      Type       Access       Description
-  --------      ----       ------       -----------
-  Picture       String     Write-only   Load an image from a file path.
-  ImageWidth    Integer    Read-only    Width of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-  ImageHeight   Integer    Read-only    Height of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-
-
-
-

Image

-

Image

-

Displays a bitmap image. Can be created from raw pixel data or loaded from a BMP file on disk. The image is rendered at its natural size within the widget bounds.

-

Header: widgets/widgetImage.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  wgtImage(parent, data, w, h, pitch)          Create an image widget from raw pixel data. data is a uint8_t * pixel buffer, w/h are dimensions, pitch is bytes per row.
-  wgtImageFromFile(parent, path)               Create an image widget by loading a BMP file from disk.
-

Methods

-
  Macro                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  wgtImageSetData(w, data, imgW, imgH, pitch)  Replace the displayed image with new raw pixel data.
-  wgtImageLoadFile(w, path)                    Replace the displayed image by loading a new file.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when the image is clicked.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property      Type       Access       Description
-  --------      ----       ------       -----------
-  Picture       String     Write-only   Load an image from a file path.
-  ImageWidth    Integer    Read-only    Width of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-  ImageHeight   Integer    Read-only    Height of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-
-
-

Label

-

Label

-

A static text label. Does not accept keyboard focus. Typically used to describe other widgets. Supports text alignment and accelerator keys (with WCLASS_FOCUS_FORWARD, the accelerator moves focus to the next focusable sibling).

-

Header: widgets/widgetLabel.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *lbl = wgtLabel(parent, "Name:");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  wgtLabel(parent, text)       Create a text label.
-  wgtLabelSetAlign(w, align)   Set the text alignment (AlignStartE, AlignCenterE, AlignEndE).
-

Properties

-

Use wgtSetText() / wgtGetText() to change the text. Set accelKey for accelerator support (focus forwards to next focusable widget).

-

Events

-

Labels use the common events only. Typically no callbacks are set on labels.

-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type                         Access       Description
-  --------     ----                         ------       -----------
-  Alignment    Enum (Left, Center, Right)   Read/Write   Text alignment within the label.
-
-
-
-

ListBox

-

ListBox

-

A scrollable list of text items. Supports single and multi-selection modes and drag-to-reorder.

-

Header: widgets/widgetListBox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *lb = wgtListBox(parent);
-const char *items[] = { "Alpha", "Beta", "Gamma" };
-wgtListBoxSetItems(lb, items, 3);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtListBox(parent)                             Create a list box.
-  wgtListBoxSetItems(w, items, count)            Set the list items.
-  wgtListBoxGetSelected(w)                       Get the index of the selected item (-1 if none).
-  wgtListBoxSetSelected(w, idx)                  Set the selected item by index.
-  wgtListBoxSetMultiSelect(w, multi)             Enable or disable multi-selection mode.
-  wgtListBoxIsItemSelected(w, idx)               Check if a specific item is selected (multi-select mode).
-  wgtListBoxSetItemSelected(w, idx, selected)    Select or deselect a specific item.
-  wgtListBoxSelectAll(w)                         Select all items (multi-select mode).
-  wgtListBoxClearSelection(w)                    Deselect all items.
-  wgtListBoxSetReorderable(w, reorderable)       Enable drag-to-reorder.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when an item is clicked.
-  onDblClick   Fires when an item is double-clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected item.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method           Description
-  ------           -----------
-  SelectAll        Select all items.
-  ClearSelection   Deselect all items.
-  SetMultiSelect   Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  SetReorderable   Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-  IsItemSelected   Check if a specific item is selected by index.
-  SetItemSelected  Select or deselect a specific item by index.
-
-
-
-

ListView

-

ListView

-

A multi-column list with sortable headers. Supports single and multi-selection, column alignment, header click sorting, and drag-to-reorder. Data is provided as a flat array of strings (row-major order, one string per cell).

-

Header: widgets/widgetListView.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *lv = wgtListView(parent);
-ListViewColT cols[] = {
-    { "Name", wgtChars(20), ListViewAlignLeftE },
-    { "Size", wgtChars(10), ListViewAlignRightE }
-};
-wgtListViewSetColumns(lv, cols, 2);
-const char *cells[] = { "file.txt", "1234", "readme.md", "5678" };
-wgtListViewSetData(lv, cells, 2);
-

Column Definition

-
typedef struct {
-    const char      *title;
-    int32_t          width;   // tagged size (wgtPixels/wgtChars/wgtPercent, 0 = auto)
-    ListViewAlignE   align;   // ListViewAlignLeftE, ListViewAlignCenterE, ListViewAlignRightE
-} ListViewColT;
-

Sort Direction

-
typedef enum {
-    ListViewSortNoneE,
-    ListViewSortAscE,
-    ListViewSortDescE
-} ListViewSortE;
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                              Description
-  -----                                              -----------
-  wgtListView(parent)                                Create a list view.
-  wgtListViewSetColumns(w, cols, count)              Define columns from an array of ListViewColT.
-  wgtListViewSetData(w, cellData, rowCount)          Set row data. cellData is a flat const char ** array of size rowCount * colCount.
-  wgtListViewGetSelected(w)                          Get the index of the selected row (-1 if none).
-  wgtListViewSetSelected(w, idx)                     Set the selected row by index.
-  wgtListViewSetSort(w, col, dir)                    Set the sort column and direction.
-  wgtListViewSetHeaderClickCallback(w, cb)           Set a callback for header clicks. Signature: void (*cb)(WidgetT *w, int32_t col, ListViewSortE dir).
-  wgtListViewSetMultiSelect(w, multi)                Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  wgtListViewIsItemSelected(w, idx)                  Check if a specific row is selected.
-  wgtListViewSetItemSelected(w, idx, selected)       Select or deselect a specific row.
-  wgtListViewSelectAll(w)                            Select all rows.
-  wgtListViewClearSelection(w)                       Deselect all rows.
-  wgtListViewSetReorderable(w, reorderable)          Enable drag-to-reorder of rows.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when a row is clicked.
-  onDblClick   Fires when a row is double-clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected row.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method           Description
-  ------           -----------
-  SelectAll        Select all rows.
-  ClearSelection   Deselect all rows.
-  SetMultiSelect   Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  SetReorderable   Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-  IsItemSelected   Check if a specific row is selected by index.
-  SetItemSelected  Select or deselect a specific row by index.
-
-
-
-

ProgressBar

-

ProgressBar

-

A visual indicator of progress, displayed as a filled bar. Supports both horizontal and vertical orientations. Value ranges from 0 to 100.

-

Header: widgets/widgetProgressBar.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                    Description
-  -----                    -----------
-  wgtProgressBar(parent)   Create a horizontal progress bar.
-  wgtProgressBarV(parent)  Create a vertical progress bar.
-

Methods

-
  Macro                            Description
-  -----                            -----------
-  wgtProgressBarSetValue(w, value) Set the progress value (0-100).
-  wgtProgressBarGetValue(w)        Get the current progress value.
-

Events

-

ProgressBar is a display-only widget. Typically no callbacks are set.

-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read/Write   Current progress value (0-100).
-
-
-
-

Radio Button

-

Radio Button

-

A mutually exclusive selection control. Radio buttons must be placed inside a radio group container. Only one radio button within a group can be selected at a time.

-

Header: widgets/widgetRadio.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *grp = wgtRadioGroup(parent);
-WidgetT *r1  = wgtRadio(grp, "Option A");
-WidgetT *r2  = wgtRadio(grp, "Option B");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                Description
-  -----                                -----------
-  wgtRadioGroup(parent)                Create a radio group container.
-  wgtRadio(parent, text)               Create a radio button inside a group.
-  wgtRadioGroupSetSelected(w, idx)     Set the selected radio button by index within the group.
-  wgtRadioGetIndex(w)                  Get the index of the currently selected radio button.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires on the radio button when clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read-only    Index of the currently selected radio button in the group.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method          Description
-  ------          -----------
-  SetSelected     Set the selected radio button by index.
-
-
-
-

ScrollPane

-

ScrollPane

-

A scrollable container that provides vertical and/or horizontal scrollbars when its content exceeds the visible area. Place a single child (typically a VBox or HBox) inside the scroll pane.

-

Header: widgets/widgetScrollPane.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sp = wgtScrollPane(parent);
-WidgetT *content = wgtVBox(sp);
-// add children to content...
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                      Description
-  -----                                      -----------
-  wgtScrollPane(parent)                      Create a scroll pane container.
-  wgtScrollPaneScrollToChild(sp, child)      Scroll so that the given child widget is visible.
-  wgtScrollPaneSetNoBorder(w, noBorder)      When true, removes the border around the scroll pane.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onScroll     Fires when the scroll position changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  NoBorder     Boolean    Read/Write   Whether the border around the scroll pane is hidden.
-
-
-
-

Separator

-

Separator

-

A visual dividing line used to separate groups of widgets. Available in horizontal and vertical orientations.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSeparator.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                    Description
-  -----                    -----------
-  wgtHSeparator(parent)    Create a horizontal separator line.
-  wgtVSeparator(parent)    Create a vertical separator line.
-

Events

-

Separator is a visual-only widget. No events.

-
-
-
-

Slider

-

Slider

-

A horizontal slider (track bar) for selecting an integer value within a range. The user drags the thumb or clicks the track to change the value.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSlider.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sl = wgtSlider(parent, 0, 100);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                Description
-  -----                                -----------
-  wgtSlider(parent, minVal, maxVal)    Create a slider with the given integer range.
-  wgtSliderSetValue(w, value)          Set the slider value programmatically.
-  wgtSliderGetValue(w)                 Get the current slider value.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the slider value changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read/Write   Current slider value.
-
-
-
-

Spacer

-

Spacer

-

An invisible widget used for layout purposes. By default it has weight=100, so it absorbs available extra space. Useful for pushing other widgets apart or aligning them to edges.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSpacer.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *row = wgtHBox(parent);
-wgtButton(row, "OK");
-wgtSpacer(row);           // pushes Cancel to the right
-wgtButton(row, "Cancel");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                Description
-  -----                -----------
-  wgtSpacer(parent)    Create an invisible spacer widget.
-

Events

-

Spacer is an invisible layout widget. No events.

-
-
-
-

Spinner

-

Spinner

-

A numeric input with up/down buttons for incrementing and decrementing a value within a range. Supports both integer and floating-point (real) modes.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSpinner.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sp = wgtSpinner(parent, 0, 100, 1);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtSpinner(parent, minVal, maxVal, step)       Create a spinner with the given integer range and step size.
-  wgtSpinnerSetValue(w, value)                   Set the integer value.
-  wgtSpinnerGetValue(w)                          Get the current integer value.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRange(w, minVal, maxVal)          Set the integer range.
-  wgtSpinnerSetStep(w, step)                     Set the integer step size.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealMode(w, enable)               Switch to floating-point mode.
-  wgtSpinnerGetRealValue(w)                      Get the current floating-point value.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealValue(w, value)               Set the floating-point value.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealRange(w, minVal, maxVal)      Set the floating-point range.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealStep(w, step)                 Set the floating-point step size.
-  wgtSpinnerSetDecimals(w, decimals)             Set the number of decimal places displayed in real mode.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the value changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read/Write   Current integer value.
-  RealMode     Boolean    Read/Write   Whether floating-point mode is active.
-  Decimals     Integer    Read/Write   Number of decimal places displayed in real mode.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  SetRange     Set the integer range (min, max).
-  SetStep      Set the integer step size.
-
-
-
-

Splitter

-

Splitter

-

A two-pane container with a draggable divider. The user drags the splitter bar to resize the two panes. Can be oriented vertically (left/right panes) or horizontally (top/bottom panes). Add exactly two children.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSplitter.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sp = wgtSplitter(parent, true);  // vertical = left|right
-WidgetT *left  = wgtVBox(sp);
-WidgetT *right = wgtVBox(sp);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                  Description
-  -----                                  -----------
-  wgtSplitter(parent, vertical)          Create a splitter. vertical=true for left/right panes, false for top/bottom.
-  wgtSplitterSetPos(w, pos)             Set the divider position in pixels.
-  wgtSplitterGetPos(w)                  Get the current divider position in pixels.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the divider position changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Position     Integer    Read/Write   Divider position in pixels.
-
-
-
-

StatusBar

-

StatusBar

-

A horizontal bar typically placed at the bottom of a window for displaying status text and informational widgets. Children are laid out horizontally.

-

Header: widgets/widgetStatusBar.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sb = wgtStatusBar(parent);
-wgtLabel(sb, "Ready");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                  Description
-  -----                  -----------
-  wgtStatusBar(parent)   Create a status bar container.
-

Properties

-

Uses common container properties. Add child widgets (labels, progress bars, etc.) to populate.

-

Events

-

StatusBar itself has no widget-specific events. Events fire on the child widgets.

-
-
-
-

TabControl

-

TabControl

-

A tabbed container that displays one page at a time with clickable tabs along the top. Each tab page is a container that holds its own child widgets.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTabControl.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tabs = wgtTabControl(parent);
-WidgetT *page1 = wgtTabPage(tabs, "General");
-WidgetT *page2 = wgtTabPage(tabs, "Advanced");
-// add children to page1, page2...
-

Macros

-
  Macro                              Description
-  -----                              -----------
-  wgtTabControl(parent)              Create a tab control.
-  wgtTabPage(parent, title)          Add a tab page with the given title. Returns the page container widget.
-  wgtTabControlSetActive(w, idx)     Set the active tab by index (0-based).
-  wgtTabControlGetActive(w)          Get the index of the active tab.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the active tab changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  TabIndex     Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently active tab (0-based).
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  SetActive    Set the active tab by index.
-
-
-
-

TextInput / TextArea

-

TextInput / TextArea

-

Single-line text input, password input, masked input, and multi-line text area with optional syntax colorization, line numbers, find/replace, and gutter decorators.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTextInput.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                            Description
-  -----                            -----------
-  wgtTextInput(parent, maxLen)     Create a single-line text input. maxLen is the maximum number of characters.
-  wgtPasswordInput(parent, maxLen) Create a password input (characters displayed as bullets).
-  wgtMaskedInput(parent, mask)     Create a masked input field. The mask string defines the input format.
-  wgtTextArea(parent, maxLen)      Create a multi-line text area.
-

Methods (TextArea-specific)

-
  Macro                                             Description
-  -----                                             -----------
-  wgtTextAreaSetColorize(w, fn, ctx)                Set a syntax colorization callback. The callback receives each line and fills a color index array. Color indices: 0=default, 1=keyword, 2=string, 3=comment, 4=number, 5=operator, 6=type/builtin, 7=reserved.
-  wgtTextAreaGoToLine(w, line)                      Scroll to and place the cursor on the given line number.
-  wgtTextAreaSetAutoIndent(w, enable)               Enable or disable automatic indentation on newline.
-  wgtTextAreaSetShowLineNumbers(w, show)            Show or hide line numbers in the gutter.
-  wgtTextAreaSetCaptureTabs(w, capture)             When true, Tab key inserts a tab/spaces instead of moving focus.
-  wgtTextAreaSetTabWidth(w, width)                  Set the tab stop width in characters.
-  wgtTextAreaSetUseTabChar(w, useChar)              When true, insert literal tab characters; when false, insert spaces.
-  wgtTextAreaFindNext(w, needle, caseSens, fwd)     Search for the next occurrence. Returns true if found.
-  wgtTextAreaReplaceAll(w, needle, repl, caseSens)  Replace all occurrences. Returns the number of replacements made.
-  wgtTextAreaSetLineDecorator(w, fn, ctx)           Set a gutter line decorator callback. The callback returns a color and receives the line number, a color output pointer, and the user context.
-  wgtTextAreaGetCursorLine(w)                       Get the current cursor line number.
-  wgtTextAreaSetGutterClick(w, fn)                  Set a callback for gutter clicks (e.g. for breakpoint toggling). Callback receives the widget and line number.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the text content changes.
-  onKeyPress   Fires on each key press (ASCII value).
-  onValidate   Called before committing a change. Return false to cancel.
-
-
-
-

Timer

-

Timer

-

A non-visual widget that fires its onClick callback at a regular interval. Useful for animations, polling, and periodic updates. Must be explicitly started after creation.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTimer.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tmr = wgtTimer(parent, 1000, true);  // 1 second, repeating
-tmr->onClick = onTimerTick;
-wgtTimerStart(tmr);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtTimer(parent, intervalMs, repeat)           Create a timer. intervalMs is the interval in milliseconds. repeat: true for repeating, false for one-shot.
-  wgtTimerStart(w)                               Start the timer.
-  wgtTimerStop(w)                                Stop the timer.
-  wgtTimerSetInterval(w, intervalMs)             Change the timer interval.
-  wgtTimerIsRunning(w)                           Returns true if the timer is currently running.
-  wgtUpdateTimers()                              Global tick function. Called by the event loop to advance all active timers.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires each time the timer elapses.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Enabled      Boolean    Read/Write   Whether the timer is running. Reading returns the running state; writing starts or stops it.
-  Interval     Integer    Write-only   Timer interval in milliseconds.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Start        Start the timer.
-  Stop         Stop the timer.
-

Extra Events (BASIC Interface)

-
  Event        Description
-  -----        -----------
-  Timer        Fires each time the timer elapses. Default event.
-
-
-
-

Toolbar

-

Toolbar

-

A horizontal container for toolbar buttons and controls. Typically placed at the top of a window. Children (usually ImageButtons or Buttons) are laid out horizontally with toolbar-appropriate spacing.

-

Header: widgets/widgetToolbar.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tb = wgtToolbar(parent);
-wgtImageButtonFromFile(tb, "icons/save.bmp");
-wgtImageButtonFromFile(tb, "icons/open.bmp");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                Description
-  -----                -----------
-  wgtToolbar(parent)   Create a toolbar container.
-

Properties

-

Uses common container properties. Add children (buttons, separators, etc.) to populate the toolbar.

-

Events

-

Toolbar itself has no widget-specific events. Events fire on the child widgets.

-
-
-
-

TreeView

-

TreeView

-

A hierarchical tree control with expandable/collapsible nodes. Supports single and multi-selection and drag-to-reorder. Tree items are added as children of the TreeView or of other tree items to create nested hierarchies.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTreeView.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tv    = wgtTreeView(parent);
-WidgetT *root  = wgtTreeItem(tv, "Root");
-WidgetT *child = wgtTreeItem(root, "Child");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtTreeView(parent)                            Create a tree view control.
-  wgtTreeItem(parent, text)                      Add a tree item as a child of the tree view or another tree item.
-  wgtTreeViewGetSelected(w)                      Get the currently selected tree item (returns WidgetT *, NULL if none).
-  wgtTreeViewSetSelected(w, item)                Set the selected tree item.
-  wgtTreeViewSetMultiSelect(w, multi)            Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  wgtTreeViewSetReorderable(w, reorderable)      Enable drag-to-reorder of items.
-  wgtTreeItemSetExpanded(w, expanded)            Expand or collapse a tree item.
-  wgtTreeItemIsExpanded(w)                       Check if a tree item is expanded.
-  wgtTreeItemIsSelected(w)                       Check if a tree item is selected (multi-select mode).
-  wgtTreeItemSetSelected(w, selected)            Select or deselect a tree item.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when a tree item is clicked.
-  onDblClick   Fires when a tree item is double-clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method           Description
-  ------           -----------
-  SetMultiSelect   Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  SetReorderable   Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-
-
-
-

WrapBox

-

WrapBox

-

A flow/wrap layout container that arranges children left-to-right, wrapping to the next row when the available width is exceeded. Each row's height is the maximum child height in that row. Supports configurable spacing between items and rows, and per-row alignment for short rows.

-

Header: widgets/widgetWrapBox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *wrap = wgtWrapBox(parent);
-wgtButton(wrap, "Tag 1");
-wgtButton(wrap, "Tag 2");
-wgtButton(wrap, "Tag 3");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                  Description
-  -----                  -----------
-  wgtWrapBox(parent)     Create a wrap box container.
-

Properties

-

WrapBox uses the common WidgetT container fields for layout control:

-
  Property     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  spacing      Gap between children in both the horizontal and vertical directions (tagged size). Default is 4 pixels.
-  padding      Internal padding around children (tagged size). Default is 2 pixels.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type                         Access       Description
-  --------     ----                         ------       -----------
-  Alignment    Enum (Left, Center, Right)   Read/Write   Row alignment for rows that do not fill the full width.
-

Events

-

WrapBox is a container widget. It uses the common events only. No widget-specific events are defined.

-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvx_help_sample.html b/docs/dvx_help_sample.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0d120db..0000000 --- a/docs/dvx_help_sample.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Welcome to DVX - - - - -
-
-

Welcome to DVX

-

Welcome to DVX

-

DVX is a graphical user interface environment for DOS, designed for -486-class hardware and above. It provides a windowing system with a -Motif-inspired visual style, cooperative multitasking, and a widget-based -application framework.

-

DVX features include:

- -

VESA VBE 2.0+ linear framebuffer rendering

-

See also: System Overview

-
-
Tip: Press F1 from any DVX application to open context-sensitive help.
-
-
-

System Overview

-

System Overview

-

DVX is built as a five-layer architecture, with each layer providing -services to the layer above it.

-

Video Layer

-

The video layer (dvxVideo) handles VESA VBE initialization, linear -framebuffer mapping, backbuffer allocation, and pixel format detection. It -supports 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit color depths.

-

Drawing Layer

-

The drawing layer (dvxDraw) provides primitive rendering operations: filled -rectangles, beveled borders, text rendering, bitmap blitting, and clipped -drawing.

-

Compositor

-

The compositor (dvxComp) manages a dirty rectangle list. Only regions that -have changed since the last frame are flushed from the system RAM backbuffer -to the video card's linear framebuffer.

-

Window Manager

-

The window manager (dvxWm) handles the window stack, chrome rendering (title -bars, borders, close buttons), drag and resize interaction, focus -management, and menu bars.

-

Application Layer

-

The application layer (dvxApp) ties everything together with the event loop, -mouse and keyboard input, accelerator tables, and the public API used by -applications.

-

See also: Widget System

-
-
-

Widget System

-

Widget System

-

DVX provides a rich set of widgets (controls) for building application user -interfaces. Widgets are loaded as DXE3 plugin modules at startup.

-

Layout Widgets

- -

TabControl -- Tabbed container

-

Input Widgets

- -

Spinner -- Numeric up/down control

-

Display Widgets

- -

Separator -- Horizontal or vertical divider line

-

Data Widgets

- -

TreeView -- Hierarchical tree with expand/collapse

-
-
-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-

The following keyboard shortcuts are available system-wide in DVX:

-
  Shortcut        Action
-  --------        ------
-  Alt+F4          Close active window
-  F10             Activate menu bar
-  Ctrl+Esc        Open task manager
-  Tab             Move focus to next widget
-  Shift+Tab       Move focus to previous widget
-  Enter           Activate focused button
-  Escape          Close dialog or cancel operation
-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvx_widget_reference.html b/docs/dvx_widget_reference.html deleted file mode 100644 index 272dee5..0000000 --- a/docs/dvx_widget_reference.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1234 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations) - - - - -
-
-

Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations)

-

DVX Widget Reference

-

Complete reference for the DVX GUI widget toolkit. All widgets are implemented as dynamically loaded DXE modules. They are created via convenience macros that wrap the per-widget API function tables. The base WidgetT structure is defined in core/dvxWidget.h; individual widget headers live in widgets/.

-

Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations)

-

Every widget inherits from the WidgetT structure defined in core/dvxWidget.h. The fields and callbacks listed here are available on all widget types.

-

Common Properties

-
  Field              Type                Description
-  -----              ----                -----------
-  name               char[32]            Widget name for lookup via wgtFind().
-  x, y, w, h         int32_t             Computed geometry relative to the window content area (set by layout).
-  minW, minH          int32_t (tagged)    Minimum size hints. Use wgtPixels(), wgtChars(), or wgtPercent(). 0 = auto.
-  maxW, maxH          int32_t (tagged)    Maximum size constraints. 0 = no limit.
-  prefW, prefH        int32_t (tagged)    Preferred size. 0 = auto.
-  weight             int32_t             Extra-space distribution weight. 0 = fixed, 100 = normal. A widget with weight=200 gets twice the extra space of one with weight=100.
-  align              WidgetAlignE        Main-axis alignment for children: AlignStartE, AlignCenterE, AlignEndE.
-  spacing            int32_t (tagged)    Spacing between children (containers only). 0 = default.
-  padding            int32_t (tagged)    Internal padding (containers only). 0 = default.
-  fgColor            uint32_t            Foreground color override. 0 = use color scheme default.
-  bgColor            uint32_t            Background color override. 0 = use color scheme default.
-  visible            bool                Visibility state.
-  enabled            bool                Enabled state. Disabled widgets are grayed out and ignore input.
-  readOnly           bool                Read-only mode: allows scrolling/selection but blocks editing.
-  swallowTab         bool                When true, Tab key goes to the widget instead of navigating focus.
-  accelKey           char                Lowercase accelerator character. 0 if none.
-  tooltip            const char *        Tooltip text. NULL = none. Caller owns the string.
-  contextMenu        MenuT *             Right-click context menu. NULL = none. Caller owns.
-  userData           void *              Application-defined user data pointer.
-

Size Specification Macros

-
  Macro              Description
-  -----              -----------
-  wgtPixels(v)       Size in pixels.
-  wgtChars(v)        Size in character widths (multiplied by font charWidth).
-  wgtPercent(v)      Size as a percentage of parent dimension.
-

Common Events (Callbacks)

-

These callback function pointers are available on every WidgetT. Set them directly on the widget struct.

-
  Callback           Signature                                                   Description
-  --------           ---------                                                   -----------
-  onClick            void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires on mouse click / activation.
-  onDblClick         void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires on double-click.
-  onChange           void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget's value changes (text, selection, check state, etc.).
-  onFocus            void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget receives keyboard focus.
-  onBlur             void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget loses keyboard focus.
-  onKeyPress         void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyAscii)                      Fires on a printable key press (ASCII value).
-  onKeyDown          void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)        Fires on key down (scan code + shift state).
-  onKeyUp            void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)        Fires on key up.
-  onMouseDown        void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse button press.
-  onMouseUp          void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse button release.
-  onMouseMove        void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse movement over the widget.
-  onScroll           void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t delta)                         Fires on mouse wheel scroll.
-  onValidate         bool (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Validation callback. Return false to cancel a pending write.
-

Common Operations

-
  Function                                                    Description
-  --------                                                    -----------
-  WidgetT *wgtInitWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win)      Initialize widgets for a window. Returns the root VBox container.
-  AppContextT *wgtGetContext(const WidgetT *w)                 Walk up from any widget to retrieve the AppContextT.
-  void wgtInvalidate(WidgetT *w)                               Mark widget for re-layout and repaint. Propagates to ancestors.
-  void wgtInvalidatePaint(WidgetT *w)                          Mark widget for repaint only (no layout recalculation).
-  void wgtSetText(WidgetT *w, const char *text)                Set widget text (label, button, textinput, etc.).
-  const char *wgtGetText(const WidgetT *w)                     Get widget text.
-  void wgtSetEnabled(WidgetT *w, bool enabled)                 Enable or disable a widget.
-  void wgtSetReadOnly(WidgetT *w, bool readOnly)               Set read-only mode.
-  void wgtSetFocused(WidgetT *w)                               Set keyboard focus to a widget.
-  WidgetT *wgtGetFocused(void)                                 Get the currently focused widget.
-  void wgtSetVisible(WidgetT *w, bool visible)                 Show or hide a widget.
-  void wgtSetName(WidgetT *w, const char *name)                Set widget name for lookup.
-  WidgetT *wgtFind(WidgetT *root, const char *name)            Find a widget by name in the subtree.
-  void wgtDestroy(WidgetT *w)                                  Destroy a widget and all its children.
-  void wgtSetTooltip(WidgetT *w, const char *text)             Set tooltip text. Pass NULL to remove.
-
-
-
-

AnsiTerm

-

AnsiTerm

-

A VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal emulator widget designed for connecting to BBS systems over the serial link. Uses a traditional text-mode cell buffer (character + attribute byte pairs) with the CP437 character set and 16-color CGA palette. Supports cursor movement, screen/line erase, scrolling regions, SGR colors, and scrollback history. Communication is abstracted through read/write function pointers, allowing the terminal to work with raw serial ports, the secLink encrypted channel, or any other byte-oriented transport.

-

Header: widgets/widgetAnsiTerm.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *term = wgtAnsiTerm(parent, 80, 25);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                              Description
-  -----                                              -----------
-  wgtAnsiTerm(parent, cols, rows)                    Create an ANSI terminal widget with the given column and row dimensions.
-  wgtAnsiTermWrite(w, data, len)                     Write raw bytes into the terminal's ANSI parser. data is a const uint8_t * buffer, len is the byte count.
-  wgtAnsiTermClear(w)                                Clear the terminal screen and reset the cursor to the home position.
-  wgtAnsiTermSetComm(w, ctx, readFn, writeFn)        Attach a communication channel. readFn and writeFn are I/O callbacks; ctx is passed as their first argument.
-  wgtAnsiTermSetScrollback(w, maxLines)              Set the maximum number of scrollback lines. Lines scrolled off the top are saved in a circular buffer.
-  wgtAnsiTermPoll(w)                                 Poll the communication channel for incoming data and feed it into the ANSI parser.
-  wgtAnsiTermRepaint(w, outY, outH)                  Fast repaint path that renders dirty rows directly into the window's content buffer, bypassing the widget pipeline. Returns the dirty region via outY/outH.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Cols         Integer    Read-only    Number of columns.
-  Rows         Integer    Read-only    Number of rows.
-  Scrollback   Integer    Write-only   Maximum scrollback lines.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Clear        Clear the terminal screen.
-  Write        Write a string into the terminal.
-

Events

-

AnsiTerm uses the common events only. No widget-specific events are defined.

-
-
-
-

Box (VBox / HBox / Frame)

-

Box (VBox / HBox / Frame)

-

Container widgets that arrange their children in a vertical column (VBox), horizontal row (HBox), or a titled group box (Frame). These are the primary layout building blocks. Children are laid out using a flexbox-like algorithm with weight-based extra-space distribution.

-

Header: widgets/widgetBox.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  wgtVBox(parent)              Create a vertical box container. Children are stacked top to bottom.
-  wgtHBox(parent)              Create a horizontal box container. Children are placed left to right.
-  wgtFrame(parent, title)      Create a titled group box (a VBox with a border and label).
-

Properties

-

Box containers use the common WidgetT fields for layout control:

-
  Property     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  align        Main-axis alignment of children. HBox: Start=left, Center=center, End=right. VBox: Start=top, Center=center, End=bottom.
-  spacing      Gap between children (tagged size).
-  padding      Internal padding around children (tagged size).
-  weight       Controls how the box itself stretches within its parent.
-

Events

-

Containers use the common events only. No widget-specific events.

-
-
-
-

Button

-

Button

-

A push button with a text label. Fires onClick when pressed and released. Supports keyboard activation via accelerator keys.

-

Header: widgets/widgetButton.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *btn = wgtButton(parent, "OK");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  wgtButton(parent, text)      Create a push button with the given label text.
-

Properties

-

Uses common WidgetT properties. Set accelKey for keyboard shortcut. Use wgtSetText() / wgtGetText() to change the label.

-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when the button is clicked (press + release).
-
-
-
-

Label

-

Label

-

A static text label. Does not accept keyboard focus. Typically used to describe other widgets. Supports text alignment and accelerator keys (with WCLASS_FOCUS_FORWARD, the accelerator moves focus to the next focusable sibling).

-

Header: widgets/widgetLabel.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *lbl = wgtLabel(parent, "Name:");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                        Description
-  -----                        -----------
-  wgtLabel(parent, text)       Create a text label.
-  wgtLabelSetAlign(w, align)   Set the text alignment (AlignStartE, AlignCenterE, AlignEndE).
-

Properties

-

Use wgtSetText() / wgtGetText() to change the text. Set accelKey for accelerator support (focus forwards to next focusable widget).

-

Events

-

Labels use the common events only. Typically no callbacks are set on labels.

-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type                         Access       Description
-  --------     ----                         ------       -----------
-  Alignment    Enum (Left, Center, Right)   Read/Write   Text alignment within the label.
-
-
-
-

TextInput / TextArea

-

TextInput / TextArea

-

Single-line text input, password input, masked input, and multi-line text area with optional syntax colorization, line numbers, find/replace, and gutter decorators.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTextInput.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                            Description
-  -----                            -----------
-  wgtTextInput(parent, maxLen)     Create a single-line text input. maxLen is the maximum number of characters.
-  wgtPasswordInput(parent, maxLen) Create a password input (characters displayed as bullets).
-  wgtMaskedInput(parent, mask)     Create a masked input field. The mask string defines the input format.
-  wgtTextArea(parent, maxLen)      Create a multi-line text area.
-

Methods (TextArea-specific)

-
  Macro                                             Description
-  -----                                             -----------
-  wgtTextAreaSetColorize(w, fn, ctx)                Set a syntax colorization callback. The callback receives each line and fills a color index array. Color indices: 0=default, 1=keyword, 2=string, 3=comment, 4=number, 5=operator, 6=type/builtin, 7=reserved.
-  wgtTextAreaGoToLine(w, line)                      Scroll to and place the cursor on the given line number.
-  wgtTextAreaSetAutoIndent(w, enable)               Enable or disable automatic indentation on newline.
-  wgtTextAreaSetShowLineNumbers(w, show)            Show or hide line numbers in the gutter.
-  wgtTextAreaSetCaptureTabs(w, capture)             When true, Tab key inserts a tab/spaces instead of moving focus.
-  wgtTextAreaSetTabWidth(w, width)                  Set the tab stop width in characters.
-  wgtTextAreaSetUseTabChar(w, useChar)              When true, insert literal tab characters; when false, insert spaces.
-  wgtTextAreaFindNext(w, needle, caseSens, fwd)     Search for the next occurrence. Returns true if found.
-  wgtTextAreaReplaceAll(w, needle, repl, caseSens)  Replace all occurrences. Returns the number of replacements made.
-  wgtTextAreaSetLineDecorator(w, fn, ctx)           Set a gutter line decorator callback. The callback returns a color and receives the line number, a color output pointer, and the user context.
-  wgtTextAreaGetCursorLine(w)                       Get the current cursor line number.
-  wgtTextAreaSetGutterClick(w, fn)                  Set a callback for gutter clicks (e.g. for breakpoint toggling). Callback receives the widget and line number.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the text content changes.
-  onKeyPress   Fires on each key press (ASCII value).
-  onValidate   Called before committing a change. Return false to cancel.
-
-
-
-

Checkbox

-

Checkbox

-

A toggle control with a text label. Clicking toggles between checked and unchecked states.

-

Header: widgets/widgetCheckbox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *cb = wgtCheckbox(parent, "Enable logging");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                  Description
-  -----                                  -----------
-  wgtCheckbox(parent, text)              Create a checkbox with the given label text.
-  wgtCheckboxIsChecked(w)                Returns true if the checkbox is checked.
-  wgtCheckboxSetChecked(w, checked)      Set the checked state programmatically.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when clicked (after toggle).
-  onChange     Fires when the checked state changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Boolean    Read/Write   Whether the checkbox is checked.
-
-
-
-

Radio Button

-

Radio Button

-

A mutually exclusive selection control. Radio buttons must be placed inside a radio group container. Only one radio button within a group can be selected at a time.

-

Header: widgets/widgetRadio.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *grp = wgtRadioGroup(parent);
-WidgetT *r1  = wgtRadio(grp, "Option A");
-WidgetT *r2  = wgtRadio(grp, "Option B");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                Description
-  -----                                -----------
-  wgtRadioGroup(parent)                Create a radio group container.
-  wgtRadio(parent, text)               Create a radio button inside a group.
-  wgtRadioGroupSetSelected(w, idx)     Set the selected radio button by index within the group.
-  wgtRadioGetIndex(w)                  Get the index of the currently selected radio button.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires on the radio button when clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read-only    Index of the currently selected radio button in the group.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method          Description
-  ------          -----------
-  SetSelected     Set the selected radio button by index.
-
-
-
-

Dropdown

-

Dropdown

-

A drop-down list that displays a single selected item and expands to show all options when clicked. Read-only selection (the user cannot type into it).

-

Header: widgets/widgetDropdown.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *dd = wgtDropdown(parent);
-const char *items[] = { "Red", "Green", "Blue" };
-wgtDropdownSetItems(dd, items, 3);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                    Description
-  -----                                    -----------
-  wgtDropdown(parent)                      Create a dropdown list.
-  wgtDropdownSetItems(w, items, count)     Set the list of items. items is a const char ** array.
-  wgtDropdownGetSelected(w)                Get the index of the selected item (-1 if none).
-  wgtDropdownSetSelected(w, idx)           Set the selected item by index.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the selected item changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected item.
-
-
-
-

ComboBox

-

ComboBox

-

A combination of a text input and a dropdown list. The user can either type a value or select from a list of predefined options. Unlike Dropdown, the text field is editable.

-

Header: widgets/widgetComboBox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *cb = wgtComboBox(parent, 128);
-const char *items[] = { "Arial", "Courier", "Times" };
-wgtComboBoxSetItems(cb, items, 3);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                    Description
-  -----                                    -----------
-  wgtComboBox(parent, maxLen)              Create a combo box. maxLen is the maximum text input length.
-  wgtComboBoxSetItems(w, items, count)     Set the dropdown items.
-  wgtComboBoxGetSelected(w)                Get the index of the selected item (-1 if the text does not match any item).
-  wgtComboBoxSetSelected(w, idx)           Set the selected item by index.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the text or selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected item.
-
-
-
-

DataCtrl

-

DataCtrl

-

A VB3-style Data control for database binding. Displays a visible navigation bar that connects to a SQLite database via dvxSql* functions. Reads all rows from the RecordSource query into an in-memory cache for bidirectional navigation. Fires Reposition events when the cursor moves so bound controls can update. Supports master-detail linking between Data controls.

-

Header: widgets/widgetDataCtrl.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *data = wgtDataCtrl(parent);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtDataCtrl(parent)                            Create a Data control.
-  wgtDataCtrlRefresh(w)                          Re-execute the RecordSource query and rebuild the row cache.
-  wgtDataCtrlMoveFirst(w)                        Move the cursor to the first row.
-  wgtDataCtrlMovePrev(w)                         Move the cursor to the previous row.
-  wgtDataCtrlMoveNext(w)                         Move the cursor to the next row.
-  wgtDataCtrlMoveLast(w)                         Move the cursor to the last row.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetField(w, colName)                Get the value of a column in the current row. Returns const char *.
-  wgtDataCtrlSetField(w, colName, value)         Set the value of a column in the current row (marks the row dirty).
-  wgtDataCtrlUpdateRow(w)                        Write the current row's pending changes back to the database.
-  wgtDataCtrlUpdate(w)                           Flush all pending changes to the database.
-  wgtDataCtrlAddNew(w)                           Begin a new row. Sets dirty state; call Update to commit.
-  wgtDataCtrlDelete(w)                           Delete the current row from the database.
-  wgtDataCtrlSetMasterValue(w, val)              Set the master-detail filter value for this control.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetRowCount(w)                      Get the total number of cached rows.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetColCount(w)                      Get the number of columns in the result set.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetColName(w, col)                  Get the name of a column by index. Returns const char *.
-  wgtDataCtrlGetCellText(w, row, col)            Get the text of a specific cell by row and column index. Returns const char *.
-  wgtDataCtrlSetCurrentRow(w, row)               Set the current row by index (0-based).
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property       Type       Access       Description
-  --------       ----       ------       -----------
-  DatabaseName   String     Read/Write   Path to the SQLite database file.
-  RecordSource   String     Read/Write   SQL query or table name for the result set.
-  KeyColumn      String     Read/Write   Primary key column name (used for UPDATE/DELETE).
-  MasterSource   String     Read/Write   Name of the master Data control for master-detail linking.
-  MasterField    String     Read/Write   Column in the master control to read for the filter value.
-  DetailField    String     Read/Write   Column in this table to filter by the master value.
-  Caption        String     Read/Write   Text displayed on the navigation bar.
-  BOF            Boolean    Read-only    True when the cursor is before the first row.
-  EOF            Boolean    Read-only    True when the cursor is past the last row.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method         Description
-  ------         -----------
-  AddNew         Begin a new row.
-  Delete         Delete the current row.
-  MoveFirst      Move to the first row.
-  MoveLast       Move to the last row.
-  MoveNext       Move to the next row.
-  MovePrevious   Move to the previous row.
-  Refresh        Re-execute the query and rebuild the cache.
-  Update         Write pending changes to the database.
-

Events

-
  Event          Description
-  -----          -----------
-  Reposition     Fires when the current row changes (navigation, refresh, etc.). Default event.
-  Validate       Fires before writing changes. Return false to cancel.
-
-
-
-

DbGrid

-

DbGrid

-

A database grid widget that displays all records from a Data control in a scrollable, sortable table. Columns auto-populate from the Data control's column names and can be hidden, resized, and renamed by the application. Clicking a column header sorts the display. Selecting a row syncs the Data control's cursor position. The grid reads directly from the Data control's cached rows, so there is no separate copy of the data.

-

Header: widgets/widgetDbGrid.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *grid = wgtDbGrid(parent);
-wgtDbGridSetDataWidget(grid, dataCtrl);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                                  Description
-  -----                                                  -----------
-  wgtDbGrid(parent)                                      Create a database grid widget.
-  wgtDbGridSetDataWidget(w, dataWidget)                  Bind the grid to a Data control. The grid reads rows from this widget.
-  wgtDbGridRefresh(w)                                    Re-read the Data control's state and repaint the grid.
-  wgtDbGridSetColumnVisible(w, fieldName, visible)       Show or hide a column by field name.
-  wgtDbGridSetColumnHeader(w, fieldName, header)         Set a display header for a column (overrides the field name).
-  wgtDbGridSetColumnWidth(w, fieldName, width)           Set the width of a column by field name (tagged size, 0 = auto).
-  wgtDbGridGetSelectedRow(w)                             Get the index of the currently selected data row (-1 if none).
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  GridLines    Boolean    Read/Write   Whether to draw grid lines between cells.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Refresh      Re-read the Data control and repaint.
-

Events

-
  Event        Description
-  -----        -----------
-  Click        Fires when a row is clicked.
-  DblClick     Fires when a row is double-clicked. Default event.
-
-
-
-

ListBox

-

ListBox

-

A scrollable list of text items. Supports single and multi-selection modes and drag-to-reorder.

-

Header: widgets/widgetListBox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *lb = wgtListBox(parent);
-const char *items[] = { "Alpha", "Beta", "Gamma" };
-wgtListBoxSetItems(lb, items, 3);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtListBox(parent)                             Create a list box.
-  wgtListBoxSetItems(w, items, count)            Set the list items.
-  wgtListBoxGetSelected(w)                       Get the index of the selected item (-1 if none).
-  wgtListBoxSetSelected(w, idx)                  Set the selected item by index.
-  wgtListBoxSetMultiSelect(w, multi)             Enable or disable multi-selection mode.
-  wgtListBoxIsItemSelected(w, idx)               Check if a specific item is selected (multi-select mode).
-  wgtListBoxSetItemSelected(w, idx, selected)    Select or deselect a specific item.
-  wgtListBoxSelectAll(w)                         Select all items (multi-select mode).
-  wgtListBoxClearSelection(w)                    Deselect all items.
-  wgtListBoxSetReorderable(w, reorderable)       Enable drag-to-reorder.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when an item is clicked.
-  onDblClick   Fires when an item is double-clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected item.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method           Description
-  ------           -----------
-  SelectAll        Select all items.
-  ClearSelection   Deselect all items.
-  SetMultiSelect   Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  SetReorderable   Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-  IsItemSelected   Check if a specific item is selected by index.
-  SetItemSelected  Select or deselect a specific item by index.
-
-
-
-

ListView

-

ListView

-

A multi-column list with sortable headers. Supports single and multi-selection, column alignment, header click sorting, and drag-to-reorder. Data is provided as a flat array of strings (row-major order, one string per cell).

-

Header: widgets/widgetListView.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *lv = wgtListView(parent);
-ListViewColT cols[] = {
-    { "Name", wgtChars(20), ListViewAlignLeftE },
-    { "Size", wgtChars(10), ListViewAlignRightE }
-};
-wgtListViewSetColumns(lv, cols, 2);
-const char *cells[] = { "file.txt", "1234", "readme.md", "5678" };
-wgtListViewSetData(lv, cells, 2);
-

Column Definition

-
typedef struct {
-    const char      *title;
-    int32_t          width;   // tagged size (wgtPixels/wgtChars/wgtPercent, 0 = auto)
-    ListViewAlignE   align;   // ListViewAlignLeftE, ListViewAlignCenterE, ListViewAlignRightE
-} ListViewColT;
-

Sort Direction

-
typedef enum {
-    ListViewSortNoneE,
-    ListViewSortAscE,
-    ListViewSortDescE
-} ListViewSortE;
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                              Description
-  -----                                              -----------
-  wgtListView(parent)                                Create a list view.
-  wgtListViewSetColumns(w, cols, count)              Define columns from an array of ListViewColT.
-  wgtListViewSetData(w, cellData, rowCount)          Set row data. cellData is a flat const char ** array of size rowCount * colCount.
-  wgtListViewGetSelected(w)                          Get the index of the selected row (-1 if none).
-  wgtListViewSetSelected(w, idx)                     Set the selected row by index.
-  wgtListViewSetSort(w, col, dir)                    Set the sort column and direction.
-  wgtListViewSetHeaderClickCallback(w, cb)           Set a callback for header clicks. Signature: void (*cb)(WidgetT *w, int32_t col, ListViewSortE dir).
-  wgtListViewSetMultiSelect(w, multi)                Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  wgtListViewIsItemSelected(w, idx)                  Check if a specific row is selected.
-  wgtListViewSetItemSelected(w, idx, selected)       Select or deselect a specific row.
-  wgtListViewSelectAll(w)                            Select all rows.
-  wgtListViewClearSelection(w)                       Deselect all rows.
-  wgtListViewSetReorderable(w, reorderable)          Enable drag-to-reorder of rows.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when a row is clicked.
-  onDblClick   Fires when a row is double-clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  ListIndex    Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently selected row.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method           Description
-  ------           -----------
-  SelectAll        Select all rows.
-  ClearSelection   Deselect all rows.
-  SetMultiSelect   Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  SetReorderable   Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-  IsItemSelected   Check if a specific row is selected by index.
-  SetItemSelected  Select or deselect a specific row by index.
-
-
-
-

TreeView

-

TreeView

-

A hierarchical tree control with expandable/collapsible nodes. Supports single and multi-selection and drag-to-reorder. Tree items are added as children of the TreeView or of other tree items to create nested hierarchies.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTreeView.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tv    = wgtTreeView(parent);
-WidgetT *root  = wgtTreeItem(tv, "Root");
-WidgetT *child = wgtTreeItem(root, "Child");
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtTreeView(parent)                            Create a tree view control.
-  wgtTreeItem(parent, text)                      Add a tree item as a child of the tree view or another tree item.
-  wgtTreeViewGetSelected(w)                      Get the currently selected tree item (returns WidgetT *, NULL if none).
-  wgtTreeViewSetSelected(w, item)                Set the selected tree item.
-  wgtTreeViewSetMultiSelect(w, multi)            Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  wgtTreeViewSetReorderable(w, reorderable)      Enable drag-to-reorder of items.
-  wgtTreeItemSetExpanded(w, expanded)            Expand or collapse a tree item.
-  wgtTreeItemIsExpanded(w)                       Check if a tree item is expanded.
-  wgtTreeItemIsSelected(w)                       Check if a tree item is selected (multi-select mode).
-  wgtTreeItemSetSelected(w, selected)            Select or deselect a tree item.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when a tree item is clicked.
-  onDblClick   Fires when a tree item is double-clicked.
-  onChange     Fires when the selection changes.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method           Description
-  ------           -----------
-  SetMultiSelect   Enable or disable multi-selection.
-  SetReorderable   Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-
-
-
-

Image

-

Image

-

Displays a bitmap image. Can be created from raw pixel data or loaded from a BMP file on disk. The image is rendered at its natural size within the widget bounds.

-

Header: widgets/widgetImage.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  wgtImage(parent, data, w, h, pitch)          Create an image widget from raw pixel data. data is a uint8_t * pixel buffer, w/h are dimensions, pitch is bytes per row.
-  wgtImageFromFile(parent, path)               Create an image widget by loading a BMP file from disk.
-

Methods

-
  Macro                                        Description
-  -----                                        -----------
-  wgtImageSetData(w, data, imgW, imgH, pitch)  Replace the displayed image with new raw pixel data.
-  wgtImageLoadFile(w, path)                    Replace the displayed image by loading a new file.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when the image is clicked.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property      Type       Access       Description
-  --------      ----       ------       -----------
-  Picture       String     Write-only   Load an image from a file path.
-  ImageWidth    Integer    Read-only    Width of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-  ImageHeight   Integer    Read-only    Height of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-
-
-
-

ImageButton

-

ImageButton

-

A clickable button that displays an image instead of text. Has press/release visual feedback like a regular button. Can be created from raw pixel data or a BMP file.

-

Header: widgets/widgetImageButton.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                                            Description
-  -----                                            -----------
-  wgtImageButton(parent, data, w, h, pitch)        Create an image button from raw pixel data.
-  wgtImageButtonFromFile(parent, path)             Create an image button by loading a BMP file.
-

Methods

-
  Macro                                                Description
-  -----                                                -----------
-  wgtImageButtonSetData(w, data, imgW, imgH, pitch)   Replace the image with new raw pixel data.
-  wgtImageButtonLoadFile(w, path)                      Replace the image by loading a new file.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires when the image button is clicked (press + release).
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property      Type       Access       Description
-  --------      ----       ------       -----------
-  Picture       String     Write-only   Load an image from a file path.
-  ImageWidth    Integer    Read-only    Width of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-  ImageHeight   Integer    Read-only    Height of the currently loaded image in pixels.
-
-
-
-

Slider

-

Slider

-

A horizontal slider (track bar) for selecting an integer value within a range. The user drags the thumb or clicks the track to change the value.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSlider.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sl = wgtSlider(parent, 0, 100);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                Description
-  -----                                -----------
-  wgtSlider(parent, minVal, maxVal)    Create a slider with the given integer range.
-  wgtSliderSetValue(w, value)          Set the slider value programmatically.
-  wgtSliderGetValue(w)                 Get the current slider value.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the slider value changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read/Write   Current slider value.
-
-
-
-

Spinner

-

Spinner

-

A numeric input with up/down buttons for incrementing and decrementing a value within a range. Supports both integer and floating-point (real) modes.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSpinner.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sp = wgtSpinner(parent, 0, 100, 1);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtSpinner(parent, minVal, maxVal, step)       Create a spinner with the given integer range and step size.
-  wgtSpinnerSetValue(w, value)                   Set the integer value.
-  wgtSpinnerGetValue(w)                          Get the current integer value.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRange(w, minVal, maxVal)          Set the integer range.
-  wgtSpinnerSetStep(w, step)                     Set the integer step size.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealMode(w, enable)               Switch to floating-point mode.
-  wgtSpinnerGetRealValue(w)                      Get the current floating-point value.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealValue(w, value)               Set the floating-point value.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealRange(w, minVal, maxVal)      Set the floating-point range.
-  wgtSpinnerSetRealStep(w, step)                 Set the floating-point step size.
-  wgtSpinnerSetDecimals(w, decimals)             Set the number of decimal places displayed in real mode.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the value changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read/Write   Current integer value.
-  RealMode     Boolean    Read/Write   Whether floating-point mode is active.
-  Decimals     Integer    Read/Write   Number of decimal places displayed in real mode.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  SetRange     Set the integer range (min, max).
-  SetStep      Set the integer step size.
-
-
-
-

ProgressBar

-

ProgressBar

-

A visual indicator of progress, displayed as a filled bar. Supports both horizontal and vertical orientations. Value ranges from 0 to 100.

-

Header: widgets/widgetProgressBar.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                    Description
-  -----                    -----------
-  wgtProgressBar(parent)   Create a horizontal progress bar.
-  wgtProgressBarV(parent)  Create a vertical progress bar.
-

Methods

-
  Macro                            Description
-  -----                            -----------
-  wgtProgressBarSetValue(w, value) Set the progress value (0-100).
-  wgtProgressBarGetValue(w)        Get the current progress value.
-

Events

-

ProgressBar is a display-only widget. Typically no callbacks are set.

-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Value        Integer    Read/Write   Current progress value (0-100).
-
-
-
-

Canvas

-

Canvas

-

A freeform drawing surface with a fixed-size pixel buffer. Provides drawing primitives (lines, rectangles, circles, text, individual pixels) and supports save/load to BMP files. Mouse interaction is available via a callback.

-

Header: widgets/widgetCanvas.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *cv = wgtCanvas(parent, 320, 200);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                    Description
-  -----                                    -----------
-  wgtCanvas(parent, w, h)                  Create a canvas with the given pixel dimensions.
-  wgtCanvasClear(w, color)                 Fill the entire canvas with a solid color.
-  wgtCanvasSetPenColor(w, color)           Set the drawing pen color.
-  wgtCanvasSetPenSize(w, size)             Set the drawing pen size in pixels.
-  wgtCanvasDrawLine(w, x0, y0, x1, y1)    Draw a line from (x0,y0) to (x1,y1).
-  wgtCanvasDrawRect(w, x, y, width, height)    Draw a rectangle outline.
-  wgtCanvasFillRect(w, x, y, width, height)    Draw a filled rectangle.
-  wgtCanvasFillCircle(w, cx, cy, radius)   Draw a filled circle.
-  wgtCanvasSetPixel(w, x, y, color)        Set a single pixel to the given color.
-  wgtCanvasGetPixel(w, x, y)              Get the color of a single pixel.
-  wgtCanvasDrawText(w, x, y, text)         Draw text at the given position using the current pen color.
-  wgtCanvasSetMouseCallback(w, cb)         Set a mouse interaction callback. Signature: void (*cb)(WidgetT *w, int32_t cx, int32_t cy, bool drag). Receives canvas-relative coordinates and whether the mouse is being dragged.
-  wgtCanvasSave(w, path)                   Save the canvas contents to a BMP file.
-  wgtCanvasLoad(w, path)                   Load a BMP file into the canvas.
-

Events

-
  Callback                                     Description
-  --------                                     -----------
-  onClick                                      Fires when the canvas is clicked.
-  Mouse callback (via wgtCanvasSetMouseCallback)   Fires on mouse down and drag with canvas-local coordinates.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Clear        Clear the canvas to a given color.
-
-
-
-

Timer

-

Timer

-

A non-visual widget that fires its onClick callback at a regular interval. Useful for animations, polling, and periodic updates. Must be explicitly started after creation.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTimer.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tmr = wgtTimer(parent, 1000, true);  // 1 second, repeating
-tmr->onClick = onTimerTick;
-wgtTimerStart(tmr);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                          Description
-  -----                                          -----------
-  wgtTimer(parent, intervalMs, repeat)           Create a timer. intervalMs is the interval in milliseconds. repeat: true for repeating, false for one-shot.
-  wgtTimerStart(w)                               Start the timer.
-  wgtTimerStop(w)                                Stop the timer.
-  wgtTimerSetInterval(w, intervalMs)             Change the timer interval.
-  wgtTimerIsRunning(w)                           Returns true if the timer is currently running.
-  wgtUpdateTimers()                              Global tick function. Called by the event loop to advance all active timers.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onClick      Fires each time the timer elapses.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Enabled      Boolean    Read/Write   Whether the timer is running. Reading returns the running state; writing starts or stops it.
-  Interval     Integer    Write-only   Timer interval in milliseconds.
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  Start        Start the timer.
-  Stop         Stop the timer.
-

Extra Events (BASIC Interface)

-
  Event        Description
-  -----        -----------
-  Timer        Fires each time the timer elapses. Default event.
-
-
-
-

Toolbar

-

Toolbar

-

A horizontal container for toolbar buttons and controls. Typically placed at the top of a window. Children (usually ImageButtons or Buttons) are laid out horizontally with toolbar-appropriate spacing.

-

Header: widgets/widgetToolbar.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tb = wgtToolbar(parent);
-wgtImageButtonFromFile(tb, "icons/save.bmp");
-wgtImageButtonFromFile(tb, "icons/open.bmp");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                Description
-  -----                -----------
-  wgtToolbar(parent)   Create a toolbar container.
-

Properties

-

Uses common container properties. Add children (buttons, separators, etc.) to populate the toolbar.

-

Events

-

Toolbar itself has no widget-specific events. Events fire on the child widgets.

-
-
-
-

StatusBar

-

StatusBar

-

A horizontal bar typically placed at the bottom of a window for displaying status text and informational widgets. Children are laid out horizontally.

-

Header: widgets/widgetStatusBar.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sb = wgtStatusBar(parent);
-wgtLabel(sb, "Ready");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                  Description
-  -----                  -----------
-  wgtStatusBar(parent)   Create a status bar container.
-

Properties

-

Uses common container properties. Add child widgets (labels, progress bars, etc.) to populate.

-

Events

-

StatusBar itself has no widget-specific events. Events fire on the child widgets.

-
-
-
-

ScrollPane

-

ScrollPane

-

A scrollable container that provides vertical and/or horizontal scrollbars when its content exceeds the visible area. Place a single child (typically a VBox or HBox) inside the scroll pane.

-

Header: widgets/widgetScrollPane.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sp = wgtScrollPane(parent);
-WidgetT *content = wgtVBox(sp);
-// add children to content...
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                      Description
-  -----                                      -----------
-  wgtScrollPane(parent)                      Create a scroll pane container.
-  wgtScrollPaneScrollToChild(sp, child)      Scroll so that the given child widget is visible.
-  wgtScrollPaneSetNoBorder(w, noBorder)      When true, removes the border around the scroll pane.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onScroll     Fires when the scroll position changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  NoBorder     Boolean    Read/Write   Whether the border around the scroll pane is hidden.
-
-
-
-

Splitter

-

Splitter

-

A two-pane container with a draggable divider. The user drags the splitter bar to resize the two panes. Can be oriented vertically (left/right panes) or horizontally (top/bottom panes). Add exactly two children.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSplitter.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *sp = wgtSplitter(parent, true);  // vertical = left|right
-WidgetT *left  = wgtVBox(sp);
-WidgetT *right = wgtVBox(sp);
-

Macros

-
  Macro                                  Description
-  -----                                  -----------
-  wgtSplitter(parent, vertical)          Create a splitter. vertical=true for left/right panes, false for top/bottom.
-  wgtSplitterSetPos(w, pos)             Set the divider position in pixels.
-  wgtSplitterGetPos(w)                  Get the current divider position in pixels.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the divider position changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  Position     Integer    Read/Write   Divider position in pixels.
-
-
-
-

TabControl

-

TabControl

-

A tabbed container that displays one page at a time with clickable tabs along the top. Each tab page is a container that holds its own child widgets.

-

Header: widgets/widgetTabControl.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *tabs = wgtTabControl(parent);
-WidgetT *page1 = wgtTabPage(tabs, "General");
-WidgetT *page2 = wgtTabPage(tabs, "Advanced");
-// add children to page1, page2...
-

Macros

-
  Macro                              Description
-  -----                              -----------
-  wgtTabControl(parent)              Create a tab control.
-  wgtTabPage(parent, title)          Add a tab page with the given title. Returns the page container widget.
-  wgtTabControlSetActive(w, idx)     Set the active tab by index (0-based).
-  wgtTabControlGetActive(w)          Get the index of the active tab.
-

Events

-
  Callback     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  onChange     Fires when the active tab changes.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type       Access       Description
-  --------     ----       ------       -----------
-  TabIndex     Integer    Read/Write   Index of the currently active tab (0-based).
-

Methods (BASIC Interface)

-
  Method       Description
-  ------       -----------
-  SetActive    Set the active tab by index.
-
-
-
-

Separator

-

Separator

-

A visual dividing line used to separate groups of widgets. Available in horizontal and vertical orientations.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSeparator.h

-

Creation

-
  Macro                    Description
-  -----                    -----------
-  wgtHSeparator(parent)    Create a horizontal separator line.
-  wgtVSeparator(parent)    Create a vertical separator line.
-

Events

-

Separator is a visual-only widget. No events.

-
-
-
-

Spacer

-

Spacer

-

An invisible widget used for layout purposes. By default it has weight=100, so it absorbs available extra space. Useful for pushing other widgets apart or aligning them to edges.

-

Header: widgets/widgetSpacer.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *row = wgtHBox(parent);
-wgtButton(row, "OK");
-wgtSpacer(row);           // pushes Cancel to the right
-wgtButton(row, "Cancel");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                Description
-  -----                -----------
-  wgtSpacer(parent)    Create an invisible spacer widget.
-

Events

-

Spacer is an invisible layout widget. No events.

-
-
-
-

WrapBox

-

WrapBox

-

A flow/wrap layout container that arranges children left-to-right, wrapping to the next row when the available width is exceeded. Each row's height is the maximum child height in that row. Supports configurable spacing between items and rows, and per-row alignment for short rows.

-

Header: widgets/widgetWrapBox.h

-

Creation

-
WidgetT *wrap = wgtWrapBox(parent);
-wgtButton(wrap, "Tag 1");
-wgtButton(wrap, "Tag 2");
-wgtButton(wrap, "Tag 3");
-

Macro

-
  Macro                  Description
-  -----                  -----------
-  wgtWrapBox(parent)     Create a wrap box container.
-

Properties

-

WrapBox uses the common WidgetT container fields for layout control:

-
  Property     Description
-  --------     -----------
-  spacing      Gap between children in both the horizontal and vertical directions (tagged size). Default is 4 pixels.
-  padding      Internal padding around children (tagged size). Default is 2 pixels.
-

Properties (BASIC Interface)

-
  Property     Type                         Access       Description
-  --------     ----                         ------       -----------
-  Alignment    Enum (Left, Center, Right)   Read/Write   Row alignment for rows that do not fill the full width.
-

Events

-

WrapBox is a container widget. It uses the common events only. No widget-specific events are defined.

-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvx_widget_system.html b/docs/dvx_widget_system.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0d84651..0000000 --- a/docs/dvx_widget_system.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,134 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations) - - - - -
-
-

Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations)

-

DVX Widget System

-

Complete reference for the DVX GUI widget toolkit. All widgets are implemented as dynamically loaded DXE modules. They are created via convenience macros that wrap the per-widget API function tables. The base WidgetT structure is defined in core/dvxWidget.h; individual widget headers live in widgets/.

-

Individual widgets are documented in their own sections. See the table of contents for the full list.

-

Base WidgetT (Common Properties, Events, and Operations)

-

Every widget inherits from the WidgetT structure defined in core/dvxWidget.h. The fields and callbacks listed here are available on all widget types.

-

Common Properties

-
  Field              Type                Description
-  -----              ----                -----------
-  name               char[32]            Widget name for lookup via wgtFind().
-  x, y, w, h         int32_t             Computed geometry relative to the window content area (set by layout).
-  minW, minH          int32_t (tagged)    Minimum size hints. Use wgtPixels(), wgtChars(), or wgtPercent(). 0 = auto.
-  maxW, maxH          int32_t (tagged)    Maximum size constraints. 0 = no limit.
-  prefW, prefH        int32_t (tagged)    Preferred size. 0 = auto.
-  weight             int32_t             Extra-space distribution weight. 0 = fixed, 100 = normal. A widget with weight=200 gets twice the extra space of one with weight=100.
-  align              WidgetAlignE        Main-axis alignment for children: AlignStartE, AlignCenterE, AlignEndE.
-  spacing            int32_t (tagged)    Spacing between children (containers only). 0 = default.
-  padding            int32_t (tagged)    Internal padding (containers only). 0 = default.
-  fgColor            uint32_t            Foreground color override. 0 = use color scheme default.
-  bgColor            uint32_t            Background color override. 0 = use color scheme default.
-  visible            bool                Visibility state.
-  enabled            bool                Enabled state. Disabled widgets are grayed out and ignore input.
-  readOnly           bool                Read-only mode: allows scrolling/selection but blocks editing.
-  swallowTab         bool                When true, Tab key goes to the widget instead of navigating focus.
-  accelKey           char                Lowercase accelerator character. 0 if none.
-  tooltip            const char *        Tooltip text. NULL = none. Caller owns the string.
-  contextMenu        MenuT *             Right-click context menu. NULL = none. Caller owns.
-  userData           void *              Application-defined user data pointer.
-

Size Specification Macros

-
  Macro              Description
-  -----              -----------
-  wgtPixels(v)       Size in pixels.
-  wgtChars(v)        Size in character widths (multiplied by font charWidth).
-  wgtPercent(v)      Size as a percentage of parent dimension.
-

Common Events (Callbacks)

-

These callback function pointers are available on every WidgetT. Set them directly on the widget struct.

-
  Callback           Signature                                                   Description
-  --------           ---------                                                   -----------
-  onClick            void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires on mouse click / activation.
-  onDblClick         void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires on double-click.
-  onChange           void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget's value changes (text, selection, check state, etc.).
-  onFocus            void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget receives keyboard focus.
-  onBlur             void (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Fires when the widget loses keyboard focus.
-  onKeyPress         void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyAscii)                      Fires on a printable key press (ASCII value).
-  onKeyDown          void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)        Fires on key down (scan code + shift state).
-  onKeyUp            void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t keyCode, int32_t shift)        Fires on key up.
-  onMouseDown        void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse button press.
-  onMouseUp          void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse button release.
-  onMouseMove        void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t button, int32_t x, int32_t y)  Fires on mouse movement over the widget.
-  onScroll           void (*)(WidgetT *w, int32_t delta)                         Fires on mouse wheel scroll.
-  onValidate         bool (*)(WidgetT *w)                                        Validation callback. Return false to cancel a pending write.
-

Common Operations

-
  Function                                                    Description
-  --------                                                    -----------
-  WidgetT *wgtInitWindow(AppContextT *ctx, WindowT *win)      Initialize widgets for a window. Returns the root VBox container.
-  AppContextT *wgtGetContext(const WidgetT *w)                 Walk up from any widget to retrieve the AppContextT.
-  void wgtInvalidate(WidgetT *w)                               Mark widget for re-layout and repaint. Propagates to ancestors.
-  void wgtInvalidatePaint(WidgetT *w)                          Mark widget for repaint only (no layout recalculation).
-  void wgtSetText(WidgetT *w, const char *text)                Set widget text (label, button, textinput, etc.).
-  const char *wgtGetText(const WidgetT *w)                     Get widget text.
-  void wgtSetEnabled(WidgetT *w, bool enabled)                 Enable or disable a widget.
-  void wgtSetReadOnly(WidgetT *w, bool readOnly)               Set read-only mode.
-  void wgtSetFocused(WidgetT *w)                               Set keyboard focus to a widget.
-  WidgetT *wgtGetFocused(void)                                 Get the currently focused widget.
-  void wgtSetVisible(WidgetT *w, bool visible)                 Show or hide a widget.
-  void wgtSetName(WidgetT *w, const char *name)                Set widget name for lookup.
-  WidgetT *wgtFind(WidgetT *root, const char *name)            Find a widget by name in the subtree.
-  void wgtDestroy(WidgetT *w)                                  Destroy a widget and all its children.
-  void wgtSetTooltip(WidgetT *w, const char *text)             Set tooltip text. Pass NULL to remove.
-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvxbasic_control_reference.html b/docs/dvxbasic_control_reference.html deleted file mode 100644 index bce898e..0000000 --- a/docs/dvxbasic_control_reference.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1137 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Common Properties, Events, and Methods - - - - -
-
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Every control in DVX BASIC inherits a set of common properties, events, and methods. These are handled by the form runtime before dispatching to widget-specific interface descriptors.

-

Common Properties

-
  Property     Type      R/W   Description
-  ----------   -------   ---   -------------------------------------------
-  Name         String    R     The control's name (e.g. "Command1"). Read-only at runtime.
-  Left         Integer   R/W   X position in pixels relative to the parent container.
-  Top          Integer   R/W   Y position in pixels relative to the parent container.
-  Width        Integer   R/W   Current width in pixels. Setting this changes the minimum width constraint.
-  Height       Integer   R/W   Current height in pixels. Setting this changes the minimum height constraint.
-  MinWidth     Integer   R/W   Minimum width for layout. Alias for Width in the setter.
-  MinHeight    Integer   R/W   Minimum height for layout. Alias for Height in the setter.
-  MaxWidth     Integer   R/W   Maximum width cap (0 = no limit, stretch to fill).
-  MaxHeight    Integer   R/W   Maximum height cap (0 = no limit, stretch to fill).
-  Weight       Integer   R/W   Layout weight. 0 = fixed size, >0 = share extra space proportionally.
-  Visible      Boolean   R/W   Whether the control is visible.
-  Enabled      Boolean   R/W   Whether the control accepts user input.
-  BackColor    Long      R/W   Background color as a 32-bit ARGB value.
-  ForeColor    Long      R/W   Foreground (text) color as a 32-bit ARGB value.
-  TabIndex     Integer   R     Accepted for VB compatibility but ignored. DVX has no tab order.
-

Common Events

-

These events are wired on every control loaded from a .frm file. Controls created dynamically at runtime via code only receive Click, DblClick, Change, GotFocus, and LostFocus; the keyboard, mouse, and scroll events below require the control to be defined in the .frm file.

-
  Event       Parameters                                    Description
-  ---------   -------------------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Click       (none)                                        Fires when the control is clicked.
-  DblClick    (none)                                        Fires when the control is double-clicked.
-  Change      (none)                                        Fires when the control's value or text changes.
-  GotFocus    (none)                                        Fires when the control receives keyboard focus.
-  LostFocus   (none)                                        Fires when the control loses keyboard focus.
-  KeyPress    KeyAscii As Integer                           Fires when a printable key is pressed. KeyAscii is the ASCII code.
-  KeyDown     KeyCode As Integer, Shift As Integer          Fires when any key is pressed down. KeyCode is the scan code; Shift indicates modifier keys.
-  KeyUp       KeyCode As Integer, Shift As Integer          Fires when a key is released.
-  MouseDown   Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when a mouse button is pressed over the control.
-  MouseUp     Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when a mouse button is released over the control.
-  MouseMove   Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when the mouse moves over the control.
-  Scroll      Delta As Integer                              Fires when the control is scrolled (mouse wheel or scrollbar).
-

Common Methods

-
  Method     Parameters   Description
-  --------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetFocus   (none)       Gives keyboard focus to this control.
-  Refresh    (none)       Forces the control to repaint.
-

Form

-

Data Binding

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

Form

-

Form

-

VB Equivalent: Form -- DVX Widget: Window + VBox/HBox root

-

The Form is the top-level container representing a DVX window. It is declared in the .frm file with Begin Form FormName. All controls are children of the form's content box, which uses either VBox (default) or HBox layout.

-

Form Properties

-
  Property    Type      Default          Description
-  ----------  -------   --------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Name        String    "Form1"          The form's name, used for event dispatch and Load statement.
-  Caption     String    (same as Name)   Window title bar text.
-  Width       Integer   400              Window width in pixels. Setting this disables AutoSize.
-  Height      Integer   300              Window height in pixels. Setting this disables AutoSize.
-  Left        Integer   0                Initial X position. Used when Centered is False.
-  Top         Integer   0                Initial Y position. Used when Centered is False.
-  Layout      String    "VBox"           Content box layout: "VBox" (vertical) or "HBox" (horizontal).
-  AutoSize    Boolean   True             When True, the window shrink-wraps to fit its content.
-  Resizable   Boolean   True             Whether the user can resize the window at runtime.
-  Centered    Boolean   True             When True, the window is centered on screen. When False, Left/Top are used.
-

Form Events

-
  Event         Parameters              Description
-  -----------   ---------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Load          (none)                  Fires after the form and all controls are created. This is the default event.
-  Unload        (none)                  Fires when the form is being closed or unloaded.
-  QueryUnload   Cancel As Integer       Fires before Unload. Set Cancel = 1 to abort the close.
-  Resize        (none)                  Fires when the window is resized by the user.
-  Activate      (none)                  Fires when the window gains focus.
-  Deactivate    (none)                  Fires when the window loses focus.
-

Form Methods

-
  Statement           Description
-  ------------------  -------------------------------------------
-  Load FormName       Load the form (creates the window and controls, fires Load event).
-  Unload FormName     Unload the form (fires Unload, destroys window).
-  FormName.Show       Make the form visible.
-  FormName.Show 1     Show as modal dialog (blocks until closed).
-  FormName.Hide       Hide the form without unloading it.
-

Example

-
Sub Form_Load ()
-    Form1.Caption = "Hello World"
-    Print "Form loaded!"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Form_QueryUnload (Cancel As Integer)
-    If MsgBox("Really quit?", 4) <> 6 Then
-        Cancel = 1
-    End If
-End Sub
-
-Sub Form_Resize ()
-    Print "Window resized"
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

CommandButton

-

CommandButton

-

VB Equivalent: CommandButton -- DVX Widget: button | Name Prefix: Command

-

A push button that triggers an action when clicked. Created with wgtButton(parent, text).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type     Description
-  --------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String   The text displayed on the button. Use & for accelerator keys (e.g. "&OK").
-

No additional type-specific properties beyond common properties and Caption.

-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin Form Form1
-    Caption = "Button Demo"
-    Begin CommandButton Command1
-        Caption = "&Click Me!"
-    End
-End
-
-Sub Command1_Click ()
-    MsgBox "Button was clicked!"
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Label

-

Label

-

VB Equivalent: Label -- DVX Widget: label

-

A static text label. Supports left, center, and right alignment.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type   Description
-  ---------   ----   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption     String The text displayed by the label.
-  Alignment   Enum   Text alignment: Left (default), Center, or Right.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin Label Label1
-    Caption   = "Hello, World!"
-    Alignment = "Center"
-End
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

TextBox

-

TextBox

-

VB Equivalent: TextBox -- DVX Widget: textbox (single-line text input, max 256 chars)

-

A single-line text input field. Supports data binding via DataSource and DataField properties.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property     Type     Description
-  ----------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Text         String   The text content of the input field.
-  DataSource   String   Name of a Data control for data binding.
-  DataField    String   Column name for data binding.
-

Default Event: Change

-

Example

-
Begin TextBox Text1
-    Text = "Enter text here"
-End
-
-Sub Text1_Change ()
-    Label1.Caption = "You typed: " & Text1.Text
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Data Binding

-
-
-

TextArea

-

TextArea

-

VB Equivalent: TextArea (DVX extension) -- DVX Widget: textarea (multi-line text input, max 4096 chars)

-

A multi-line text editing area. This is a DVX extension with no direct VB3 equivalent (VB uses a TextBox with MultiLine=True). Supports syntax colorization, line numbers, auto-indent, and find/replace via the C API.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type     Description
-  --------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Text       String   The full text content.
-

Default Event: Change

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

CheckBox

-

CheckBox

-

VB Equivalent: CheckBox -- DVX Widget: checkbox

-

A toggle control with a label. Checked state is exposed as a Boolean.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String    The text displayed next to the checkbox.
-  Value      Boolean   True if checked, False if unchecked.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin CheckBox Check1
-    Caption = "Enable feature"
-End
-
-Sub Check1_Click ()
-    If Check1.Value Then
-        Label1.Caption = "Feature ON"
-    Else
-        Label1.Caption = "Feature OFF"
-    End If
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

OptionButton

-

OptionButton

-

VB Equivalent: OptionButton -- DVX Widget: radio (radio group + radio button) | Name Prefix: Option

-

A radio button for mutually exclusive choices. DVX uses a radio group container; individual OptionButtons are children of the group. The Value property returns the button's index within its group.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String    The text displayed next to the radio button.
-  Value      Integer   The index of this radio button within its group (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method        Parameters          Description
-  -----------   -----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetSelected   Index As Integer    Select the radio button at the given index within the group.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Frame

-

Frame

-

VB Equivalent: Frame -- DVX Widget: frame (titled VBox container)

-

A container with a titled border. Child controls are placed inside the frame using VBox layout. In the .frm file, nest Begin/End blocks inside the Frame block.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type     Description
-  --------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String   The title displayed in the frame border.
-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin Frame Frame1
-    Caption = "Options"
-    Begin CheckBox Check1
-        Caption = "Option A"
-    End
-    Begin CheckBox Check2
-        Caption = "Option B"
-    End
-End
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

VBox

-

VBox

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: vbox (vertical layout container)

-

A container that arranges its children vertically, top to bottom. No title or border. Use Weight on children to distribute extra space.

-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

No type-specific properties.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

HBox

-
-
-

HBox

-

HBox

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: hbox (horizontal layout container)

-

A container that arranges its children horizontally, left to right. Use Weight on children to distribute extra space.

-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

No type-specific properties.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

VBox

-
-
-

ListBox

-

ListBox

-

VB Equivalent: ListBox -- DVX Widget: listbox

-

A scrollable list of selectable items. Items are managed via methods (AddItem, RemoveItem, Clear). Supports single and multi-select modes.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected item (-1 = no selection).
-  ListCount   Integer   Number of items in the list (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method            Parameters                                Description
-  ---------------   ---------------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  AddItem           Text As String                            Add an item to the end of the list.
-  RemoveItem        Index As Integer                          Remove the item at the given index.
-  Clear             (none)                                    Remove all items from the list.
-  List              Index As Integer                          Return the text of the item at the given index.
-  SelectAll         (none)                                    Select all items (multi-select mode).
-  ClearSelection    (none)                                    Deselect all items.
-  SetMultiSelect    Multi As Boolean                          Enable or disable multi-select mode.
-  SetReorderable    Reorderable As Boolean                    Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-  IsItemSelected    Index As Integer                          Returns True if the item at Index is selected.
-  SetItemSelected   Index As Integer, Selected As Boolean     Select or deselect a specific item.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Sub Form_Load ()
-    List1.AddItem "Apple"
-    List1.AddItem "Banana"
-    List1.AddItem "Cherry"
-End Sub
-
-Sub List1_Click ()
-    Dim idx As Integer
-    idx = List1.ListIndex
-    If idx >= 0 Then
-        Label1.Caption = "Selected: " & List1.List(idx)
-    End If
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

ComboBox

-

DropDown

-
-
-

ComboBox

-

ComboBox

-

VB Equivalent: ComboBox -- DVX Widget: combobox (editable text field + drop-down list, max 256 chars)

-

A combination of a text input and a drop-down list. The user can type text or select from the list. Supports the same AddItem/RemoveItem/Clear/List methods as ListBox.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Text        String    The text in the editable field.
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected list item (-1 = none).
-  ListCount   Integer   Number of items in the drop-down list (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-

Same as ListBox: AddItem, RemoveItem, Clear, List.

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

DropDown

-

DropDown

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: dropdown (non-editable drop-down list)

-

A read-only drop-down list. Unlike ComboBox, the user cannot type free text; they can only select from the provided items. Supports AddItem/RemoveItem/Clear/List.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected item.
-  ListCount   Integer   Number of items (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-

Same as ListBox: AddItem, RemoveItem, Clear, List.

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

HScrollBar

-

HScrollBar

-

VB Equivalent: HScrollBar -- DVX Widget: slider | Name Prefix: HScroll

-

A horizontal slider/scrollbar control. The value ranges between a minimum and maximum set at creation time (default 0 to 100).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Value      Integer   The current slider position (clamped to min/max range).
-

Default Event: Change

-

Example

-
Begin HScrollBar HScroll1
-    MinWidth = 200
-End
-
-Sub HScroll1_Change ()
-    Label1.Caption = "Value: " & Str$(HScroll1.Value)
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

SpinButton

-

SpinButton

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: spinner | Name Prefix: Spin

-

A numeric input with up/down buttons. Supports integer mode (default) and real-number mode with configurable decimal places.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Value      Integer   Current integer value (in integer mode).
-  RealMode   Boolean   True to use floating-point mode; False for integer mode.
-  Decimals   Integer   Number of decimal places shown in real mode.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method     Parameters                       Description
-  --------   ------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetRange   Min As Integer, Max As Integer   Set the allowed value range.
-  SetStep    Step As Integer                  Set the increment per button click.
-

Default Event: Change

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Timer

-

Timer

-

VB Equivalent: Timer -- DVX Widget: timer (non-visual)

-

A non-visual control that fires its event at a regular interval. The Timer widget is invisible at runtime -- it has no on-screen representation.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Enabled    Boolean   True to start the timer, False to stop it.
-  Interval   Integer   Timer interval in milliseconds (write-only from BASIC).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method   Parameters   Description
-  ------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Start    (none)       Start the timer.
-  Stop     (none)       Stop the timer.
-

Type-Specific Events

-
  Event   Parameters   Description
-  -----   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Timer   (none)       Fires each time the interval elapses. This is the default event.
-
Note: The Timer control fires the Timer event instead of Change. The onChange callback on the underlying widget is remapped automatically.
-

Example

-
Begin Timer Timer1
-    Interval = 1000
-    Enabled  = True
-End
-
-Dim counter As Integer
-
-Sub Timer1_Timer ()
-    counter = counter + 1
-    Label1.Caption = "Ticks: " & Str$(counter)
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

PictureBox

-

PictureBox

-

VB Equivalent: PictureBox -- DVX Widget: canvas | Name Prefix: Picture

-

A drawing surface (canvas). Supports drawing lines, rectangles, circles, text, and individual pixels. Can save and load BMP images. The default canvas size is 64x64 pixels.

-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method   Parameters         Description
-  ------   ----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Clear    Color As Integer   Fill the entire canvas with the specified color.
-

Additional drawing methods (DrawLine, DrawRect, FillRect, FillCircle, SetPixel, GetPixel, DrawText, Save, Load) are available through the C API but not currently exposed through BASIC interface descriptors.

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Image

-

Image

-

VB Equivalent: Image -- DVX Widget: image

-

A static image display control. Loads BMP images from file. Cannot be placed via the designer toolbox (requires pixel data at creation time); typically created in code or loaded via the Picture property.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property      Type      Description
-  -----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Picture       String    Path to a BMP file to load (write-only).
-  ImageWidth    Integer   Width of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-  ImageHeight   Integer   Height of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ImageButton

-

ImageButton

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: imagebutton

-

A button that displays an image instead of text. Like Image, it requires pixel data at creation time and is typically loaded via the Picture property.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property      Type      Description
-  -----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Picture       String    Path to a BMP file to load (write-only).
-  ImageWidth    Integer   Width of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-  ImageHeight   Integer   Height of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ProgressBar

-

ProgressBar

-

VB Equivalent: ProgressBar -- DVX Widget: progressbar

-

A horizontal progress indicator bar.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Value      Integer   Current progress value (0-100).
-

No type-specific events or methods. No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ListView

-

ListView

-

VB Equivalent: ListView -- DVX Widget: listview

-

A multi-column list with column headers. Supports sorting, multi-select, and drag-to-reorder. Columns are configured via the C API (SetColumns, SetData).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected row (-1 = none).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method            Parameters                                Description
-  ---------------   ---------------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SelectAll         (none)                                    Select all rows.
-  ClearSelection    (none)                                    Deselect all rows.
-  SetMultiSelect    Multi As Boolean                          Enable or disable multi-select.
-  SetReorderable    Reorderable As Boolean                    Enable or disable row reordering.
-  IsItemSelected    Index As Integer                          Returns True if the row at Index is selected.
-  SetItemSelected   Index As Integer, Selected As Boolean     Select or deselect a specific row.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

TreeView

-

TreeView

-

VB Equivalent: TreeView -- DVX Widget: treeview

-

A hierarchical tree of expandable/collapsible nodes. Nodes are created via the C API (wgtTreeItem). Supports multi-select and drag-to-reorder.

-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method           Parameters               Description
-  --------------   ----------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetMultiSelect   Multi As Boolean         Enable or disable multi-select mode.
-  SetReorderable   Reorderable As Boolean   Enable or disable node reordering.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

TabStrip

-

TabStrip

-

VB Equivalent: TabStrip -- DVX Widget: tabcontrol

-

A tabbed container. Each tab page is a separate container that holds child controls. Switching tabs shows one page and hides others.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  TabIndex   Integer   Index of the active tab (0-based). Note: this property name collides with the common VB-compatibility TabIndex property, which shadows it at runtime. Use the SetActive method instead to switch tabs.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method      Parameters          Description
-  ---------   -----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetActive   Index As Integer    Switch to the tab at the given index. This is the recommended way to change tabs at runtime (the TabIndex property is shadowed by the common property handler).
-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-
Warning: The TabIndex property is shadowed by the common property handler at runtime. Use the SetActive method to change tabs programmatically.
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Splitter

-

Splitter

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: splitter

-

A resizable split pane. Holds exactly two child widgets separated by a draggable divider. Default orientation is vertical (top/bottom split).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Position   Integer   Position of the divider in pixels from the top (or left).
-

Container: Yes

-

No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ScrollPane

-

ScrollPane

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: scrollpane | Name Prefix: Scroll

-

A scrollable container. Place child controls inside and the ScrollPane automatically provides scrollbars when the content exceeds the visible area.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  NoBorder   Boolean   When True, suppresses the border around the scroll pane.
-

Container: Yes

-

No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

WrapBox

-

WrapBox

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: wrapbox

-

A container that arranges children in a flowing layout, wrapping to the next row when the available width is exceeded. Similar to CSS flexbox with flex-wrap: wrap.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type   Description
-  ---------   ----   -------------------------------------------
-  Alignment   Enum   Horizontal alignment of items: Left, Center, or Right.
-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Line

-

Line

-

VB Equivalent: Line -- DVX Widget: separator

-

A visual separator line. The underlying widget supports both horizontal and vertical orientations. The default (via BASIC) is horizontal.

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Spacer

-

Spacer

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: spacer

-

An invisible layout spacer. Takes up space in the layout without rendering anything. Useful for pushing controls apart. Give it a Weight to absorb extra space.

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Toolbar

-

Toolbar

-

VB Equivalent: Toolbar -- DVX Widget: toolbar

-

A horizontal container styled as a toolbar, with compact padding and spacing. Place buttons, labels, or other controls inside.

-

Container: Yes

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

StatusBar

-

StatusBar

-

VB Equivalent: StatusBar -- DVX Widget: statusbar

-

A horizontal container styled as a status bar, typically placed at the bottom of a form. At the C API level it accepts child widgets, but it is not registered as a container in the form runtime, so child controls cannot be nested inside it in .frm files. Set its Caption property to display status text.

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Terminal

-

Terminal

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: ansiterm (ANSI terminal emulator)

-

A VT100/ANSI terminal emulator widget. Supports ANSI escape sequences, scrollback buffer, and serial communication. Default size is 80 columns by 25 rows.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property     Type      Description
-  ----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Cols         Integer   Number of character columns (read-only).
-  Rows         Integer   Number of character rows (read-only).
-  Scrollback   Integer   Number of scrollback lines (write-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method   Parameters        Description
-  ------   ---------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Clear    (none)            Clear the terminal screen.
-  Write    Text As String    Write text (with ANSI escape processing) to the terminal.
-

No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Data

-

Data

-

VB Equivalent: Data -- DVX Widget: data (database record navigator)

-

A data access control that connects to a SQLite database and provides record navigation. Other controls can bind to a Data control via their DataSource and DataField properties.

-

See Data Binding for details

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property       Type      R/W   Description
-  ------------   -------   ---   -------------------------------------------
-  DatabaseName   String    R/W   Path to the SQLite database file.
-  RecordSource   String    R/W   Table name or SQL SELECT query for the recordset.
-  KeyColumn      String    R/W   Primary key column name (used for UPDATE/DELETE operations).
-  Caption        String    R/W   Text displayed on the navigator bar.
-  BOF            Boolean   R     True if the current position is before the first record (read-only).
-  EOF            Boolean   R     True if the current position is past the last record (read-only).
-  MasterSource   String    R/W   Name of a master Data control (for master-detail binding).
-  MasterField    String    R/W   Column in the master recordset to filter by.
-  DetailField    String    R/W   Column in this recordset that matches the master field.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method         Parameters   Description
-  ------------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  MoveFirst      (none)       Navigate to the first record.
-  MoveLast       (none)       Navigate to the last record.
-  MoveNext       (none)       Navigate to the next record.
-  MovePrevious   (none)       Navigate to the previous record.
-  AddNew         (none)       Add a new blank record.
-  Delete         (none)       Delete the current record.
-  Refresh        (none)       Re-query the database and reload records.
-  Update         (none)       Write pending changes to the database.
-

Type-Specific Events

-
  Event        Parameters          Description
-  ----------   -----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Reposition   (none)              Fires after the current record changes (navigation). This is the default event.
-  Validate     Cancel As Integer   Fires before writing a record. Set Cancel = 1 to abort.
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Data Binding

-

DBGrid

-
-
-

DBGrid

-

DBGrid

-

VB Equivalent: DBGrid -- DVX Widget: dbgrid

-

A data-bound grid that displays records from a Data control in a tabular format. Columns are auto-generated from the query results. Bind it using the DataSource property.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property     Type      Description
-  ----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  DataSource   String    Name of the Data control that supplies records.
-  GridLines    Boolean   Show or hide grid lines between cells.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method    Parameters   Description
-  -------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Refresh   (none)       Reload and redraw the grid from the Data control.
-

Type-Specific Events

-
  Event      Parameters   Description
-  --------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Click      (none)       Fires when a cell is clicked.
-  DblClick   (none)       Fires when a cell is double-clicked. This is the default event.
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Data

-

Data Binding

-
-
-

Data Binding

-

Data Binding

-

DVX BASIC provides VB3-style data binding through three properties that can be set on most controls:

-
  Property     Set On        Description
-  ----------   -----------   -------------------------------------------
-  DataSource   Any control   Name of the Data control to bind to (e.g. "Data1").
-  DataField    Any control   Column name from the Data control's recordset to display.
-

How It Works

- -

When a bound control loses focus (LostFocus), its current text is written back to the Data control's record cache, and Update is called automatically to persist changes.

-

Master-Detail Binding

-

For hierarchical data (e.g. orders and order items), use two Data controls:

- -

A detail Data control with its MasterSource set to the master's name, MasterField set to the key column in the master, and DetailField set to the foreign key column in the detail table.

-

When the master record changes, the detail Data control automatically re-queries using the master's current value for filtering. All controls bound to the detail are refreshed.

-

DBGrid Binding

-

Set the DBGrid's DataSource to a Data control name. The grid auto-populates columns from the query results and refreshes whenever the Data control refreshes.

-

Example

-
VERSION DVX 1.00
-Begin Form frmData
-    Caption      = "Data Binding Example"
-    AutoSize     = False
-    Width        = 400
-    Height       = 280
-    Begin Data Data1
-        DatabaseName = "myapp.db"
-        RecordSource = "customers"
-    End
-    Begin Label lblName
-        Caption = "Name:"
-    End
-    Begin TextBox txtName
-        DataSource = "Data1"
-        DataField  = "name"
-    End
-    Begin Label lblEmail
-        Caption = "Email:"
-    End
-    Begin TextBox txtEmail
-        DataSource = "Data1"
-        DataField  = "email"
-    End
-End
-
-Sub Data1_Reposition ()
-    Print "Current record changed"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Data1_Validate (Cancel As Integer)
-    If txtName.Text = "" Then
-        MsgBox "Name cannot be empty!"
-        Cancel = 1
-    End If
-End Sub
-

Data

-

DBGrid

-
-
-

Menu System

-

Menu System

-

Menus are defined in the .frm file using Begin Menu blocks. Each menu item has a name, caption, and nesting level. Menu items fire Click events dispatched as MenuName_Click.

-

FRM Syntax

-
Begin Form Form1
-    Caption = "Menu Demo"
-
-    Begin Menu mnuFile
-        Caption = "&File"
-        Begin Menu mnuOpen
-            Caption = "&Open"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuSave
-            Caption = "&Save"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuSep1
-            Caption = "-"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuExit
-            Caption = "E&xit"
-        End
-    End
-
-    Begin Menu mnuEdit
-        Caption = "&Edit"
-        Begin Menu mnuCopy
-            Caption = "&Copy"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuPaste
-            Caption = "&Paste"
-        End
-    End
-End
-

Menu Item Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String    The text displayed. Use & for accelerator key. Set to "-" for a separator.
-  Checked    Boolean   Whether the menu item shows a checkmark.
-  Enabled    Boolean   Whether the menu item is enabled (default True).
-

Nesting

-

Menu items are nested by placing Begin Menu blocks inside other Begin Menu blocks:

- -

Level 2+: submenu items.

-

A level-0 menu that contains children becomes a top-level menu header. A non-level-0 menu that contains children becomes a submenu.

-

Event Dispatch

-

Each clickable menu item (not headers, not separators) receives a unique numeric ID at load time. When clicked, the form's onMenu handler maps the ID to the menu item's name and fires MenuName_Click.

-
Sub mnuOpen_Click ()
-    MsgBox "Open was clicked"
-End Sub
-
-Sub mnuExit_Click ()
-    Unload Form1
-End Sub
-

Form

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

Control Arrays

-

Control Arrays

-

DVX BASIC supports VB-style control arrays. Multiple controls can share the same name, differentiated by an Index property. When an event fires on a control array element, the element's index is passed as the first parameter.

-

Defining Control Arrays in FRM

-
Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button A"
-    Index   = 0
-End
-Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button B"
-    Index   = 1
-End
-Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button C"
-    Index   = 2
-End
-

Event Handler Convention

-

When a control has an Index property (>= 0), the event handler receives Index As Integer as the first parameter, before any event-specific parameters.

-
Sub Command1_Click (Index As Integer)
-    Select Case Index
-        Case 0
-            MsgBox "Button A clicked"
-        Case 1
-            MsgBox "Button B clicked"
-        Case 2
-            MsgBox "Button C clicked"
-    End Select
-End Sub
-

Accessing Array Elements in Code

-

Use the indexed form ControlName(Index) to access a specific element:

-
Command1(0).Caption = "New Text"
-Command1(1).Enabled = False
-
Note: Control array elements share the same event handler Sub. The runtime prepends the Index argument automatically. If you define parameters on the Sub, Index comes first, followed by the event's own parameters (e.g. KeyPress would be Sub Ctrl1_KeyPress (Index As Integer, KeyAscii As Integer)).
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

FRM File Format

-

FRM File Format

-

The .frm file is a text file that describes a form's layout, controls, menus, and code. It follows a format compatible with VB3 .frm files, with DVX-specific extensions.

-

Structure

-
VERSION DVX 1.00
-Begin Form FormName
-    form-level properties...
-
-    Begin Menu mnuFile
-        Caption = "&File"
-        Begin Menu mnuOpen
-            Caption = "&Open"
-        End
-    End
-
-    Begin TypeName ControlName
-        property = value
-        ...
-    End
-
-    Begin Frame Frame1
-        Caption = "Group"
-        Begin TypeName ChildName
-            ...
-        End
-    End
-End
-
-BASIC code follows...
-
-Sub FormName_Load ()
-    ...
-End Sub
-

Rules

- -

Blank lines are ignored in the form section.

-

Common FRM Properties

-
  Property                  Applies To        Description
-  -----------------------   ---------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption                   Form, controls    Display text or window title.
-  Text                      TextBox, ComboBox Initial text content.
-  MinWidth / Width          Controls          Minimum width. Both names are accepted.
-  MinHeight / Height        Controls          Minimum height. Both names are accepted.
-  MaxWidth                  Controls          Maximum width (0 = no cap).
-  MaxHeight                 Controls          Maximum height (0 = no cap).
-  Weight                    Controls          Layout weight for flexible sizing.
-  Left                      Form, controls    X position (used by Form when Centered=False; informational for controls).
-  Top                       Form, controls    Y position.
-  Index                     Controls          Control array index (-1 or absent = not in array).
-  Visible                   Controls          Initial visibility.
-  Enabled                   Controls          Initial enabled state.
-  Layout                    Form              "VBox" or "HBox".
-  AutoSize                  Form              Auto-fit window to content.
-  Resizable                 Form              Allow runtime resizing.
-  Centered                  Form              Center window on screen.
-  DatabaseName              Data              SQLite database file path.
-  RecordSource              Data              Table name or SQL query.
-  DataSource                Bound controls    Name of the Data control.
-  DataField                 Bound controls    Column name in the recordset.
-

Form

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Menu System

-

Control Arrays

-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvxbasic_controls_overview.html b/docs/dvxbasic_controls_overview.html deleted file mode 100644 index 19ebfb5..0000000 --- a/docs/dvxbasic_controls_overview.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,349 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Common Properties, Events, and Methods - - - - -
-
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Every control in DVX BASIC inherits a set of common properties, events, and methods. These are handled by the form runtime before dispatching to widget-specific interface descriptors.

-

Common Properties

-
  Property     Type      R/W   Description
-  ----------   -------   ---   -------------------------------------------
-  Name         String    R     The control's name (e.g. "Command1"). Read-only at runtime.
-  Left         Integer   R/W   X position in pixels relative to the parent container.
-  Top          Integer   R/W   Y position in pixels relative to the parent container.
-  Width        Integer   R/W   Current width in pixels. Setting this changes the minimum width constraint.
-  Height       Integer   R/W   Current height in pixels. Setting this changes the minimum height constraint.
-  MinWidth     Integer   R/W   Minimum width for layout. Alias for Width in the setter.
-  MinHeight    Integer   R/W   Minimum height for layout. Alias for Height in the setter.
-  MaxWidth     Integer   R/W   Maximum width cap (0 = no limit, stretch to fill).
-  MaxHeight    Integer   R/W   Maximum height cap (0 = no limit, stretch to fill).
-  Weight       Integer   R/W   Layout weight. 0 = fixed size, >0 = share extra space proportionally.
-  Visible      Boolean   R/W   Whether the control is visible.
-  Enabled      Boolean   R/W   Whether the control accepts user input.
-  BackColor    Long      R/W   Background color as a 32-bit ARGB value.
-  ForeColor    Long      R/W   Foreground (text) color as a 32-bit ARGB value.
-  TabIndex     Integer   R     Accepted for VB compatibility but ignored. DVX has no tab order.
-

Common Events

-

These events are wired on every control loaded from a .frm file. Controls created dynamically at runtime via code only receive Click, DblClick, Change, GotFocus, and LostFocus; the keyboard, mouse, and scroll events below require the control to be defined in the .frm file.

-
  Event       Parameters                                    Description
-  ---------   -------------------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Click       (none)                                        Fires when the control is clicked.
-  DblClick    (none)                                        Fires when the control is double-clicked.
-  Change      (none)                                        Fires when the control's value or text changes.
-  GotFocus    (none)                                        Fires when the control receives keyboard focus.
-  LostFocus   (none)                                        Fires when the control loses keyboard focus.
-  KeyPress    KeyAscii As Integer                           Fires when a printable key is pressed. KeyAscii is the ASCII code.
-  KeyDown     KeyCode As Integer, Shift As Integer          Fires when any key is pressed down. KeyCode is the scan code; Shift indicates modifier keys.
-  KeyUp       KeyCode As Integer, Shift As Integer          Fires when a key is released.
-  MouseDown   Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when a mouse button is pressed over the control.
-  MouseUp     Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when a mouse button is released over the control.
-  MouseMove   Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when the mouse moves over the control.
-  Scroll      Delta As Integer                              Fires when the control is scrolled (mouse wheel or scrollbar).
-

Common Methods

-
  Method     Parameters   Description
-  --------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetFocus   (none)       Gives keyboard focus to this control.
-  Refresh    (none)       Forces the control to repaint.
-

Form

-

Data Binding

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

Data Binding

-

Data Binding

-

DVX BASIC provides VB3-style data binding through three properties that can be set on most controls:

-
  Property     Set On        Description
-  ----------   -----------   -------------------------------------------
-  DataSource   Any control   Name of the Data control to bind to (e.g. "Data1").
-  DataField    Any control   Column name from the Data control's recordset to display.
-

How It Works

- -

When a bound control loses focus (LostFocus), its current text is written back to the Data control's record cache, and Update is called automatically to persist changes.

-

Master-Detail Binding

-

For hierarchical data (e.g. orders and order items), use two Data controls:

- -

A detail Data control with its MasterSource set to the master's name, MasterField set to the key column in the master, and DetailField set to the foreign key column in the detail table.

-

When the master record changes, the detail Data control automatically re-queries using the master's current value for filtering. All controls bound to the detail are refreshed.

-

DBGrid Binding

-

Set the DBGrid's DataSource to a Data control name. The grid auto-populates columns from the query results and refreshes whenever the Data control refreshes.

-

Example

-
VERSION DVX 1.00
-Begin Form frmData
-    Caption      = "Data Binding Example"
-    AutoSize     = False
-    Width        = 400
-    Height       = 280
-    Begin Data Data1
-        DatabaseName = "myapp.db"
-        RecordSource = "customers"
-    End
-    Begin Label lblName
-        Caption = "Name:"
-    End
-    Begin TextBox txtName
-        DataSource = "Data1"
-        DataField  = "name"
-    End
-    Begin Label lblEmail
-        Caption = "Email:"
-    End
-    Begin TextBox txtEmail
-        DataSource = "Data1"
-        DataField  = "email"
-    End
-End
-
-Sub Data1_Reposition ()
-    Print "Current record changed"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Data1_Validate (Cancel As Integer)
-    If txtName.Text = "" Then
-        MsgBox "Name cannot be empty!"
-        Cancel = 1
-    End If
-End Sub
-

Data

-

DBGrid

-
-
-

Menu System

-

Menu System

-

Menus are defined in the .frm file using Begin Menu blocks. Each menu item has a name, caption, and nesting level. Menu items fire Click events dispatched as MenuName_Click.

-

FRM Syntax

-
Begin Form Form1
-    Caption = "Menu Demo"
-
-    Begin Menu mnuFile
-        Caption = "&File"
-        Begin Menu mnuOpen
-            Caption = "&Open"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuSave
-            Caption = "&Save"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuSep1
-            Caption = "-"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuExit
-            Caption = "E&xit"
-        End
-    End
-
-    Begin Menu mnuEdit
-        Caption = "&Edit"
-        Begin Menu mnuCopy
-            Caption = "&Copy"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuPaste
-            Caption = "&Paste"
-        End
-    End
-End
-

Menu Item Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String    The text displayed. Use & for accelerator key. Set to "-" for a separator.
-  Checked    Boolean   Whether the menu item shows a checkmark.
-  Enabled    Boolean   Whether the menu item is enabled (default True).
-

Nesting

-

Menu items are nested by placing Begin Menu blocks inside other Begin Menu blocks:

- -

Level 2+: submenu items.

-

A level-0 menu that contains children becomes a top-level menu header. A non-level-0 menu that contains children becomes a submenu.

-

Event Dispatch

-

Each clickable menu item (not headers, not separators) receives a unique numeric ID at load time. When clicked, the form's onMenu handler maps the ID to the menu item's name and fires MenuName_Click.

-
Sub mnuOpen_Click ()
-    MsgBox "Open was clicked"
-End Sub
-
-Sub mnuExit_Click ()
-    Unload Form1
-End Sub
-

Form

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

Control Arrays

-

Control Arrays

-

DVX BASIC supports VB-style control arrays. Multiple controls can share the same name, differentiated by an Index property. When an event fires on a control array element, the element's index is passed as the first parameter.

-

Defining Control Arrays in FRM

-
Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button A"
-    Index   = 0
-End
-Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button B"
-    Index   = 1
-End
-Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button C"
-    Index   = 2
-End
-

Event Handler Convention

-

When a control has an Index property (>= 0), the event handler receives Index As Integer as the first parameter, before any event-specific parameters.

-
Sub Command1_Click (Index As Integer)
-    Select Case Index
-        Case 0
-            MsgBox "Button A clicked"
-        Case 1
-            MsgBox "Button B clicked"
-        Case 2
-            MsgBox "Button C clicked"
-    End Select
-End Sub
-

Accessing Array Elements in Code

-

Use the indexed form ControlName(Index) to access a specific element:

-
Command1(0).Caption = "New Text"
-Command1(1).Enabled = False
-
Note: Control array elements share the same event handler Sub. The runtime prepends the Index argument automatically. If you define parameters on the Sub, Index comes first, followed by the event's own parameters (e.g. KeyPress would be Sub Ctrl1_KeyPress (Index As Integer, KeyAscii As Integer)).
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

FRM File Format

-

FRM File Format

-

The .frm file is a text file that describes a form's layout, controls, menus, and code. It follows a format compatible with VB3 .frm files, with DVX-specific extensions.

-

Structure

-
VERSION DVX 1.00
-Begin Form FormName
-    form-level properties...
-
-    Begin Menu mnuFile
-        Caption = "&File"
-        Begin Menu mnuOpen
-            Caption = "&Open"
-        End
-    End
-
-    Begin TypeName ControlName
-        property = value
-        ...
-    End
-
-    Begin Frame Frame1
-        Caption = "Group"
-        Begin TypeName ChildName
-            ...
-        End
-    End
-End
-
-BASIC code follows...
-
-Sub FormName_Load ()
-    ...
-End Sub
-

Rules

- -

Blank lines are ignored in the form section.

-

Common FRM Properties

-
  Property                  Applies To        Description
-  -----------------------   ---------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption                   Form, controls    Display text or window title.
-  Text                      TextBox, ComboBox Initial text content.
-  MinWidth / Width          Controls          Minimum width. Both names are accepted.
-  MinHeight / Height        Controls          Minimum height. Both names are accepted.
-  MaxWidth                  Controls          Maximum width (0 = no cap).
-  MaxHeight                 Controls          Maximum height (0 = no cap).
-  Weight                    Controls          Layout weight for flexible sizing.
-  Left                      Form, controls    X position (used by Form when Centered=False; informational for controls).
-  Top                       Form, controls    Y position.
-  Index                     Controls          Control array index (-1 or absent = not in array).
-  Visible                   Controls          Initial visibility.
-  Enabled                   Controls          Initial enabled state.
-  Layout                    Form              "VBox" or "HBox".
-  AutoSize                  Form              Auto-fit window to content.
-  Resizable                 Form              Allow runtime resizing.
-  Centered                  Form              Center window on screen.
-  DatabaseName              Data              SQLite database file path.
-  RecordSource              Data              Table name or SQL query.
-  DataSource                Bound controls    Name of the Data control.
-  DataField                 Bound controls    Column name in the recordset.
-

Form

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Menu System

-

Control Arrays

-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvxbasic_help.html b/docs/dvxbasic_help.html deleted file mode 100644 index 822b0b2..0000000 --- a/docs/dvxbasic_help.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2824 +0,0 @@ - - - - -DVX BASIC IDE Guide - - - - -
-
-

DVX BASIC IDE Guide

-

DVX BASIC IDE Guide

-

DVX BASIC is a Visual BASIC development environment for the DVX GUI System. It provides a VB3-style integrated development environment with a code editor, form designer, project system, and a full interactive debugger -- all running natively on DOS under the DVX windowing system.

-

This guide covers every feature of the IDE: menus, toolbar, editor, form designer, project management, debugger, and auxiliary windows.

-

IDE Windows

-

The DVX BASIC IDE is modeled after Visual Basic 3.0. It consists of several floating windows arranged on the DVX desktop:

- -

Debug Windows -- Locals, Call Stack, Watch, and Breakpoints windows that appear automatically when debugging.

-

The IDE compiles BASIC source into bytecode and runs it in an integrated virtual machine (VM). Programs execute in cooperative slices (10,000 VM steps per slice), yielding to the DVX event loop between slices so the GUI remains responsive.

-

File Menu

-

Edit Menu

-

Run Menu

-

View Menu

-

Window Menu

-

Tools Menu

-

Help Menu

-

Toolbar

-

Code Editor

-

Form Designer

-

Project System

-

Properties Panel

-

Toolbox

-

Debugger

-

Locals Window

-

Call Stack Window

-

Watch Window

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Immediate Window

-

Output Window

-

Find / Replace

-

Preferences

-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-
-
-

File Menu

-

File Menu

-
  Menu Item              Shortcut   Description
-  ---------              --------   -----------
-  New Project...                    Create a new DVX BASIC project.
-  Open Project...                   Open an existing .dbp project file.
-  Save Project                      Save the current project file to disk.
-  Close Project                     Close the current project (prompts to save unsaved changes).
-  ---
-  Project Properties...             Edit project metadata (name, author, version, startup form, icon, etc.).
-  ---
-  Add File...            Ctrl+O     Add a .bas or .frm file to the project. If no project is open, creates an implicit project from the file.
-  Save File              Ctrl+S     Save the active file to disk.
-  Save All                          Save all modified files in the project.
-  ---
-  Remove File                       Remove the selected file from the project (prompts to save if modified).
-  ---
-  Exit                              Close the IDE (prompts to save unsaved changes).
-

Edit Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Edit Menu

-

Edit Menu

-
  Menu Item    Shortcut   Description
-  ---------    --------   -----------
-  Cut          Ctrl+X     Cut selected text to the clipboard.
-  Copy         Ctrl+C     Copy selected text to the clipboard.
-  Paste        Ctrl+V     Paste text from the clipboard.
-  ---
-  Select All   Ctrl+A     Select all text in the active editor.
-  ---
-  Delete       Del        Delete the selected text or control (in the form designer).
-  ---
-  Find...      Ctrl+F     Open the Find/Replace dialog.
-  Find Next    F3         Find the next occurrence of the search text.
-  Replace...   Ctrl+H     Open the Find/Replace dialog with replace enabled.
-

Run Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Run Menu

-

Run Menu

-
  Menu Item                Shortcut         Description
-  ---------                --------         -----------
-  Run                      F5               Compile and run the program. If paused at a breakpoint, resumes execution with debugging disabled (runs free).
-  Debug                    Shift+F5         Compile and run with the debugger active. Breakpoints are active but execution does not pause at the first statement. If paused, resumes to the next breakpoint.
-  Run Without Recompile    Ctrl+F5          Re-run the last compiled module without recompiling.
-  Stop                     Esc              Stop the running program immediately.
-  ---
-  Step Into                F8               Execute one statement, stepping into SUB/FUNCTION calls. If idle, starts a debug session and breaks at the first statement.
-  Step Over                Shift+F8         Execute one statement, stepping over SUB/FUNCTION calls.
-  Step Out                 Ctrl+Shift+F8    Run until the current SUB/FUNCTION returns.
-  Run to Cursor            Ctrl+F8          Run until execution reaches the line where the cursor is positioned.
-  ---
-  Toggle Breakpoint        F9               Toggle a breakpoint on the current editor line.
-  ---
-  Clear Output                              Clear the Output window.
-  ---
-  Save on Run                               Checkbox: when enabled, all modified files are saved automatically before compiling. Persisted in preferences.
-

View Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

View Menu

-

View Menu

-
  Menu Item        Shortcut   Description
-  ---------        --------   -----------
-  Code             F7         Switch to Code view for the active file (or the file selected in the Project Explorer).
-  Designer         Shift+F7   Switch to Design view for the active form file.
-  ---
-  Toolbar                     Checkbox: show or hide the toolbar. Persisted in preferences.
-  Status Bar                  Checkbox: show or hide the status bar. Persisted in preferences.
-  ---
-  Menu Editor...   Ctrl+E     Open the Menu Editor dialog for the active form. Allows designing menu bars with captions, names, levels, checked state, and enabled state.
-

Window Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Window Menu

-

Window Menu

-
  Menu Item          Description
-  ---------          -----------
-  Code Editor        Show or raise the Code Editor window.
-  Output             Show or raise the Output window.
-  Immediate          Show or raise the Immediate window.
-  Locals             Show or raise the Locals debug window.
-  Call Stack         Show or raise the Call Stack debug window.
-  Watch              Show or raise the Watch debug window.
-  Breakpoints        Show or raise the Breakpoints window.
-  ---
-  Project Explorer   Show or raise the Project Explorer window.
-  Toolbox            Show or raise the Toolbox window.
-  Properties         Show or raise the Properties panel.
-

Tools Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Tools Menu

-

Tools Menu

-
  Menu Item        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  Preferences...   Open the Preferences dialog (editor settings and project defaults).
-  ---
-  Debug Layout     Checkbox: toggle a debug overlay that shows widget layout boundaries. Useful for diagnosing widget layout issues.
-

Help Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Help Menu

-

Help Menu

-
  Menu Item            Description
-  ---------            -----------
-  About DVX BASIC...   Show the About dialog with version and copyright information.
-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Toolbar

-

Toolbar

-

The toolbar is organized into four groups separated by vertical dividers. Each button has a tooltip showing its name and keyboard shortcut.

-

File Group

-
  Button   Shortcut   Action
-  ------   --------   ------
-  Open     Ctrl+O     Add a file to the project (same as File > Add File).
-  Save     Ctrl+S     Save the active file.
-

Run Group

-
  Button   Shortcut   Action
-  ------   --------   ------
-  Run      F5         Compile and run the program.
-  Stop     Esc        Stop the running program.
-

Debug Group

-
  Button          Shortcut         Action
-  ------          --------         ------
-  Debug           Shift+F5         Start or resume a debug session.
-  Step Into       F8               Step into the next statement.
-  Step Over       Shift+F8         Step over the next statement.
-  Step Out        Ctrl+Shift+F8    Step out of the current procedure.
-  Run to Cursor   Ctrl+F8          Run to the cursor position.
-

View Group

-
  Button   Shortcut   Action
-  ------   --------   ------
-  Code     F7         Switch to Code view.
-  Design   Shift+F7   Switch to Design view.
-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Code Editor

-

Code Editor

-

The Code Editor is the primary editing window for BASIC source code. It occupies the center of the screen, below the toolbar and above the Output and Immediate windows.

-

Object and Function Dropdowns

-

At the top of the Code Editor are two dropdown lists:

- -

Function -- lists all event handlers (procedures) for the selected object. Implemented handlers are listed first (plain text); unimplemented handlers follow in brackets (e.g., [Click]). Selecting an unimplemented event creates a new event handler stub.

-

The editor shows one procedure at a time. Each procedure has its own buffer, and switching between them is instantaneous. The (General) section contains module-level declarations and code.

-

Syntax Highlighting

-

The editor applies real-time syntax coloring as you type. The following categories are highlighted in distinct colors:

-
  Category          Examples
-  --------          --------
-  Keywords          IF, THEN, FOR, NEXT, SUB, FUNCTION, DIM, PRINT, SELECT, CASE, DO, LOOP, WHILE, WEND, END, EXIT, CALL, GOSUB, GOTO, RETURN, DECLARE, CONST, TYPE, AND, OR, NOT, XOR, MOD, etc.
-  Type names        INTEGER, LONG, SINGLE, DOUBLE, STRING, BOOLEAN, BYTE, TRUE, FALSE
-  String literals   "Hello, World!"
-  Comments          ' This is a comment, REM This is a comment
-  Numbers           42, 3.14
-  Operators         =, <, >, +, -, *, /, \, &
-

Editor Features

- -

Line decorations -- breakpoint lines show a red dot in the gutter. The current debug line (when paused) is highlighted with a yellow background.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Form Designer

-

Form Designer

-

The Form Designer provides a visual design surface for editing .frm files. Switch to it with Shift+F7 or the Design toolbar button. It opens in a separate window showing a WYSIWYG preview of the form.

-

Design Surface

- -

Delete key -- removes the selected control from the form.

-

Form Properties

-

Forms have the following design-time properties: Name, Caption, Width, Height, Left, Top, Layout (VBox or HBox), Centered, AutoSize, and Resizable.

-

Properties Panel

-

Toolbox

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Project System

-

Project System

-

Project Files (.dbp)

-

A DVX BASIC project is stored as a .dbp file (DVX BASIC Project). The project file records:

- -

File list -- relative paths (8.3 DOS names) of all .bas and .frm files in the project. Each entry tracks whether it is a form file.

-

Source Map

-

When the project is compiled, all files are concatenated into a single source stream. A source map tracks which lines belong to which file, enabling accurate error reporting and debugger navigation across multiple files. For .frm files, an injected BEGINFORM directive is prepended to the code section.

-

Project Operations

-
  Operation             Description
-  ---------             -----------
-  New Project           Creates a blank project with a name and directory. A default .frm file is added automatically.
-  Open Project          Opens a .dbp file and loads all referenced files into memory.
-  Save Project          Writes the .dbp file to disk.
-  Close Project         Closes the project, prompting to save unsaved changes.
-  Add File              Adds a .bas or .frm file to the project. Opening a file without a project auto-creates an implicit project.
-  Remove File           Removes a file from the project (prompts to save if modified).
-  Project Properties    Opens a dialog for editing project metadata (name, author, company, version, copyright, description, icon, startup form).
-

Project Explorer

-

The Project Explorer is a tree view window listing all project files. Double-click a file to open it: .bas files open in Code view, .frm files open in Design view. The selected file in the Project Explorer determines the target for View > Code and View > Designer commands.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Properties Panel

-

Properties Panel

-

The Properties panel (Window > Properties) has two sections:

- -

Property list -- a two-column ListView below the tree showing property names and values for the selected control. Double-click a property value to edit it via an InputBox dialog. Changes take effect immediately in the designer preview.

-

Each control type exposes different properties (e.g., Caption, Text, Width, Height, MaxWidth, MaxHeight, Weight, Alignment, Enabled, Visible, and type-specific properties like DataSource and DataField for data-bound controls).

-

Form Designer

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Toolbox

-

Toolbox

-

The Toolbox (Window > Toolbox) is a floating palette of buttons, one for each available control type. Controls are loaded dynamically from the widget plugin registry -- any widget DXE that provides a basName appears in the toolbox.

-

Click a tool to select it (the active tool name is stored in the designer state), then click on the form to place a new instance. Click the same tool again to deselect it and return to pointer mode.

-

Available Controls

-
  VB Name         Description
-  -------         -----------
-  CommandButton   Push button that triggers a Click event.
-  Label           Static text label.
-  TextBox         Single-line text input field.
-  TextArea        Multi-line text editor.
-  CheckBox        On/off checkbox.
-  OptionButton    Radio button (mutually exclusive within a group).
-  ListBox         Scrollable list of items.
-  ComboBox        Drop-down combo box.
-  DropDown        Simple drop-down list.
-  PictureBox      Canvas for drawing and images.
-  Image           Static image display.
-  ImageButton     Clickable image button.
-  Frame           Grouping container with a labeled border.
-  VBox            Vertical layout container.
-  HBox            Horizontal layout container.
-  WrapBox         Flow layout container that wraps items to the next row.
-  Splitter        Resizable split between two child panes.
-  ScrollPane      Scrollable container for large content.
-  TabStrip        Tabbed container with multiple pages.
-  ListView        Multi-column list with headers.
-  TreeView        Hierarchical tree control.
-  ProgressBar     Progress indicator bar.
-  HScrollBar      Horizontal slider/scrollbar.
-  SpinButton      Numeric up/down spinner.
-  Line            Horizontal or vertical separator line.
-  Spacer          Invisible spacing element for layout.
-  Timer           Non-visual timer that fires periodic events.
-  Toolbar         Toolbar container for buttons.
-  StatusBar       Status bar at the bottom of a form.
-  Terminal        ANSI terminal emulator control.
-  Data            Data control for binding to a database.
-  DBGrid          Data-bound grid for displaying database query results.
-

Form Designer

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Debugger

-

Debugger

-

The DVX BASIC IDE includes a full interactive debugger. The debugger operates as a state machine with three states:

-
  State          Description
-  -----          -----------
-  DBG_IDLE       No program loaded or running.
-  DBG_RUNNING    Program is executing (VM running in slices).
-  DBG_PAUSED     Execution is paused at a breakpoint or step point. The IDE GUI is fully interactive.
-

Starting a Debug Session

- -

F5 (Run) -- compiles and runs without the debugger. No breakpoints are active. If already paused, resumes execution with debugging disabled.

-

Breakpoints

-

Setting Breakpoints

- -

Click in the line number gutter to toggle a breakpoint on that line.

-

Breakpoint Validation

-

Not every line can have a breakpoint. The IDE validates the line content and silently refuses to set breakpoints on:

- -

END SUB and END FUNCTION lines

-

Breakpoint Storage

-

Each breakpoint records the project file index, the code line number within the file, the procedure index, and the procedure name (as Object.Event). When the project is compiled, breakpoints are converted to concatenated source line numbers that match the VM's OP_LINE opcodes.

-

Visual Indicators

- -

The current debug line (when paused) has a yellow background.

-

Breakpoint Adjustment on Edit

-

When lines are added or removed in the editor, breakpoints below the edit point are automatically shifted to stay on the correct line.

-

Stepping

-
  Action          Shortcut         Behavior
-  ------          --------         --------
-  Step Into       F8               Execute one statement. If the statement is a SUB/FUNCTION call, step into it.
-  Step Over       Shift+F8         Execute one statement. If the statement is a SUB/FUNCTION call, execute the entire call and break at the next line in the current scope.
-  Step Out        Ctrl+Shift+F8    Run until the current SUB/FUNCTION returns to its caller.
-  Run to Cursor   Ctrl+F8          Run until execution reaches the line under the cursor.
-

The Debug Run Loop

-

When a program is running in debug mode, the IDE enters a cooperative loop:

- -

When the user resumes (F5/Shift+F5/F8/etc.), the state transitions back to DBG_RUNNING and the loop continues.

-

Stopping

-

Press Esc or click the Stop toolbar button at any time to halt execution. The VM is destroyed, debug state resets to DBG_IDLE, and the IDE restores the designer windows that were hidden at run start.

-

Locals Window

-

Call Stack Window

-

Watch Window

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Locals Window

-

Locals Window

-

When the debugger pauses, the Locals and Call Stack windows are auto-opened (if not already visible). The Watch and Breakpoints windows can be opened manually from the Window menu.

-

Shows variables for the current execution scope. Displayed as a three-column ListView:

-
  Column   Content
-  ------   -------
-  Name     Variable name (internal mangled names like static variable placeholders are filtered out).
-  Type     Data type: Integer, Long, Single, Double, String, Boolean, Array, UDT. Array types show the element type (e.g., Integer()).
-  Value    Current value. Strings are shown in quotes. Booleans as True/False. Arrays show bounds and element count (e.g., Integer(0 To 9) [10]). Uninitialized arrays show (uninitialized).
-

The Locals window displays:

- -

Form-scoped variables for the current form (if the program is executing within a form context).

-

Up to 64 variables are displayed. The window is resizable.

-

Call Stack Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Call Stack Window

-

Call Stack Window

-

Shows the current call chain as a two-column ListView:

-
  Column      Content
-  ------      -------
-  Procedure   Procedure name (or (module) for module-level code).
-  Line        Line number where execution is paused (shown for the topmost frame).
-

The current location is shown first, followed by each caller in the call stack (walking from the deepest frame back to the module entry point). Up to 32 frames are displayed.

-

Watch Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Watch Window

-

Watch Window

-

Allows monitoring arbitrary expressions while debugging. The window has a text input at the top and a two-column ListView below:

-
  Column       Content
-  ------       -------
-  Expression   The watch expression text.
-  Value        Evaluated result (or <error> if evaluation fails). Blank when not paused.
-

Adding Watch Expressions

-

Type an expression in the text input and press Enter. Up to 16 watch expressions can be active at once.

-

Watch Expression Syntax

-

Watch expressions support:

- -

Arbitrary BASIC expressions (compiled and evaluated against the paused VM's state): x + y * 2, Len(name$)

-

Editing and Deleting

- -

Press Delete to remove the selected watch expression.

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Breakpoints Window

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Lists all set breakpoints as a three-column ListView:

-
  Column      Content
-  ------      -------
-  File        Project file path.
-  Procedure   Procedure name (Object.Event format, or (General)).
-  Line        Code line number within the file.
- -

Press Delete to remove selected breakpoints (multi-select is supported).

-

Debugger

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Immediate Window

-

Immediate Window

-

The Immediate window is an interactive REPL at the bottom-right of the screen. Type a line of BASIC and press Enter to evaluate it. Results appear inline below your input.

-

Expression Evaluation

-

If the input is not a recognized statement keyword, it is automatically wrapped in a PRINT statement. For example, typing 2 + 2 evaluates as PRINT 2 + 2 and displays 4.

-

You can also type full statements:

- -

LET x = 42 -- explicit assignment (see below).

-

Parse or runtime errors are displayed inline with an Error: prefix.

-

Inspecting Variables While Paused

-

When the debugger is paused at a breakpoint, the Immediate window has access to the running VM's state. Global variable values are copied into the evaluation VM, so expressions like count or name$ & " test" display live values.

-

Assigning Variables While Paused

-

When paused, you can modify variables in the running program directly from the Immediate window using assignment syntax:

-
variableName = newValue
-

The optional LET keyword is also accepted:

-
LET variableName = newValue
-

Assignment works for:

- -

Combined -- items(0).price = 9.99

-

The new value is written directly into the VM's live variable slot (local, global, or form scope). A confirmation message is displayed, and the Locals and Watch windows update automatically to reflect the change.

-

If the assignment target cannot be resolved (unknown variable, out-of-bounds index, wrong type), an error message is displayed.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Output Window

-

Output Window

-

The Output window is a read-only TextArea at the bottom-left of the screen. It displays:

- -

Compile errors -- if compilation fails, the error message and location are shown.

-

The output buffer holds up to 32,768 characters. Use Run > Clear Output to clear it.

-

INPUT statements prompt the user via a modal InputBox dialog; the prompt text is also echoed to the Output window.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Find / Replace

-

Find / Replace

-

Open with Ctrl+F (Find) or Ctrl+H (Replace). The Find/Replace dialog is modeless -- it stays open while you continue editing.

-

Dialog Controls

-
  Control                    Description
-  -------                    -----------
-  Find input                 The text to search for.
-  Replace checkbox + input   Enable replacement mode and enter replacement text.
-  Scope                      Radio group: Function, Object, File, or Project. Default is Project.
-  Direction                  Radio group: Forward or Backward.
-  Match Case                 Checkbox: case-sensitive search.
-

Buttons

-
  Button        Action
-  ------        ------
-  Find Next     Find the next occurrence. Wraps across procedures, files, and the entire project depending on the scope setting.
-  Replace       Replace the current match and find the next one.
-  Replace All   Replace all occurrences within the selected scope.
-  Close         Close the dialog.
-

Keyboard Shortcut

-

F3 repeats the last search (Find Next) without opening the dialog.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Preferences

-

Preferences

-

Open via Tools > Preferences. Settings are saved to dvxbasic.ini in the app's config directory.

-

Editor Section

-
  Setting                                      Description                                                                               Default
-  -------                                      -----------                                                                               -------
-  Skip comments/strings when renaming          When renaming a control or form, skip occurrences inside comments and string literals.     On
-  Require variable declaration (OPTION EXPLICIT)   When enabled, variables must be declared with DIM before use.                          Off
-  Tab width                                    Number of spaces per tab stop (1-8).                                                      3
-  Insert spaces instead of tabs                When enabled, pressing Tab inserts spaces. When disabled, inserts a real tab character.     On
-

New Project Defaults Section

-

These fields set the default values for new project metadata:

-
  Field         Description                              Default
-  -----         -----------                              -------
-  Author        Default author name.                     (empty)
-  Company       Default company name.                    (empty)
-  Version       Default version string.                  1.0
-  Copyright     Default copyright notice.                (empty)
-  Description   Default project description (multi-line).   (empty)
-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-
  Shortcut         Action
-  --------         ------
-  Ctrl+O           Add File
-  Ctrl+S           Save File
-  Ctrl+A           Select All
-  Ctrl+X           Cut
-  Ctrl+C           Copy
-  Ctrl+V           Paste
-  Ctrl+F           Find
-  Ctrl+H           Replace
-  Ctrl+E           Menu Editor
-  F3               Find Next
-  F5               Run
-  Shift+F5         Debug
-  Ctrl+F5          Run Without Recompile
-  Esc              Stop
-  F7               Code View
-  Shift+F7         Design View
-  F8               Step Into
-  Shift+F8         Step Over
-  Ctrl+Shift+F8    Step Out
-  Ctrl+F8          Run to Cursor
-  F9               Toggle Breakpoint
-  Del              Delete
-
-

DVX BASIC 1.0 -- Copyright 2026 Scott Duensing

-
-
-

Data Types

-

Data Types

-

DVX BASIC supports the following data types. Each type has a corresponding type suffix character that can be appended to variable names.

-

Primary Types

-
  Type       Size       Suffix   Range / Description
-  ----       ----       ------   -------------------
-  Integer    2 bytes    %        -32768 to 32767
-  Long       4 bytes    &        -2147483648 to 2147483647
-  Single     4 bytes    !        32-bit float, approximately 7 digits precision
-  Double     8 bytes    #        64-bit float, approximately 15 digits precision
-  String     variable   $        Variable-length, reference-counted, dynamic string
-  Boolean    2 bytes    (none)   True (-1) or False (0)
-

Internal Types

-

These types are not directly declarable but are used internally by the runtime.

-
  Internal Type   Description
-  -------------   -----------
-  Array           Reference-counted multi-dimensional array (up to 8 dimensions)
-  UDT             User-defined type instance (created with TYPE...END TYPE)
-  Object          Opaque host object (form reference, control reference)
-  Ref             ByRef pointer to a variable slot (used for ByRef parameters)
-

Type Suffixes

-

Type suffixes can be appended to variable names to declare their type implicitly:

-
count%  = 42         ' Integer
-total&  = 100000     ' Long
-rate!   = 3.14       ' Single
-pi#     = 3.14159265 ' Double
-name$   = "Hello"    ' String
-

Numeric Literals

-
  Form               Example          Description
-  ----               -------          -----------
-  Decimal integer    42               Values -32768..32767 are Integer; larger are Long
-  Hex integer        &HFF             Hexadecimal literal
-  Long suffix        42&, &HFF&       Force Long type
-  Floating-point     3.14, 1.5E10     Double by default
-  Single suffix      3.14!            Force Single type
-  Double suffix      3.14#            Force Double type
-

Type Promotion

-

When mixing types in expressions, values are automatically promoted to a common type: Integer -> Long -> Single -> Double. Strings are not automatically converted to numbers (use VAL and STR$).

-

See also: Conversion Functions

-
-
-

Operators

-

Operators

-

Operators listed from highest precedence (evaluated first) to lowest precedence (evaluated last).

-
  Precedence     Operator                  Description
-  ----------     --------                  -----------
-  1 (highest)    ^                         Exponentiation
-  2              - (unary)                 Negation
-  3              *  /  \  MOD              Multiply, float div, integer div, modulus
-  4              +  -                      Addition, subtraction
-  5              &                         String concatenation
-  6              =  <>  <  >  <=  >=       Comparison (returns Boolean)
-  7              NOT                       Logical/bitwise NOT
-  8              AND                       Logical/bitwise AND
-  9              XOR                       Logical/bitwise XOR
-  10             OR                        Logical/bitwise OR
-  11             EQV                       Logical/bitwise equivalence
-  12 (lowest)    IMP                       Logical/bitwise implication
-

String Concatenation

-

Use & to concatenate strings. The + operator also concatenates when both operands are strings.

-
result$ = "Hello" & " " & "World"
-result$ = firstName$ & " " & lastName$
-
-
-

Statements Overview

-

Statements

-

Multiple statements can appear on one line separated by :. Lines can be continued with _ at the end. Comments start with ' or REM.

-

Declaration Statements (DIM, REDIM, CONST, TYPE)

-

Conditional Statements (IF, SELECT CASE)

-

Loop Statements (FOR, DO, WHILE)

-

Procedures (SUB, FUNCTION, DEF FN)

-

Flow Control (EXIT, CALL, GOTO, GOSUB, ON)

-

Input/Output (PRINT, INPUT, DATA/READ)

-

Miscellaneous Statements

-
-
-

Declaration Statements

-

Declaration Statements

-

DIM

-

Declares variables and arrays with an explicit type.

-
DIM variable AS type
-DIM variable(upperBound) AS type
-DIM variable(lower TO upper) AS type
-DIM variable(dim1, dim2, ...) AS type
-DIM variable AS UdtName
-DIM variable AS STRING * n
-DIM SHARED variable AS type
-

Examples:

-
Dim name As String
-Dim count As Integer
-Dim values(100) As Double
-Dim matrix(1 To 10, 1 To 10) As Single
-Dim Shared globalFlag As Boolean
-Dim record As PersonType
-Dim fixedStr As String * 20
-
Note: DIM SHARED makes a variable accessible from all procedures without passing it as a parameter.
-

REDIM

-

Reallocates a dynamic array, optionally preserving existing data.

-
REDIM array(newBounds) AS type
-REDIM PRESERVE array(newBounds) AS type
-
ReDim items(newSize) As String
-ReDim Preserve scores(1 To newCount) As Integer
-

CONST

-

Declares a named constant. The value must be a literal (integer, float, string, or boolean).

-
CONST name = value
-
Const MAX_SIZE = 100
-Const PI = 3.14159265
-Const APP_NAME = "DVX App"
-Const DEBUG_MODE = True
-

TYPE...END TYPE

-

Defines a user-defined type (record/structure).

-
TYPE TypeName
-    fieldName AS type
-    ...
-END TYPE
-
Type PersonType
-    firstName As String
-    lastName  As String
-    age       As Integer
-End Type
-
-Dim p As PersonType
-p.firstName = "Scott"
-p.age = 30
-

UDT fields can themselves be UDTs (nested types).

-

DECLARE

-

Forward-declares a SUB or FUNCTION. Required when a procedure is called before it is defined.

-
DECLARE SUB name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...)
-DECLARE FUNCTION name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...) AS returnType
-

DECLARE LIBRARY

-

Declares external native functions from a dynamically loaded library. This allows BASIC programs to call functions exported by DXE libraries.

-
DECLARE LIBRARY "libraryName"
-    DECLARE SUB name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...)
-    DECLARE FUNCTION name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...) AS returnType
-END DECLARE
-
Declare Library "rs232"
-    Declare Function ComOpen(ByVal port As Integer) As Integer
-    Declare Sub ComClose(ByVal port As Integer)
-    Declare Sub ComSend(ByVal port As Integer, ByVal data$ As String)
-End Declare
-

STATIC

-

Declares a local variable that retains its value between calls.

-
STATIC variable AS type
-
Sub Counter()
-    Static count As Integer
-    count = count + 1
-    Print count
-End Sub
-

OPTION

-

Sets compiler options. Must appear before any executable code.

-
OPTION BASE 0          ' Arrays start at index 0 (default)
-OPTION BASE 1          ' Arrays start at index 1
-OPTION COMPARE BINARY  ' Case-sensitive string comparisons (default)
-OPTION COMPARE TEXT    ' Case-insensitive string comparisons
-OPTION EXPLICIT        ' All variables must be declared with DIM
-

DEFtype Statements

-

Set the default type for variables based on their first letter.

-
DEFINT letterRange
-DEFLNG letterRange
-DEFSNG letterRange
-DEFDBL letterRange
-DEFSTR letterRange
-
DefInt I-N     ' Variables starting with I through N default to Integer
-DefStr S       ' Variables starting with S default to String
-

Assignment

-

Assigns a value to a variable, array element, or UDT field.

-
variable = expression
-array(index) = expression
-udt.field = expression
-LET variable = expression
-

The LET keyword is optional and supported for compatibility.

-

SWAP

-

Exchanges the values of two variables.

-
SWAP variable1, variable2
-
Swap a, b
-

ERASE

-

Frees the memory of an array and resets it.

-
ERASE arrayName
-
-
-

Conditional Statements

-

Conditional Statements

-

IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF

-

Conditional execution. Supports single-line and multi-line forms.

-

Single-line form

-
IF condition THEN statement
-IF condition THEN statement ELSE statement
-

Multi-line form

-
IF condition THEN
-    statements
-ELSEIF condition THEN
-    statements
-ELSE
-    statements
-END IF
-
If x > 10 Then
-    Print "Large"
-ElseIf x > 5 Then
-    Print "Medium"
-Else
-    Print "Small"
-End If
-
-If ready Then Print "Go!"
-

SELECT CASE

-

Multi-way branch based on an expression value.

-
SELECT CASE expression
-    CASE value
-        statements
-    CASE value1, value2
-        statements
-    CASE low TO high
-        statements
-    CASE IS operator value
-        statements
-    CASE ELSE
-        statements
-END SELECT
-
Select Case grade
-    Case 90 To 100
-        Print "A"
-    Case 80 To 89
-        Print "B"
-    Case Is >= 70
-        Print "C"
-    Case 60, 65
-        Print "D (borderline)"
-    Case Else
-        Print "F"
-End Select
-

CASE items can be combined with commas. The IS keyword allows comparison operators: <, >, <=, >=, =, <>.

-
-
-

Loop Statements

-

Loop Statements

-

FOR...NEXT

-

Counted loop with an optional step value.

-
FOR variable = start TO limit [STEP step]
-    statements
-NEXT [variable]
-
For i = 1 To 10
-    Print i
-Next i
-
-For x = 10 To 0 Step -2
-    Print x
-Next
-

The variable name after NEXT is optional. Use EXIT FOR to break out early.

-

DO...LOOP

-

General-purpose loop with pre-test, post-test, or infinite forms.

-
DO [WHILE condition | UNTIL condition]
-    statements
-LOOP [WHILE condition | UNTIL condition]
-
' Pre-test
-Do While count < 10
-    count = count + 1
-Loop
-
-' Post-test
-Do
-    line$ = ReadLine()
-Loop Until line$ = "quit"
-
-' Infinite loop (exit with EXIT DO)
-Do
-    DoEvents
-    If done Then Exit Do
-Loop
-

WHILE...WEND

-

Simple pre-test loop (legacy form; prefer DO...LOOP).

-
WHILE condition
-    statements
-WEND
-
While Not EOF(1)
-    Line Input #1, line$
-    Print line$
-Wend
-
-
-

Procedures

-

Procedures

-

SUB...END SUB

-

Defines a subroutine (no return value).

-
SUB name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...)
-    statements
-END SUB
-
Sub Greet(ByVal name As String)
-    Print "Hello, " & name
-End Sub
-

Parameters are passed ByRef by default. Use ByVal for value semantics. Use EXIT SUB to return early.

-

FUNCTION...END FUNCTION

-

Defines a function with a return value.

-
FUNCTION name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...) AS returnType
-    statements
-    name = returnValue
-END FUNCTION
-
Function Square(ByVal n As Double) As Double
-    Square = n * n
-End Function
-

Assign to the function name to set the return value. Use EXIT FUNCTION to return early.

-

DEF FN

-

Defines a single-expression function.

-
DEF FNname(params) = expression
-
Def FnSquare(x) = x * x
-Print FnSquare(5)     ' prints 25
-
-
-

Flow Control

-

Flow Control

-

EXIT

-

Exits the current block early.

-
EXIT FOR
-EXIT DO
-EXIT SUB
-EXIT FUNCTION
-

CALL

-

Explicitly calls a subroutine or function. The return value (if any) is discarded.

-
CALL name
-CALL name(args)
-

Normally you can omit CALL and just use the name directly.

-

GOTO / GOSUB / RETURN

-
GOTO label
-GOSUB label
-RETURN
-

GOSUB pushes the return address, executes code at the label, and RETURN jumps back. At module level, RETURN returns from a GOSUB. Inside a SUB/FUNCTION, RETURN returns from the procedure.

-
GoSub Initialize
-Print "Done"
-End
-
-Initialize:
-    count = 0
-    name$ = ""
-Return
-

ON...GOTO / ON...GOSUB

-

Computed branch based on an integer expression.

-
ON expression GOTO label1, label2, ...
-ON expression GOSUB label1, label2, ...
-

If the expression evaluates to 1, control goes to the first label; 2, the second; and so on. If out of range, execution falls through.

-
-
-

Input/Output Statements

-

Input/Output Statements

-

PRINT

-

Outputs text to the console or to a file channel.

-
PRINT [expression] [{; | ,} expression] ...
-PRINT #channel, expression
-PRINT USING format$; expression [; expression] ...
- -

? is an alias for PRINT

-

Special functions inside PRINT:

- -

TAB(n) -- advance to column n

-
Print "Name:"; Tab(20); name$
-Print Using "###.##"; total
-Print #1, "Written to file"
-

INPUT

-

Reads a line of text from the user or from a file channel.

-
INPUT variable
-INPUT "prompt"; variable
-INPUT #channel, variable
-
Input "Enter your name: "; name$
-Input #1, line$
-

DATA / READ / RESTORE

-

Inline data pool for constants.

-
DATA value1, value2, "string", ...
-READ variable1, variable2, ...
-RESTORE
-

DATA statements define a pool of values. READ reads the next value from the pool into a variable. RESTORE resets the read pointer to the beginning.

-
Data 10, 20, 30, "Hello"
-Read a, b, c, msg$
-Print a; b; c; msg$
-Restore
-
-
-

Miscellaneous Statements

-

Miscellaneous Statements

-

Error Handling

-
ON ERROR GOTO label     ' Enable error handler
-ON ERROR GOTO 0          ' Disable error handler
-RESUME                   ' Retry the statement that caused the error
-RESUME NEXT              ' Continue at the next statement after the error
-ERROR n                  ' Raise a runtime error with error number n
-

The ERR keyword returns the current error number in expressions.

-
On Error GoTo ErrorHandler
-Open "missing.txt" For Input As #1
-Exit Sub
-
-ErrorHandler:
-    Print "Error number:"; Err
-    Resume Next
-

SHELL

-

Executes an operating system command.

-
SHELL "command"
-

When used as a function, returns the exit code of the command.

-
Shell "DIR /B"
-exitCode = Shell("COPY A.TXT B.TXT")
-

SLEEP

-

Pauses execution for a specified number of seconds.

-
SLEEP seconds
-

RANDOMIZE

-

Seeds the random number generator.

-
RANDOMIZE seed
-RANDOMIZE TIMER          ' Seed from system clock
-

END

-

Terminates program execution immediately.

-
END
-
-
-

File I/O

-

File I/O

-

OPEN

-

Opens a file for reading, writing, or appending.

-
OPEN filename$ FOR INPUT AS #channel
-OPEN filename$ FOR OUTPUT AS #channel
-OPEN filename$ FOR APPEND AS #channel
-OPEN filename$ FOR RANDOM AS #channel [LEN = recordSize]
-OPEN filename$ FOR BINARY AS #channel
-
  Mode      Description
-  ----      -----------
-  INPUT     Open for sequential reading. File must exist.
-  OUTPUT    Open for sequential writing. Creates or truncates.
-  APPEND    Open for sequential writing at end of file.
-  RANDOM    Open for random-access record I/O.
-  BINARY    Open for raw binary I/O.
-

CLOSE

-

Closes an open file channel.

-
CLOSE #channel
-

PRINT #

-

Writes text to a file.

-
PRINT #channel, expression
-

INPUT #

-

Reads comma-delimited data from a file.

-
INPUT #channel, variable
-

LINE INPUT #

-

Reads an entire line from a file into a string variable.

-
LINE INPUT #channel, variable$
-

WRITE #

-

Writes comma-delimited data to a file. Strings are enclosed in quotes, numbers are undecorated. Each statement writes a newline at the end.

-
WRITE #channel, expr1, expr2, ...
-
Write #1, "Scott", 42, 3.14
-' Output: "Scott",42,3.14
-

GET / PUT

-

Read and write records in RANDOM or BINARY mode files.

-
GET #channel, [recordNum], variable
-PUT #channel, [recordNum], variable
-

SEEK

-

Sets the file position. As a function, returns the current position.

-
SEEK #channel, position      ' Statement: set position
-pos = SEEK(channel)           ' Function: get current position
-
-
-

String Functions

-

String Functions

-
  Function                          Returns   Description
-  --------                          -------   -----------
-  ASC(s$)                           Integer   ASCII code of first character of s$
-  CHR$(n)                           String    Character with ASCII code n
-  FORMAT$(value, fmt$)              String    Formats a numeric value using format string
-  HEX$(n)                           String    Hexadecimal representation of n
-  INSTR(s$, find$)                  Integer   Position of find$ in s$ (1-based), 0 if not found
-  INSTR(start, s$, find$)          Integer   Search starting at position start
-  LCASE$(s$)                        String    Converts s$ to lowercase
-  LEFT$(s$, n)                      String    Leftmost n characters of s$
-  LEN(s$)                           Integer   Length of s$
-  LTRIM$(s$)                        String    Removes leading spaces from s$
-  MID$(s$, start [, length])        String    Substring from position start (1-based)
-  RIGHT$(s$, n)                     String    Rightmost n characters of s$
-  RTRIM$(s$)                        String    Removes trailing spaces from s$
-  SPACE$(n)                         String    String of n spaces
-  STR$(n)                           String    Converts number n to string
-  STRING$(n, char)                  String    String of n copies of char
-  TRIM$(s$)                         String    Removes leading and trailing spaces from s$
-  UCASE$(s$)                        String    Converts s$ to uppercase
-  VAL(s$)                           Double    Converts string s$ to a numeric value
-

MID$ Assignment

-

MID$ can also be used on the left side of an assignment to replace a portion of a string:

-
Mid$(s$, 3, 2) = "XY"    ' Replace 2 characters starting at position 3
-
-
-

Math Functions

-

Math Functions

-
  Function   Returns   Description
-  --------   -------   -----------
-  ABS(n)     Double    Absolute value of n
-  ATN(n)     Double    Arctangent of n (in radians)
-  COS(n)     Double    Cosine of n (radians)
-  EXP(n)     Double    e raised to the power n
-  FIX(n)     Integer   Truncates n toward zero (removes fractional part)
-  INT(n)     Integer   Largest integer less than or equal to n (floor)
-  LOG(n)     Double    Natural logarithm (base e) of n
-  RND[(n)]   Double    Random number between 0 (inclusive) and 1 (exclusive)
-  SGN(n)     Integer   Sign of n: -1, 0, or 1
-  SIN(n)     Double    Sine of n (radians)
-  SQR(n)     Double    Square root of n
-  TAN(n)     Double    Tangent of n (radians)
-  TIMER      Double    Number of seconds since midnight
-
Note: RND with a negative argument seeds and returns. RND(0) returns the previous value. Use RANDOMIZE to seed the generator.
-
-
-

Conversion Functions

-

Conversion Functions

-
  Function   Returns   Description
-  --------   -------   -----------
-  CDBL(n)    Double    Converts n to Double
-  CINT(n)    Integer   Converts n to Integer (with banker's rounding)
-  CLNG(n)    Long      Converts n to Long
-  CSNG(n)    Single    Converts n to Single
-  CSTR(n)    String    Converts n to its String representation
-
-
-

File I/O Functions

-

File I/O Functions

-
  Function                    Returns   Description
-  --------                    -------   -----------
-  EOF(channel)                Boolean   True if file pointer is at end of file
-  FREEFILE                    Integer   Next available file channel number
-  INPUT$(n, #channel)         String    Reads n characters from the file
-  LOC(channel)                Long      Current read/write position in the file
-  LOF(channel)                Long      Length of the file in bytes
-  SEEK(channel)               Long      Current file position (function form)
-  LBOUND(array [, dim])       Integer   Lower bound of an array dimension
-  UBOUND(array [, dim])       Integer   Upper bound of an array dimension
-
-
-

Miscellaneous Functions

-

Miscellaneous Functions

-
  Function          Returns   Description
-  --------          -------   -----------
-  DATE$             String    Current date as "MM-DD-YYYY"
-  TIME$             String    Current time as "HH:MM:SS"
-  ENVIRON$(name$)   String    Value of environment variable name$
-  ERR               Integer   Current runtime error number (0 if no error)
-
-
-

Form and Control Statements

-

Form and Control Statements

-

DVX BASIC supports Visual Basic-style forms and controls for building graphical user interfaces. Forms are defined in .frm files and loaded at runtime.

-

Loading and Unloading Forms

-
LOAD FormName
-UNLOAD FormName
-

LOAD creates the form and its controls in memory. UNLOAD destroys the form and frees its resources.

-

Showing and Hiding Forms

-
FormName.Show [modal]
-FormName.Hide
-Me.Show [modal]
-Me.Hide
-

Pass vbModal (1) to Show for a modal dialog.

-
Form2.Show vbModal
-Me.Hide
-

Property Access

-

Read and write control properties using dot notation:

-
ControlName.Property = value
-value = ControlName.Property
-
Text1.Text = "Hello"
-label1.Caption = "Name: " & name$
-x = Text1.Left
-

Method Calls

-
ControlName.Method [args]
-
List1.AddItem "New entry"
-List1.Clear
-

Me Keyword

-

Me refers to the current form. Use it to access the form's own properties, controls, and methods from within event handlers.

-
Me.Caption = "Updated Title"
-Me.Text1.Text = ""
-Me.Hide
-

Control Arrays

-

Multiple controls can share a name with unique indices. Access individual controls with parenthesized indices:

-
Option1(0).Value = True
-Label1(idx).Caption = "Item " & Str$(idx)
-Me.Label1(i).Visible = True
-

DoEvents

-

Yields control to the DVX event loop, allowing the GUI to process pending events. Call this in long-running loops to keep the UI responsive.

-
DOEVENTS
-
For i = 1 To 10000
-    ' process data
-    If i Mod 100 = 0 Then DoEvents
-Next
-

MsgBox

-

Displays a message box dialog. Can be used as a statement (discards result) or as a function (returns the button clicked).

-
MSGBOX message$ [, flags]
-result = MSGBOX(message$ [, flags])
-
MsgBox "Operation complete"
-answer = MsgBox("Continue?", vbYesNo + vbQuestion)
-If answer = vbYes Then
-    ' proceed
-End If
-

InputBox$

-

Displays an input dialog and returns the user's text entry.

-
result$ = INPUTBOX$(prompt$ [, title$ [, default$]])
-
name$ = InputBox$("Enter your name:", "Name Entry", "")
-

Event Handler Convention

-

Event handlers are named ControlName_EventName and defined as SUBs:

-
Sub Command1_Click()
-    MsgBox "Button clicked!"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Form_Load()
-    Me.Caption = "My App"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Text1_Change()
-    Label1.Caption = "You typed: " & Text1.Text
-End Sub
-

Common Events

-
  Event          Description
-  -----          -----------
-  Click          Control was clicked
-  DblClick       Control was double-clicked
-  Change         Control value/text changed
-  KeyPress       Key was pressed (receives key code)
-  KeyDown        Key went down (receives key code and shift state)
-  KeyUp          Key was released
-  MouseDown      Mouse button pressed
-  MouseUp        Mouse button released
-  MouseMove      Mouse moved over control
-  GotFocus       Control received input focus
-  LostFocus      Control lost input focus
-  Form_Load      Form is being loaded
-  Form_Unload    Form is being unloaded
-  Form_Resize    Form was resized
-  Timer          Timer interval elapsed
-
-
-

SQL Functions

-

SQL Functions

-

DVX BASIC includes built-in SQLite database support through a set of SQL functions. All functions use database handles and result set handles (integers) returned by SQLOpen and SQLQuery.

-

Opening and Closing Databases

-

SQLOpen

-

Opens a SQLite database file and returns a database handle.

-
db = SQLOPEN(path$)
-
db = SQLOpen(App.Data & "\mydata.db")
-

SQLClose

-

Closes an open database.

-
SQLCLOSE db
-

Executing SQL

-

SQLExec

-

Executes a SQL statement that does not return data (INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE TABLE, etc.). Can be used as a statement or as a function returning a Boolean success flag.

-
SQLEXEC db, sql$
-ok = SQLEXEC(db, sql$)
-
SQLExec db, "CREATE TABLE users (id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, name TEXT)"
-SQLExec db, "INSERT INTO users (name) VALUES ('Scott')"
-ok = SQLExec(db, "DELETE FROM users WHERE id = 5")
-

SQLAffected

-

Returns the number of rows affected by the last INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE.

-
count = SQLAFFECTED(db)
-

Querying Data

-

SQLQuery

-

Executes a SELECT query and returns a result set handle.

-
rs = SQLQUERY(db, sql$)
-
rs = SQLQuery(db, "SELECT id, name FROM users ORDER BY name")
-

SQLNext

-

Advances to the next row in the result set. Can be used as a statement or as a function returning True if a row is available.

-
SQLNEXT rs
-hasRow = SQLNEXT(rs)
-

SQLEof

-

Returns True if there are no more rows in the result set.

-
done = SQLEOF(rs)
-

Reading Fields

-

SQLField$

-

Returns a field value as a string. The field can be specified by column index (0-based) or by column name.

-
value$ = SQLFIELD$(rs, columnIndex)
-value$ = SQLFIELD$(rs, "columnName")
-
name$ = SQLField$(rs, "name")
-first$ = SQLField$(rs, 0)
-

SQLFieldInt

-

Returns a field value as an integer.

-
value = SQLFIELDINT(rs, columnIndex)
-

SQLFieldDbl

-

Returns a field value as a double.

-
value# = SQLFIELDDBL(rs, columnIndex)
-

SQLFieldCount

-

Returns the number of columns in the result set.

-
count = SQLFIELDCOUNT(rs)
-

Result Set Cleanup

-

SQLFreeResult

-

Frees a result set. Always call this when done iterating a query.

-
SQLFREERESULT rs
-

Error Information

-

SQLError$

-

Returns the last error message for the database.

-
msg$ = SQLERROR$(db)
-

Complete SQL Example

-
Dim db As Long
-Dim rs As Long
-
-db = SQLOpen(App.Data & "\contacts.db")
-SQLExec db, "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS contacts (name TEXT, phone TEXT)"
-SQLExec db, "INSERT INTO contacts VALUES ('Alice', '555-1234')"
-
-rs = SQLQuery(db, "SELECT name, phone FROM contacts")
-Do While Not SQLEof(rs)
-    SQLNext rs
-    Print SQLField$(rs, "name"); Tab(20); SQLField$(rs, "phone")
-Loop
-SQLFreeResult rs
-SQLClose db
-
-
-

App Object

-

App Object

-

The App object provides read-only properties for the application's directory paths.

-
  Property      Returns   Description
-  --------      -------   -----------
-  App.Path      String    Directory containing the application's executable
-  App.Config    String    Directory for application configuration files
-  App.Data      String    Directory for application data files (databases, etc.)
-
configFile$ = App.Config & "\settings.ini"
-dbPath$ = App.Data & "\myapp.db"
-Print "Running from: " & App.Path
-
-
-

INI Functions

-

INI Functions

-

DVX BASIC provides built-in functions for reading and writing standard INI configuration files.

-

IniRead

-

Reads a value from an INI file. Returns the default value if the key is not found.

-
value$ = INIREAD(file$, section$, key$, default$)
-
name$ = IniRead(App.Config & "\app.ini", "User", "Name", "Unknown")
-fontSize = Val(IniRead(App.Config & "\app.ini", "Display", "FontSize", "12"))
-

IniWrite

-

Writes a value to an INI file. Creates the file, section, or key if they do not exist.

-
INIWRITE file$, section$, key$, value$
-
IniWrite App.Config & "\app.ini", "User", "Name", "Scott"
-IniWrite App.Config & "\app.ini", "Display", "FontSize", Str$(fontSize)
-
-
-

Predefined Constants

-

Predefined Constants

-

The following constants are predefined by the compiler and available in all programs.

-

MsgBox Button Style Flags

-
  Constant        Value   Description
-  --------        -----   -----------
-  vbOKOnly        0       OK button only (default)
-  vbOKCancel      1       OK and Cancel buttons
-  vbYesNo         2       Yes and No buttons
-  vbYesNoCancel   3       Yes, No, and Cancel buttons
-  vbRetryCancel   4       Retry and Cancel buttons
-

MsgBox Icon Flags

-

Add an icon flag to the button style to display an icon in the message box.

-
  Constant        Value   Description
-  --------        -----   -----------
-  vbInformation   &H10    Information icon
-  vbExclamation   &H20    Warning icon
-  vbCritical      &H30    Error/critical icon
-  vbQuestion      &H40    Question mark icon
-

MsgBox Return Values

-
  Constant   Value   Description
-  --------   -----   -----------
-  vbOK       1       User clicked OK
-  vbCancel   2       User clicked Cancel
-  vbYes      3       User clicked Yes
-  vbNo       4       User clicked No
-  vbRetry    5       User clicked Retry
-

Show Mode Flags

-
  Constant   Value   Description
-  --------   -----   -----------
-  vbModal    1       Show form as modal dialog
-

Boolean Constants

-
  Constant   Value   Description
-  --------   -----   -----------
-  True       -1      Boolean true
-  False      0       Boolean false
-
-
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Every control in DVX BASIC inherits a set of common properties, events, and methods. These are handled by the form runtime before dispatching to widget-specific interface descriptors.

-

Common Properties

-
  Property     Type      R/W   Description
-  ----------   -------   ---   -------------------------------------------
-  Name         String    R     The control's name (e.g. "Command1"). Read-only at runtime.
-  Left         Integer   R/W   X position in pixels relative to the parent container.
-  Top          Integer   R/W   Y position in pixels relative to the parent container.
-  Width        Integer   R/W   Current width in pixels. Setting this changes the minimum width constraint.
-  Height       Integer   R/W   Current height in pixels. Setting this changes the minimum height constraint.
-  MinWidth     Integer   R/W   Minimum width for layout. Alias for Width in the setter.
-  MinHeight    Integer   R/W   Minimum height for layout. Alias for Height in the setter.
-  MaxWidth     Integer   R/W   Maximum width cap (0 = no limit, stretch to fill).
-  MaxHeight    Integer   R/W   Maximum height cap (0 = no limit, stretch to fill).
-  Weight       Integer   R/W   Layout weight. 0 = fixed size, >0 = share extra space proportionally.
-  Visible      Boolean   R/W   Whether the control is visible.
-  Enabled      Boolean   R/W   Whether the control accepts user input.
-  BackColor    Long      R/W   Background color as a 32-bit ARGB value.
-  ForeColor    Long      R/W   Foreground (text) color as a 32-bit ARGB value.
-  TabIndex     Integer   R     Accepted for VB compatibility but ignored. DVX has no tab order.
-

Common Events

-

These events are wired on every control loaded from a .frm file. Controls created dynamically at runtime via code only receive Click, DblClick, Change, GotFocus, and LostFocus; the keyboard, mouse, and scroll events below require the control to be defined in the .frm file.

-
  Event       Parameters                                    Description
-  ---------   -------------------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Click       (none)                                        Fires when the control is clicked.
-  DblClick    (none)                                        Fires when the control is double-clicked.
-  Change      (none)                                        Fires when the control's value or text changes.
-  GotFocus    (none)                                        Fires when the control receives keyboard focus.
-  LostFocus   (none)                                        Fires when the control loses keyboard focus.
-  KeyPress    KeyAscii As Integer                           Fires when a printable key is pressed. KeyAscii is the ASCII code.
-  KeyDown     KeyCode As Integer, Shift As Integer          Fires when any key is pressed down. KeyCode is the scan code; Shift indicates modifier keys.
-  KeyUp       KeyCode As Integer, Shift As Integer          Fires when a key is released.
-  MouseDown   Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when a mouse button is pressed over the control.
-  MouseUp     Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when a mouse button is released over the control.
-  MouseMove   Button As Integer, X As Integer, Y As Integer Fires when the mouse moves over the control.
-  Scroll      Delta As Integer                              Fires when the control is scrolled (mouse wheel or scrollbar).
-

Common Methods

-
  Method     Parameters   Description
-  --------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetFocus   (none)       Gives keyboard focus to this control.
-  Refresh    (none)       Forces the control to repaint.
-

Form

-

Data Binding

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

Data Binding

-

Data Binding

-

DVX BASIC provides VB3-style data binding through three properties that can be set on most controls:

-
  Property     Set On        Description
-  ----------   -----------   -------------------------------------------
-  DataSource   Any control   Name of the Data control to bind to (e.g. "Data1").
-  DataField    Any control   Column name from the Data control's recordset to display.
-

How It Works

- -

When a bound control loses focus (LostFocus), its current text is written back to the Data control's record cache, and Update is called automatically to persist changes.

-

Master-Detail Binding

-

For hierarchical data (e.g. orders and order items), use two Data controls:

- -

A detail Data control with its MasterSource set to the master's name, MasterField set to the key column in the master, and DetailField set to the foreign key column in the detail table.

-

When the master record changes, the detail Data control automatically re-queries using the master's current value for filtering. All controls bound to the detail are refreshed.

-

DBGrid Binding

-

Set the DBGrid's DataSource to a Data control name. The grid auto-populates columns from the query results and refreshes whenever the Data control refreshes.

-

Example

-
VERSION DVX 1.00
-Begin Form frmData
-    Caption      = "Data Binding Example"
-    AutoSize     = False
-    Width        = 400
-    Height       = 280
-    Begin Data Data1
-        DatabaseName = "myapp.db"
-        RecordSource = "customers"
-    End
-    Begin Label lblName
-        Caption = "Name:"
-    End
-    Begin TextBox txtName
-        DataSource = "Data1"
-        DataField  = "name"
-    End
-    Begin Label lblEmail
-        Caption = "Email:"
-    End
-    Begin TextBox txtEmail
-        DataSource = "Data1"
-        DataField  = "email"
-    End
-End
-
-Sub Data1_Reposition ()
-    Print "Current record changed"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Data1_Validate (Cancel As Integer)
-    If txtName.Text = "" Then
-        MsgBox "Name cannot be empty!"
-        Cancel = 1
-    End If
-End Sub
-

Data

-

DBGrid

-
-
-

Menu System

-

Menu System

-

Menus are defined in the .frm file using Begin Menu blocks. Each menu item has a name, caption, and nesting level. Menu items fire Click events dispatched as MenuName_Click.

-

FRM Syntax

-
Begin Form Form1
-    Caption = "Menu Demo"
-
-    Begin Menu mnuFile
-        Caption = "&File"
-        Begin Menu mnuOpen
-            Caption = "&Open"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuSave
-            Caption = "&Save"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuSep1
-            Caption = "-"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuExit
-            Caption = "E&xit"
-        End
-    End
-
-    Begin Menu mnuEdit
-        Caption = "&Edit"
-        Begin Menu mnuCopy
-            Caption = "&Copy"
-        End
-        Begin Menu mnuPaste
-            Caption = "&Paste"
-        End
-    End
-End
-

Menu Item Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String    The text displayed. Use & for accelerator key. Set to "-" for a separator.
-  Checked    Boolean   Whether the menu item shows a checkmark.
-  Enabled    Boolean   Whether the menu item is enabled (default True).
-

Nesting

-

Menu items are nested by placing Begin Menu blocks inside other Begin Menu blocks:

- -

Level 2+: submenu items.

-

A level-0 menu that contains children becomes a top-level menu header. A non-level-0 menu that contains children becomes a submenu.

-

Event Dispatch

-

Each clickable menu item (not headers, not separators) receives a unique numeric ID at load time. When clicked, the form's onMenu handler maps the ID to the menu item's name and fires MenuName_Click.

-
Sub mnuOpen_Click ()
-    MsgBox "Open was clicked"
-End Sub
-
-Sub mnuExit_Click ()
-    Unload Form1
-End Sub
-

Form

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

Control Arrays

-

Control Arrays

-

DVX BASIC supports VB-style control arrays. Multiple controls can share the same name, differentiated by an Index property. When an event fires on a control array element, the element's index is passed as the first parameter.

-

Defining Control Arrays in FRM

-
Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button A"
-    Index   = 0
-End
-Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button B"
-    Index   = 1
-End
-Begin CommandButton Command1
-    Caption = "Button C"
-    Index   = 2
-End
-

Event Handler Convention

-

When a control has an Index property (>= 0), the event handler receives Index As Integer as the first parameter, before any event-specific parameters.

-
Sub Command1_Click (Index As Integer)
-    Select Case Index
-        Case 0
-            MsgBox "Button A clicked"
-        Case 1
-            MsgBox "Button B clicked"
-        Case 2
-            MsgBox "Button C clicked"
-    End Select
-End Sub
-

Accessing Array Elements in Code

-

Use the indexed form ControlName(Index) to access a specific element:

-
Command1(0).Caption = "New Text"
-Command1(1).Enabled = False
-
Note: Control array elements share the same event handler Sub. The runtime prepends the Index argument automatically. If you define parameters on the Sub, Index comes first, followed by the event's own parameters (e.g. KeyPress would be Sub Ctrl1_KeyPress (Index As Integer, KeyAscii As Integer)).
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

FRM File Format

-

FRM File Format

-

The .frm file is a text file that describes a form's layout, controls, menus, and code. It follows a format compatible with VB3 .frm files, with DVX-specific extensions.

-

Structure

-
VERSION DVX 1.00
-Begin Form FormName
-    form-level properties...
-
-    Begin Menu mnuFile
-        Caption = "&File"
-        Begin Menu mnuOpen
-            Caption = "&Open"
-        End
-    End
-
-    Begin TypeName ControlName
-        property = value
-        ...
-    End
-
-    Begin Frame Frame1
-        Caption = "Group"
-        Begin TypeName ChildName
-            ...
-        End
-    End
-End
-
-BASIC code follows...
-
-Sub FormName_Load ()
-    ...
-End Sub
-

Rules

- -

Blank lines are ignored in the form section.

-

Common FRM Properties

-
  Property                  Applies To        Description
-  -----------------------   ---------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption                   Form, controls    Display text or window title.
-  Text                      TextBox, ComboBox Initial text content.
-  MinWidth / Width          Controls          Minimum width. Both names are accepted.
-  MinHeight / Height        Controls          Minimum height. Both names are accepted.
-  MaxWidth                  Controls          Maximum width (0 = no cap).
-  MaxHeight                 Controls          Maximum height (0 = no cap).
-  Weight                    Controls          Layout weight for flexible sizing.
-  Left                      Form, controls    X position (used by Form when Centered=False; informational for controls).
-  Top                       Form, controls    Y position.
-  Index                     Controls          Control array index (-1 or absent = not in array).
-  Visible                   Controls          Initial visibility.
-  Enabled                   Controls          Initial enabled state.
-  Layout                    Form              "VBox" or "HBox".
-  AutoSize                  Form              Auto-fit window to content.
-  Resizable                 Form              Allow runtime resizing.
-  Centered                  Form              Center window on screen.
-  DatabaseName              Data              SQLite database file path.
-  RecordSource              Data              Table name or SQL query.
-  DataSource                Bound controls    Name of the Data control.
-  DataField                 Bound controls    Column name in the recordset.
-

Form

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Menu System

-

Control Arrays

-
-
-

CommandButton

-

CommandButton

-

VB Equivalent: CommandButton -- DVX Widget: button | Name Prefix: Command

-

A push button that triggers an action when clicked. Created with wgtButton(parent, text).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type     Description
-  --------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String   The text displayed on the button. Use & for accelerator keys (e.g. "&OK").
-

No additional type-specific properties beyond common properties and Caption.

-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin Form Form1
-    Caption = "Button Demo"
-    Begin CommandButton Command1
-        Caption = "&Click Me!"
-    End
-End
-
-Sub Command1_Click ()
-    MsgBox "Button was clicked!"
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

CheckBox

-

CheckBox

-

VB Equivalent: CheckBox -- DVX Widget: checkbox

-

A toggle control with a label. Checked state is exposed as a Boolean.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String    The text displayed next to the checkbox.
-  Value      Boolean   True if checked, False if unchecked.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin CheckBox Check1
-    Caption = "Enable feature"
-End
-
-Sub Check1_Click ()
-    If Check1.Value Then
-        Label1.Caption = "Feature ON"
-    Else
-        Label1.Caption = "Feature OFF"
-    End If
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ComboBox

-

ComboBox

-

VB Equivalent: ComboBox -- DVX Widget: combobox (editable text field + drop-down list, max 256 chars)

-

A combination of a text input and a drop-down list. The user can type text or select from the list. Supports the same AddItem/RemoveItem/Clear/List methods as ListBox.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Text        String    The text in the editable field.
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected list item (-1 = none).
-  ListCount   Integer   Number of items in the drop-down list (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-

Same as ListBox: AddItem, RemoveItem, Clear, List.

-

See ListBox for details

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Data

-

Data

-

VB Equivalent: Data -- DVX Widget: data (database record navigator)

-

A data access control that connects to a SQLite database and provides record navigation. Other controls can bind to a Data control via their DataSource and DataField properties.

-

See Data Binding for details

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property       Type      R/W   Description
-  ------------   -------   ---   -------------------------------------------
-  DatabaseName   String    R/W   Path to the SQLite database file.
-  RecordSource   String    R/W   Table name or SQL SELECT query for the recordset.
-  KeyColumn      String    R/W   Primary key column name (used for UPDATE/DELETE operations).
-  Caption        String    R/W   Text displayed on the navigator bar.
-  BOF            Boolean   R     True if the current position is before the first record (read-only).
-  EOF            Boolean   R     True if the current position is past the last record (read-only).
-  MasterSource   String    R/W   Name of a master Data control (for master-detail binding).
-  MasterField    String    R/W   Column in the master recordset to filter by.
-  DetailField    String    R/W   Column in this recordset that matches the master field.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method         Parameters   Description
-  ------------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  MoveFirst      (none)       Navigate to the first record.
-  MoveLast       (none)       Navigate to the last record.
-  MoveNext       (none)       Navigate to the next record.
-  MovePrevious   (none)       Navigate to the previous record.
-  AddNew         (none)       Add a new blank record.
-  Delete         (none)       Delete the current record.
-  Refresh        (none)       Re-query the database and reload records.
-  Update         (none)       Write pending changes to the database.
-

Type-Specific Events

-
  Event        Parameters          Description
-  ----------   -----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Reposition   (none)              Fires after the current record changes (navigation). This is the default event.
-  Validate     Cancel As Integer   Fires before writing a record. Set Cancel = 1 to abort.
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Data Binding

-

DBGrid

-
-
-

DBGrid

-

DBGrid

-

VB Equivalent: DBGrid -- DVX Widget: dbgrid

-

A data-bound grid that displays records from a Data control in a tabular format. Columns are auto-generated from the query results. Bind it using the DataSource property.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property     Type      Description
-  ----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  DataSource   String    Name of the Data control that supplies records.
-  GridLines    Boolean   Show or hide grid lines between cells.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method    Parameters   Description
-  -------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Refresh   (none)       Reload and redraw the grid from the Data control.
-

Type-Specific Events

-
  Event      Parameters   Description
-  --------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Click      (none)       Fires when a cell is clicked.
-  DblClick   (none)       Fires when a cell is double-clicked. This is the default event.
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Data

-

Data Binding

-
-
-

DropDown

-

DropDown

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: dropdown (non-editable drop-down list)

-

A read-only drop-down list. Unlike ComboBox, the user cannot type free text; they can only select from the provided items. Supports AddItem/RemoveItem/Clear/List.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected item.
-  ListCount   Integer   Number of items (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-

Same as ListBox: AddItem, RemoveItem, Clear, List.

-

See ListBox for details

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Form

-

Form

-

VB Equivalent: Form -- DVX Widget: Window + VBox/HBox root

-

The Form is the top-level container representing a DVX window. It is declared in the .frm file with Begin Form FormName. All controls are children of the form's content box, which uses either VBox (default) or HBox layout.

-

Form Properties

-
  Property    Type      Default          Description
-  ----------  -------   --------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Name        String    "Form1"          The form's name, used for event dispatch and Load statement.
-  Caption     String    (same as Name)   Window title bar text.
-  Width       Integer   400              Window width in pixels. Setting this disables AutoSize.
-  Height      Integer   300              Window height in pixels. Setting this disables AutoSize.
-  Left        Integer   0                Initial X position. Used when Centered is False.
-  Top         Integer   0                Initial Y position. Used when Centered is False.
-  Layout      String    "VBox"           Content box layout: "VBox" (vertical) or "HBox" (horizontal).
-  AutoSize    Boolean   True             When True, the window shrink-wraps to fit its content.
-  Resizable   Boolean   True             Whether the user can resize the window at runtime.
-  Centered    Boolean   True             When True, the window is centered on screen. When False, Left/Top are used.
-

Form Events

-
  Event         Parameters              Description
-  -----------   ---------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Load          (none)                  Fires after the form and all controls are created. This is the default event.
-  Unload        (none)                  Fires when the form is being closed or unloaded.
-  QueryUnload   Cancel As Integer       Fires before Unload. Set Cancel = 1 to abort the close.
-  Resize        (none)                  Fires when the window is resized by the user.
-  Activate      (none)                  Fires when the window gains focus.
-  Deactivate    (none)                  Fires when the window loses focus.
-

Form Methods

-
  Statement           Description
-  ------------------  -------------------------------------------
-  Load FormName       Load the form (creates the window and controls, fires Load event).
-  Unload FormName     Unload the form (fires Unload, destroys window).
-  FormName.Show       Make the form visible.
-  FormName.Show 1     Show as modal dialog (blocks until closed).
-  FormName.Hide       Hide the form without unloading it.
-

Example

-
Sub Form_Load ()
-    Form1.Caption = "Hello World"
-    Print "Form loaded!"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Form_QueryUnload (Cancel As Integer)
-    If MsgBox("Really quit?", 4) <> 6 Then
-        Cancel = 1
-    End If
-End Sub
-
-Sub Form_Resize ()
-    Print "Window resized"
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

FRM File Format

-
-
-

Frame

-

Frame

-

VB Equivalent: Frame -- DVX Widget: frame (titled VBox container)

-

A container with a titled border. Child controls are placed inside the frame using VBox layout. In the .frm file, nest Begin/End blocks inside the Frame block.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type     Description
-  --------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String   The title displayed in the frame border.
-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin Frame Frame1
-    Caption = "Options"
-    Begin CheckBox Check1
-        Caption = "Option A"
-    End
-    Begin CheckBox Check2
-        Caption = "Option B"
-    End
-End
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

HBox

-

HBox

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: hbox (horizontal layout container)

-

A container that arranges its children horizontally, left to right. Use Weight on children to distribute extra space.

-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

No type-specific properties.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

VBox

-
-
-

HScrollBar

-

HScrollBar

-

VB Equivalent: HScrollBar -- DVX Widget: slider | Name Prefix: HScroll

-

A horizontal slider/scrollbar control. The value ranges between a minimum and maximum set at creation time (default 0 to 100).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Value      Integer   The current slider position (clamped to min/max range).
-

Default Event: Change

-

Example

-
Begin HScrollBar HScroll1
-    MinWidth = 200
-End
-
-Sub HScroll1_Change ()
-    Label1.Caption = "Value: " & Str$(HScroll1.Value)
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Image

-

Image

-

VB Equivalent: Image -- DVX Widget: image

-

A static image display control. Loads BMP images from file. Cannot be placed via the designer toolbox (requires pixel data at creation time); typically created in code or loaded via the Picture property.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property      Type      Description
-  -----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Picture       String    Path to a BMP file to load (write-only).
-  ImageWidth    Integer   Width of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-  ImageHeight   Integer   Height of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ImageButton

-

ImageButton

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: imagebutton

-

A button that displays an image instead of text. Like Image, it requires pixel data at creation time and is typically loaded via the Picture property.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property      Type      Description
-  -----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Picture       String    Path to a BMP file to load (write-only).
-  ImageWidth    Integer   Width of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-  ImageHeight   Integer   Height of the loaded image in pixels (read-only).
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Label

-

Label

-

VB Equivalent: Label -- DVX Widget: label

-

A static text label. Supports left, center, and right alignment.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type   Description
-  ---------   ----   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption     String The text displayed by the label.
-  Alignment   Enum   Text alignment: Left (default), Center, or Right.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Begin Label Label1
-    Caption   = "Hello, World!"
-    Alignment = "Center"
-End
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Line

-

Line

-

VB Equivalent: Line -- DVX Widget: separator

-

A visual separator line. The underlying widget supports both horizontal and vertical orientations. The default (via BASIC) is horizontal.

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ListBox

-

ListBox

-

VB Equivalent: ListBox -- DVX Widget: listbox

-

A scrollable list of selectable items. Items are managed via methods (AddItem, RemoveItem, Clear). Supports single and multi-select modes.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected item (-1 = no selection).
-  ListCount   Integer   Number of items in the list (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method            Parameters                                Description
-  ---------------   ---------------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  AddItem           Text As String                            Add an item to the end of the list.
-  RemoveItem        Index As Integer                          Remove the item at the given index.
-  Clear             (none)                                    Remove all items from the list.
-  List              Index As Integer                          Return the text of the item at the given index.
-  SelectAll         (none)                                    Select all items (multi-select mode).
-  ClearSelection    (none)                                    Deselect all items.
-  SetMultiSelect    Multi As Boolean                          Enable or disable multi-select mode.
-  SetReorderable    Reorderable As Boolean                    Enable or disable drag-to-reorder.
-  IsItemSelected    Index As Integer                          Returns True if the item at Index is selected.
-  SetItemSelected   Index As Integer, Selected As Boolean     Select or deselect a specific item.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Example

-
Sub Form_Load ()
-    List1.AddItem "Apple"
-    List1.AddItem "Banana"
-    List1.AddItem "Cherry"
-End Sub
-
-Sub List1_Click ()
-    Dim idx As Integer
-    idx = List1.ListIndex
-    If idx >= 0 Then
-        Label1.Caption = "Selected: " & List1.List(idx)
-    End If
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

ComboBox

-

DropDown

-
-
-

ListView

-

ListView

-

VB Equivalent: ListView -- DVX Widget: listview

-

A multi-column list with column headers. Supports sorting, multi-select, and drag-to-reorder. Columns are configured via the C API (SetColumns, SetData).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type      Description
-  ---------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  ListIndex   Integer   Index of the currently selected row (-1 = none).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method            Parameters                                Description
-  ---------------   ---------------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SelectAll         (none)                                    Select all rows.
-  ClearSelection    (none)                                    Deselect all rows.
-  SetMultiSelect    Multi As Boolean                          Enable or disable multi-select.
-  SetReorderable    Reorderable As Boolean                    Enable or disable row reordering.
-  IsItemSelected    Index As Integer                          Returns True if the row at Index is selected.
-  SetItemSelected   Index As Integer, Selected As Boolean     Select or deselect a specific row.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

OptionButton

-

OptionButton

-

VB Equivalent: OptionButton -- DVX Widget: radio (radio group + radio button) | Name Prefix: Option

-

A radio button for mutually exclusive choices. DVX uses a radio group container; individual OptionButtons are children of the group. The Value property returns the button's index within its group.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Caption    String    The text displayed next to the radio button.
-  Value      Integer   The index of this radio button within its group (read-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method        Parameters          Description
-  -----------   -----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetSelected   Index As Integer    Select the radio button at the given index within the group.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

PictureBox

-

PictureBox

-

VB Equivalent: PictureBox -- DVX Widget: canvas | Name Prefix: Picture

-

A drawing surface (canvas). Supports drawing lines, rectangles, circles, text, and individual pixels. Can save and load BMP images. The default canvas size is 64x64 pixels.

-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method   Parameters         Description
-  ------   ----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Clear    Color As Integer   Fill the entire canvas with the specified color.
-

Additional drawing methods (DrawLine, DrawRect, FillRect, FillCircle, SetPixel, GetPixel, DrawText, Save, Load) are available through the C API but not currently exposed through BASIC interface descriptors.

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ProgressBar

-

ProgressBar

-

VB Equivalent: ProgressBar -- DVX Widget: progressbar

-

A horizontal progress indicator bar.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Value      Integer   Current progress value (0-100).
-

No type-specific events or methods. No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

ScrollPane

-

ScrollPane

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: scrollpane | Name Prefix: Scroll

-

A scrollable container. Place child controls inside and the ScrollPane automatically provides scrollbars when the content exceeds the visible area.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  NoBorder   Boolean   When True, suppresses the border around the scroll pane.
-

Container: Yes

-

No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Spacer

-

Spacer

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: spacer

-

An invisible layout spacer. Takes up space in the layout without rendering anything. Useful for pushing controls apart. Give it a Weight to absorb extra space.

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

SpinButton

-

SpinButton

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: spinner | Name Prefix: Spin

-

A numeric input with up/down buttons. Supports integer mode (default) and real-number mode with configurable decimal places.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Value      Integer   Current integer value (in integer mode).
-  RealMode   Boolean   True to use floating-point mode; False for integer mode.
-  Decimals   Integer   Number of decimal places shown in real mode.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method     Parameters                       Description
-  --------   ------------------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetRange   Min As Integer, Max As Integer   Set the allowed value range.
-  SetStep    Step As Integer                  Set the increment per button click.
-

Default Event: Change

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Splitter

-

Splitter

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: splitter

-

A resizable split pane. Holds exactly two child widgets separated by a draggable divider. Default orientation is vertical (top/bottom split).

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Position   Integer   Position of the divider in pixels from the top (or left).
-

Container: Yes

-

No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

StatusBar

-

StatusBar

-

VB Equivalent: StatusBar -- DVX Widget: statusbar

-

A horizontal container styled as a status bar, typically placed at the bottom of a form. At the C API level it accepts child widgets, but it is not registered as a container in the form runtime, so child controls cannot be nested inside it in .frm files. Set its Caption property to display status text.

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

TabStrip

-

TabStrip

-

VB Equivalent: TabStrip -- DVX Widget: tabcontrol

-

A tabbed container. Each tab page is a separate container that holds child controls. Switching tabs shows one page and hides others.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  TabIndex   Integer   Index of the active tab (0-based). Note: this property name collides with the common VB-compatibility TabIndex property, which shadows it at runtime. Use the SetActive method instead to switch tabs.
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method      Parameters          Description
-  ---------   -----------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetActive   Index As Integer    Switch to the tab at the given index. This is the recommended way to change tabs at runtime (the TabIndex property is shadowed by the common property handler).
-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-
Warning: The TabIndex property is shadowed by the common property handler at runtime. Use the SetActive method to change tabs programmatically.
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Terminal

-

Terminal

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: ansiterm (ANSI terminal emulator)

-

A VT100/ANSI terminal emulator widget. Supports ANSI escape sequences, scrollback buffer, and serial communication. Default size is 80 columns by 25 rows.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property     Type      Description
-  ----------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Cols         Integer   Number of character columns (read-only).
-  Rows         Integer   Number of character rows (read-only).
-  Scrollback   Integer   Number of scrollback lines (write-only).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method   Parameters        Description
-  ------   ---------------   -------------------------------------------
-  Clear    (none)            Clear the terminal screen.
-  Write    Text As String    Write text (with ANSI escape processing) to the terminal.
-

No default event.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

TextArea

-

TextArea

-

VB Equivalent: TextArea (DVX extension) -- DVX Widget: textarea (multi-line text input, max 4096 chars)

-

A multi-line text editing area. This is a DVX extension with no direct VB3 equivalent (VB uses a TextBox with MultiLine=True). Supports syntax colorization, line numbers, auto-indent, and find/replace via the C API.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type     Description
-  --------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Text       String   The full text content.
-

Default Event: Change

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

TextBox

-

TextBox

-

VB Equivalent: TextBox -- DVX Widget: textbox (single-line text input, max 256 chars)

-

A single-line text input field. Supports data binding via DataSource and DataField properties.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property     Type     Description
-  ----------   ------   -------------------------------------------
-  Text         String   The text content of the input field.
-  DataSource   String   Name of a Data control for data binding.
-  DataField    String   Column name for data binding.
-

Default Event: Change

-

Example

-
Begin TextBox Text1
-    Text = "Enter text here"
-End
-
-Sub Text1_Change ()
-    Label1.Caption = "You typed: " & Text1.Text
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

Data Binding

-
-
-

Timer

-

Timer

-

VB Equivalent: Timer -- DVX Widget: timer (non-visual)

-

A non-visual control that fires its event at a regular interval. The Timer widget is invisible at runtime -- it has no on-screen representation.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property   Type      Description
-  --------   -------   -------------------------------------------
-  Enabled    Boolean   True to start the timer, False to stop it.
-  Interval   Integer   Timer interval in milliseconds (write-only from BASIC).
-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method   Parameters   Description
-  ------   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Start    (none)       Start the timer.
-  Stop     (none)       Stop the timer.
-

Type-Specific Events

-
  Event   Parameters   Description
-  -----   ----------   -------------------------------------------
-  Timer   (none)       Fires each time the interval elapses. This is the default event.
-
Note: The Timer control fires the Timer event instead of Change. The onChange callback on the underlying widget is remapped automatically.
-

Example

-
Begin Timer Timer1
-    Interval = 1000
-    Enabled  = True
-End
-
-Dim counter As Integer
-
-Sub Timer1_Timer ()
-    counter = counter + 1
-    Label1.Caption = "Ticks: " & Str$(counter)
-End Sub
-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

Toolbar

-

Toolbar

-

VB Equivalent: Toolbar -- DVX Widget: toolbar

-

A horizontal container styled as a toolbar, with compact padding and spacing. Place buttons, labels, or other controls inside.

-

Container: Yes

-

No type-specific properties, events, or methods.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

TreeView

-

TreeView

-

VB Equivalent: TreeView -- DVX Widget: treeview

-

A hierarchical tree of expandable/collapsible nodes. Nodes are created via the C API (wgtTreeItem). Supports multi-select and drag-to-reorder.

-

Type-Specific Methods

-
  Method           Parameters               Description
-  --------------   ----------------------   -------------------------------------------
-  SetMultiSelect   Multi As Boolean         Enable or disable multi-select mode.
-  SetReorderable   Reorderable As Boolean   Enable or disable node reordering.
-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
-

VBox

-

VBox

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: vbox (vertical layout container)

-

A container that arranges its children vertically, top to bottom. No title or border. Use Weight on children to distribute extra space.

-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

No type-specific properties.

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-

HBox

-
-
-

WrapBox

-

WrapBox

-

DVX Extension -- DVX Widget: wrapbox

-

A container that arranges children in a flowing layout, wrapping to the next row when the available width is exceeded. Similar to CSS flexbox with flex-wrap: wrap.

-

Type-Specific Properties

-
  Property    Type   Description
-  ---------   ----   -------------------------------------------
-  Alignment   Enum   Horizontal alignment of items: Left, Center, or Right.
-

Container: Yes

-

Default Event: Click

-

Common Properties, Events, and Methods

-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvxbasic_ide_guide.html b/docs/dvxbasic_ide_guide.html deleted file mode 100644 index e434a48..0000000 --- a/docs/dvxbasic_ide_guide.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,758 +0,0 @@ - - - - -DVX BASIC IDE Guide - - - - -
-
-

DVX BASIC IDE Guide

-

DVX BASIC IDE Guide

-

DVX BASIC is a Visual BASIC development environment for the DVX GUI System. It provides a VB3-style integrated development environment with a code editor, form designer, project system, and a full interactive debugger -- all running natively on DOS under the DVX windowing system.

-

This guide covers every feature of the IDE: menus, toolbar, editor, form designer, project management, debugger, and auxiliary windows.

-

IDE Windows

-

The DVX BASIC IDE is modeled after Visual Basic 3.0. It consists of several floating windows arranged on the DVX desktop:

- -

Debug Windows -- Locals, Call Stack, Watch, and Breakpoints windows that appear automatically when debugging.

-

The IDE compiles BASIC source into bytecode and runs it in an integrated virtual machine (VM). Programs execute in cooperative slices (10,000 VM steps per slice), yielding to the DVX event loop between slices so the GUI remains responsive.

-

File Menu

-

Edit Menu

-

Run Menu

-

View Menu

-

Window Menu

-

Tools Menu

-

Help Menu

-

Toolbar

-

Code Editor

-

Form Designer

-

Project System

-

Properties Panel

-

Toolbox

-

Debugger

-

Locals Window

-

Call Stack Window

-

Watch Window

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Immediate Window

-

Output Window

-

Find / Replace

-

Preferences

-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-
-
-

File Menu

-

File Menu

-
  Menu Item              Shortcut   Description
-  ---------              --------   -----------
-  New Project...                    Create a new DVX BASIC project.
-  Open Project...                   Open an existing .dbp project file.
-  Save Project                      Save the current project file to disk.
-  Close Project                     Close the current project (prompts to save unsaved changes).
-  ---
-  Project Properties...             Edit project metadata (name, author, version, startup form, icon, etc.).
-  ---
-  Add File...            Ctrl+O     Add a .bas or .frm file to the project. If no project is open, creates an implicit project from the file.
-  Save File              Ctrl+S     Save the active file to disk.
-  Save All                          Save all modified files in the project.
-  ---
-  Remove File                       Remove the selected file from the project (prompts to save if modified).
-  ---
-  Exit                              Close the IDE (prompts to save unsaved changes).
-

Edit Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Edit Menu

-

Edit Menu

-
  Menu Item    Shortcut   Description
-  ---------    --------   -----------
-  Cut          Ctrl+X     Cut selected text to the clipboard.
-  Copy         Ctrl+C     Copy selected text to the clipboard.
-  Paste        Ctrl+V     Paste text from the clipboard.
-  ---
-  Select All   Ctrl+A     Select all text in the active editor.
-  ---
-  Delete       Del        Delete the selected text or control (in the form designer).
-  ---
-  Find...      Ctrl+F     Open the Find/Replace dialog.
-  Find Next    F3         Find the next occurrence of the search text.
-  Replace...   Ctrl+H     Open the Find/Replace dialog with replace enabled.
-

Run Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Run Menu

-

Run Menu

-
  Menu Item                Shortcut         Description
-  ---------                --------         -----------
-  Run                      F5               Compile and run the program. If paused at a breakpoint, resumes execution with debugging disabled (runs free).
-  Debug                    Shift+F5         Compile and run with the debugger active. Breakpoints are active but execution does not pause at the first statement. If paused, resumes to the next breakpoint.
-  Run Without Recompile    Ctrl+F5          Re-run the last compiled module without recompiling.
-  Stop                     Esc              Stop the running program immediately.
-  ---
-  Step Into                F8               Execute one statement, stepping into SUB/FUNCTION calls. If idle, starts a debug session and breaks at the first statement.
-  Step Over                Shift+F8         Execute one statement, stepping over SUB/FUNCTION calls.
-  Step Out                 Ctrl+Shift+F8    Run until the current SUB/FUNCTION returns.
-  Run to Cursor            Ctrl+F8          Run until execution reaches the line where the cursor is positioned.
-  ---
-  Toggle Breakpoint        F9               Toggle a breakpoint on the current editor line.
-  ---
-  Clear Output                              Clear the Output window.
-  ---
-  Save on Run                               Checkbox: when enabled, all modified files are saved automatically before compiling. Persisted in preferences.
-

View Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

View Menu

-

View Menu

-
  Menu Item        Shortcut   Description
-  ---------        --------   -----------
-  Code             F7         Switch to Code view for the active file (or the file selected in the Project Explorer).
-  Designer         Shift+F7   Switch to Design view for the active form file.
-  ---
-  Toolbar                     Checkbox: show or hide the toolbar. Persisted in preferences.
-  Status Bar                  Checkbox: show or hide the status bar. Persisted in preferences.
-  ---
-  Menu Editor...   Ctrl+E     Open the Menu Editor dialog for the active form. Allows designing menu bars with captions, names, levels, checked state, and enabled state.
-

Window Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Window Menu

-

Window Menu

-
  Menu Item          Description
-  ---------          -----------
-  Code Editor        Show or raise the Code Editor window.
-  Output             Show or raise the Output window.
-  Immediate          Show or raise the Immediate window.
-  Locals             Show or raise the Locals debug window.
-  Call Stack         Show or raise the Call Stack debug window.
-  Watch              Show or raise the Watch debug window.
-  Breakpoints        Show or raise the Breakpoints window.
-  ---
-  Project Explorer   Show or raise the Project Explorer window.
-  Toolbox            Show or raise the Toolbox window.
-  Properties         Show or raise the Properties panel.
-

Tools Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Tools Menu

-

Tools Menu

-
  Menu Item        Description
-  ---------        -----------
-  Preferences...   Open the Preferences dialog (editor settings and project defaults).
-  ---
-  Debug Layout     Checkbox: toggle a debug overlay that shows widget layout boundaries. Useful for diagnosing widget layout issues.
-

Help Menu

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Help Menu

-

Help Menu

-
  Menu Item            Description
-  ---------            -----------
-  About DVX BASIC...   Show the About dialog with version and copyright information.
-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Toolbar

-

Toolbar

-

The toolbar is organized into four groups separated by vertical dividers. Each button has a tooltip showing its name and keyboard shortcut.

-

File Group

-
  Button   Shortcut   Action
-  ------   --------   ------
-  Open     Ctrl+O     Add a file to the project (same as File > Add File).
-  Save     Ctrl+S     Save the active file.
-

Run Group

-
  Button   Shortcut   Action
-  ------   --------   ------
-  Run      F5         Compile and run the program.
-  Stop     Esc        Stop the running program.
-

Debug Group

-
  Button          Shortcut         Action
-  ------          --------         ------
-  Debug           Shift+F5         Start or resume a debug session.
-  Step Into       F8               Step into the next statement.
-  Step Over       Shift+F8         Step over the next statement.
-  Step Out        Ctrl+Shift+F8    Step out of the current procedure.
-  Run to Cursor   Ctrl+F8          Run to the cursor position.
-

View Group

-
  Button   Shortcut   Action
-  ------   --------   ------
-  Code     F7         Switch to Code view.
-  Design   Shift+F7   Switch to Design view.
-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Code Editor

-

Code Editor

-

The Code Editor is the primary editing window for BASIC source code. It occupies the center of the screen, below the toolbar and above the Output and Immediate windows.

-

Object and Function Dropdowns

-

At the top of the Code Editor are two dropdown lists:

- -

Function -- lists all event handlers (procedures) for the selected object. Implemented handlers are listed first (plain text); unimplemented handlers follow in brackets (e.g., [Click]). Selecting an unimplemented event creates a new event handler stub.

-

The editor shows one procedure at a time. Each procedure has its own buffer, and switching between them is instantaneous. The (General) section contains module-level declarations and code.

-

Syntax Highlighting

-

The editor applies real-time syntax coloring as you type. The following categories are highlighted in distinct colors:

-
  Category          Examples
-  --------          --------
-  Keywords          IF, THEN, FOR, NEXT, SUB, FUNCTION, DIM, PRINT, SELECT, CASE, DO, LOOP, WHILE, WEND, END, EXIT, CALL, GOSUB, GOTO, RETURN, DECLARE, CONST, TYPE, AND, OR, NOT, XOR, MOD, etc.
-  Type names        INTEGER, LONG, SINGLE, DOUBLE, STRING, BOOLEAN, BYTE, TRUE, FALSE
-  String literals   "Hello, World!"
-  Comments          ' This is a comment, REM This is a comment
-  Numbers           42, 3.14
-  Operators         =, <, >, +, -, *, /, \, &
-

Editor Features

- -

Line decorations -- breakpoint lines show a red dot in the gutter. The current debug line (when paused) is highlighted with a yellow background.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Form Designer

-

Form Designer

-

The Form Designer provides a visual design surface for editing .frm files. Switch to it with Shift+F7 or the Design toolbar button. It opens in a separate window showing a WYSIWYG preview of the form.

-

Design Surface

- -

Delete key -- removes the selected control from the form.

-

Form Properties

-

Forms have the following design-time properties: Name, Caption, Width, Height, Left, Top, Layout (VBox or HBox), Centered, AutoSize, and Resizable.

-

Properties Panel

-

Toolbox

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Project System

-

Project System

-

Project Files (.dbp)

-

A DVX BASIC project is stored as a .dbp file (DVX BASIC Project). The project file records:

- -

File list -- relative paths (8.3 DOS names) of all .bas and .frm files in the project. Each entry tracks whether it is a form file.

-

Source Map

-

When the project is compiled, all files are concatenated into a single source stream. A source map tracks which lines belong to which file, enabling accurate error reporting and debugger navigation across multiple files. For .frm files, an injected BEGINFORM directive is prepended to the code section.

-

Project Operations

-
  Operation             Description
-  ---------             -----------
-  New Project           Creates a blank project with a name and directory. A default .frm file is added automatically.
-  Open Project          Opens a .dbp file and loads all referenced files into memory.
-  Save Project          Writes the .dbp file to disk.
-  Close Project         Closes the project, prompting to save unsaved changes.
-  Add File              Adds a .bas or .frm file to the project. Opening a file without a project auto-creates an implicit project.
-  Remove File           Removes a file from the project (prompts to save if modified).
-  Project Properties    Opens a dialog for editing project metadata (name, author, company, version, copyright, description, icon, startup form).
-

Project Explorer

-

The Project Explorer is a tree view window listing all project files. Double-click a file to open it: .bas files open in Code view, .frm files open in Design view. The selected file in the Project Explorer determines the target for View > Code and View > Designer commands.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Properties Panel

-

Properties Panel

-

The Properties panel (Window > Properties) has two sections:

- -

Property list -- a two-column ListView below the tree showing property names and values for the selected control. Double-click a property value to edit it via an InputBox dialog. Changes take effect immediately in the designer preview.

-

Each control type exposes different properties (e.g., Caption, Text, Width, Height, MaxWidth, MaxHeight, Weight, Alignment, Enabled, Visible, and type-specific properties like DataSource and DataField for data-bound controls).

-

Form Designer

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Toolbox

-

Toolbox

-

The Toolbox (Window > Toolbox) is a floating palette of buttons, one for each available control type. Controls are loaded dynamically from the widget plugin registry -- any widget DXE that provides a basName appears in the toolbox.

-

Click a tool to select it (the active tool name is stored in the designer state), then click on the form to place a new instance. Click the same tool again to deselect it and return to pointer mode.

-

Available Controls

-
  VB Name         Description
-  -------         -----------
-  CommandButton   Push button that triggers a Click event.
-  Label           Static text label.
-  TextBox         Single-line text input field.
-  TextArea        Multi-line text editor.
-  CheckBox        On/off checkbox.
-  OptionButton    Radio button (mutually exclusive within a group).
-  ListBox         Scrollable list of items.
-  ComboBox        Drop-down combo box.
-  DropDown        Simple drop-down list.
-  PictureBox      Canvas for drawing and images.
-  Image           Static image display.
-  ImageButton     Clickable image button.
-  Frame           Grouping container with a labeled border.
-  VBox            Vertical layout container.
-  HBox            Horizontal layout container.
-  WrapBox         Flow layout container that wraps items to the next row.
-  Splitter        Resizable split between two child panes.
-  ScrollPane      Scrollable container for large content.
-  TabStrip        Tabbed container with multiple pages.
-  ListView        Multi-column list with headers.
-  TreeView        Hierarchical tree control.
-  ProgressBar     Progress indicator bar.
-  HScrollBar      Horizontal slider/scrollbar.
-  SpinButton      Numeric up/down spinner.
-  Line            Horizontal or vertical separator line.
-  Spacer          Invisible spacing element for layout.
-  Timer           Non-visual timer that fires periodic events.
-  Toolbar         Toolbar container for buttons.
-  StatusBar       Status bar at the bottom of a form.
-  Terminal        ANSI terminal emulator control.
-  Data            Data control for binding to a database.
-  DBGrid          Data-bound grid for displaying database query results.
-

Form Designer

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Debugger

-

Debugger

-

The DVX BASIC IDE includes a full interactive debugger. The debugger operates as a state machine with three states:

-
  State          Description
-  -----          -----------
-  DBG_IDLE       No program loaded or running.
-  DBG_RUNNING    Program is executing (VM running in slices).
-  DBG_PAUSED     Execution is paused at a breakpoint or step point. The IDE GUI is fully interactive.
-

Starting a Debug Session

- -

F5 (Run) -- compiles and runs without the debugger. No breakpoints are active. If already paused, resumes execution with debugging disabled.

-

Breakpoints

-

Setting Breakpoints

- -

Click in the line number gutter to toggle a breakpoint on that line.

-

Breakpoint Validation

-

Not every line can have a breakpoint. The IDE validates the line content and silently refuses to set breakpoints on:

- -

END SUB and END FUNCTION lines

-

Breakpoint Storage

-

Each breakpoint records the project file index, the code line number within the file, the procedure index, and the procedure name (as Object.Event). When the project is compiled, breakpoints are converted to concatenated source line numbers that match the VM's OP_LINE opcodes.

-

Visual Indicators

- -

The current debug line (when paused) has a yellow background.

-

Breakpoint Adjustment on Edit

-

When lines are added or removed in the editor, breakpoints below the edit point are automatically shifted to stay on the correct line.

-

Stepping

-
  Action          Shortcut         Behavior
-  ------          --------         --------
-  Step Into       F8               Execute one statement. If the statement is a SUB/FUNCTION call, step into it.
-  Step Over       Shift+F8         Execute one statement. If the statement is a SUB/FUNCTION call, execute the entire call and break at the next line in the current scope.
-  Step Out        Ctrl+Shift+F8    Run until the current SUB/FUNCTION returns to its caller.
-  Run to Cursor   Ctrl+F8          Run until execution reaches the line under the cursor.
-

The Debug Run Loop

-

When a program is running in debug mode, the IDE enters a cooperative loop:

- -

When the user resumes (F5/Shift+F5/F8/etc.), the state transitions back to DBG_RUNNING and the loop continues.

-

Stopping

-

Press Esc or click the Stop toolbar button at any time to halt execution. The VM is destroyed, debug state resets to DBG_IDLE, and the IDE restores the designer windows that were hidden at run start.

-

Locals Window

-

Call Stack Window

-

Watch Window

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Locals Window

-

Locals Window

-

When the debugger pauses, the Locals and Call Stack windows are auto-opened (if not already visible). The Watch and Breakpoints windows can be opened manually from the Window menu.

-

Shows variables for the current execution scope. Displayed as a three-column ListView:

-
  Column   Content
-  ------   -------
-  Name     Variable name (internal mangled names like static variable placeholders are filtered out).
-  Type     Data type: Integer, Long, Single, Double, String, Boolean, Array, UDT. Array types show the element type (e.g., Integer()).
-  Value    Current value. Strings are shown in quotes. Booleans as True/False. Arrays show bounds and element count (e.g., Integer(0 To 9) [10]). Uninitialized arrays show (uninitialized).
-

The Locals window displays:

- -

Form-scoped variables for the current form (if the program is executing within a form context).

-

Up to 64 variables are displayed. The window is resizable.

-

Call Stack Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Call Stack Window

-

Call Stack Window

-

Shows the current call chain as a two-column ListView:

-
  Column      Content
-  ------      -------
-  Procedure   Procedure name (or (module) for module-level code).
-  Line        Line number where execution is paused (shown for the topmost frame).
-

The current location is shown first, followed by each caller in the call stack (walking from the deepest frame back to the module entry point). Up to 32 frames are displayed.

-

Watch Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Watch Window

-

Watch Window

-

Allows monitoring arbitrary expressions while debugging. The window has a text input at the top and a two-column ListView below:

-
  Column       Content
-  ------       -------
-  Expression   The watch expression text.
-  Value        Evaluated result (or <error> if evaluation fails). Blank when not paused.
-

Adding Watch Expressions

-

Type an expression in the text input and press Enter. Up to 16 watch expressions can be active at once.

-

Watch Expression Syntax

-

Watch expressions support:

- -

Arbitrary BASIC expressions (compiled and evaluated against the paused VM's state): x + y * 2, Len(name$)

-

Editing and Deleting

- -

Press Delete to remove the selected watch expression.

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Breakpoints Window

-

Breakpoints Window

-

Lists all set breakpoints as a three-column ListView:

-
  Column      Content
-  ------      -------
-  File        Project file path.
-  Procedure   Procedure name (Object.Event format, or (General)).
-  Line        Code line number within the file.
- -

Press Delete to remove selected breakpoints (multi-select is supported).

-

Debugger

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Immediate Window

-

Immediate Window

-

The Immediate window is an interactive REPL at the bottom-right of the screen. Type a line of BASIC and press Enter to evaluate it. Results appear inline below your input.

-

Expression Evaluation

-

If the input is not a recognized statement keyword, it is automatically wrapped in a PRINT statement. For example, typing 2 + 2 evaluates as PRINT 2 + 2 and displays 4.

-

You can also type full statements:

- -

LET x = 42 -- explicit assignment (see below).

-

Parse or runtime errors are displayed inline with an Error: prefix.

-

Inspecting Variables While Paused

-

When the debugger is paused at a breakpoint, the Immediate window has access to the running VM's state. Global variable values are copied into the evaluation VM, so expressions like count or name$ & " test" display live values.

-

Assigning Variables While Paused

-

When paused, you can modify variables in the running program directly from the Immediate window using assignment syntax:

-
variableName = newValue
-

The optional LET keyword is also accepted:

-
LET variableName = newValue
-

Assignment works for:

- -

Combined -- items(0).price = 9.99

-

The new value is written directly into the VM's live variable slot (local, global, or form scope). A confirmation message is displayed, and the Locals and Watch windows update automatically to reflect the change.

-

If the assignment target cannot be resolved (unknown variable, out-of-bounds index, wrong type), an error message is displayed.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Output Window

-

Output Window

-

The Output window is a read-only TextArea at the bottom-left of the screen. It displays:

- -

Compile errors -- if compilation fails, the error message and location are shown.

-

The output buffer holds up to 32,768 characters. Use Run > Clear Output to clear it.

-

INPUT statements prompt the user via a modal InputBox dialog; the prompt text is also echoed to the Output window.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Find / Replace

-

Find / Replace

-

Open with Ctrl+F (Find) or Ctrl+H (Replace). The Find/Replace dialog is modeless -- it stays open while you continue editing.

-

Dialog Controls

-
  Control                    Description
-  -------                    -----------
-  Find input                 The text to search for.
-  Replace checkbox + input   Enable replacement mode and enter replacement text.
-  Scope                      Radio group: Function, Object, File, or Project. Default is Project.
-  Direction                  Radio group: Forward or Backward.
-  Match Case                 Checkbox: case-sensitive search.
-

Buttons

-
  Button        Action
-  ------        ------
-  Find Next     Find the next occurrence. Wraps across procedures, files, and the entire project depending on the scope setting.
-  Replace       Replace the current match and find the next one.
-  Replace All   Replace all occurrences within the selected scope.
-  Close         Close the dialog.
-

Keyboard Shortcut

-

F3 repeats the last search (Find Next) without opening the dialog.

-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Preferences

-

Preferences

-

Open via Tools > Preferences. Settings are saved to dvxbasic.ini in the app's config directory.

-

Editor Section

-
  Setting                                      Description                                                                               Default
-  -------                                      -----------                                                                               -------
-  Skip comments/strings when renaming          When renaming a control or form, skip occurrences inside comments and string literals.     On
-  Require variable declaration (OPTION EXPLICIT)   When enabled, variables must be declared with DIM before use.                          Off
-  Tab width                                    Number of spaces per tab stop (1-8).                                                      3
-  Insert spaces instead of tabs                When enabled, pressing Tab inserts spaces. When disabled, inserts a real tab character.     On
-

New Project Defaults Section

-

These fields set the default values for new project metadata:

-
  Field         Description                              Default
-  -----         -----------                              -------
-  Author        Default author name.                     (empty)
-  Company       Default company name.                    (empty)
-  Version       Default version string.                  1.0
-  Copyright     Default copyright notice.                (empty)
-  Description   Default project description (multi-line).   (empty)
-

Back to Overview

-
-
-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-

Keyboard Shortcuts

-
  Shortcut         Action
-  --------         ------
-  Ctrl+O           Add File
-  Ctrl+S           Save File
-  Ctrl+A           Select All
-  Ctrl+X           Cut
-  Ctrl+C           Copy
-  Ctrl+V           Paste
-  Ctrl+F           Find
-  Ctrl+H           Replace
-  Ctrl+E           Menu Editor
-  F3               Find Next
-  F5               Run
-  Shift+F5         Debug
-  Ctrl+F5          Run Without Recompile
-  Esc              Stop
-  F7               Code View
-  Shift+F7         Design View
-  F8               Step Into
-  Shift+F8         Step Over
-  Ctrl+Shift+F8    Step Out
-  Ctrl+F8          Run to Cursor
-  F9               Toggle Breakpoint
-  Del              Delete
-
-

DVX BASIC 1.0 -- Copyright 2026 Scott Duensing

-
-
- - diff --git a/docs/dvxbasic_language_reference.html b/docs/dvxbasic_language_reference.html deleted file mode 100644 index d2f2402..0000000 --- a/docs/dvxbasic_language_reference.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1046 +0,0 @@ - - - - -Data Types - - - - -
-
-

Data Types

-

Data Types

-

DVX BASIC supports the following data types. Each type has a corresponding type suffix character that can be appended to variable names.

-

Primary Types

-
  Type       Size       Suffix   Range / Description
-  ----       ----       ------   -------------------
-  Integer    2 bytes    %        -32768 to 32767
-  Long       4 bytes    &        -2147483648 to 2147483647
-  Single     4 bytes    !        32-bit float, approximately 7 digits precision
-  Double     8 bytes    #        64-bit float, approximately 15 digits precision
-  String     variable   $        Variable-length, reference-counted, dynamic string
-  Boolean    2 bytes    (none)   True (-1) or False (0)
-

Internal Types

-

These types are not directly declarable but are used internally by the runtime.

-
  Internal Type   Description
-  -------------   -----------
-  Array           Reference-counted multi-dimensional array (up to 8 dimensions)
-  UDT             User-defined type instance (created with TYPE...END TYPE)
-  Object          Opaque host object (form reference, control reference)
-  Ref             ByRef pointer to a variable slot (used for ByRef parameters)
-

Type Suffixes

-

Type suffixes can be appended to variable names to declare their type implicitly:

-
count%  = 42         ' Integer
-total&  = 100000     ' Long
-rate!   = 3.14       ' Single
-pi#     = 3.14159265 ' Double
-name$   = "Hello"    ' String
-

Numeric Literals

-
  Form               Example          Description
-  ----               -------          -----------
-  Decimal integer    42               Values -32768..32767 are Integer; larger are Long
-  Hex integer        &HFF             Hexadecimal literal
-  Long suffix        42&, &HFF&       Force Long type
-  Floating-point     3.14, 1.5E10     Double by default
-  Single suffix      3.14!            Force Single type
-  Double suffix      3.14#            Force Double type
-

Type Promotion

-

When mixing types in expressions, values are automatically promoted to a common type: Integer -> Long -> Single -> Double. Strings are not automatically converted to numbers (use VAL and STR$).

-

See also: Conversion Functions

-
-
-

Operators

-

Operators

-

Operators listed from highest precedence (evaluated first) to lowest precedence (evaluated last).

-
  Precedence     Operator                  Description
-  ----------     --------                  -----------
-  1 (highest)    ^                         Exponentiation
-  2              - (unary)                 Negation
-  3              *  /  \  MOD              Multiply, float div, integer div, modulus
-  4              +  -                      Addition, subtraction
-  5              &                         String concatenation
-  6              =  <>  <  >  <=  >=       Comparison (returns Boolean)
-  7              NOT                       Logical/bitwise NOT
-  8              AND                       Logical/bitwise AND
-  9              XOR                       Logical/bitwise XOR
-  10             OR                        Logical/bitwise OR
-  11             EQV                       Logical/bitwise equivalence
-  12 (lowest)    IMP                       Logical/bitwise implication
-

String Concatenation

-

Use & to concatenate strings. The + operator also concatenates when both operands are strings.

-
result$ = "Hello" & " " & "World"
-result$ = firstName$ & " " & lastName$
-
-
-

Statements Overview

-

Statements

-

Multiple statements can appear on one line separated by :. Lines can be continued with _ at the end. Comments start with ' or REM.

-

Declaration Statements (DIM, REDIM, CONST, TYPE)

-

Conditional Statements (IF, SELECT CASE)

-

Loop Statements (FOR, DO, WHILE)

-

Procedures (SUB, FUNCTION, DEF FN)

-

Flow Control (EXIT, CALL, GOTO, GOSUB, ON)

-

Input/Output (PRINT, INPUT, DATA/READ)

-

Miscellaneous Statements

-
-
-

Declaration Statements

-

Declaration Statements

-

DIM

-

Declares variables and arrays with an explicit type.

-
DIM variable AS type
-DIM variable(upperBound) AS type
-DIM variable(lower TO upper) AS type
-DIM variable(dim1, dim2, ...) AS type
-DIM variable AS UdtName
-DIM variable AS STRING * n
-DIM SHARED variable AS type
-

Examples:

-
Dim name As String
-Dim count As Integer
-Dim values(100) As Double
-Dim matrix(1 To 10, 1 To 10) As Single
-Dim Shared globalFlag As Boolean
-Dim record As PersonType
-Dim fixedStr As String * 20
-
Note: DIM SHARED makes a variable accessible from all procedures without passing it as a parameter.
-

REDIM

-

Reallocates a dynamic array, optionally preserving existing data.

-
REDIM array(newBounds) AS type
-REDIM PRESERVE array(newBounds) AS type
-
ReDim items(newSize) As String
-ReDim Preserve scores(1 To newCount) As Integer
-

CONST

-

Declares a named constant. The value must be a literal (integer, float, string, or boolean).

-
CONST name = value
-
Const MAX_SIZE = 100
-Const PI = 3.14159265
-Const APP_NAME = "DVX App"
-Const DEBUG_MODE = True
-

TYPE...END TYPE

-

Defines a user-defined type (record/structure).

-
TYPE TypeName
-    fieldName AS type
-    ...
-END TYPE
-
Type PersonType
-    firstName As String
-    lastName  As String
-    age       As Integer
-End Type
-
-Dim p As PersonType
-p.firstName = "Scott"
-p.age = 30
-

UDT fields can themselves be UDTs (nested types).

-

DECLARE

-

Forward-declares a SUB or FUNCTION. Required when a procedure is called before it is defined.

-
DECLARE SUB name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...)
-DECLARE FUNCTION name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...) AS returnType
-

DECLARE LIBRARY

-

Declares external native functions from a dynamically loaded library. This allows BASIC programs to call functions exported by DXE libraries.

-
DECLARE LIBRARY "libraryName"
-    DECLARE SUB name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...)
-    DECLARE FUNCTION name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...) AS returnType
-END DECLARE
-
Declare Library "rs232"
-    Declare Function ComOpen(ByVal port As Integer) As Integer
-    Declare Sub ComClose(ByVal port As Integer)
-    Declare Sub ComSend(ByVal port As Integer, ByVal data$ As String)
-End Declare
-

STATIC

-

Declares a local variable that retains its value between calls.

-
STATIC variable AS type
-
Sub Counter()
-    Static count As Integer
-    count = count + 1
-    Print count
-End Sub
-

OPTION

-

Sets compiler options. Must appear before any executable code.

-
OPTION BASE 0          ' Arrays start at index 0 (default)
-OPTION BASE 1          ' Arrays start at index 1
-OPTION COMPARE BINARY  ' Case-sensitive string comparisons (default)
-OPTION COMPARE TEXT    ' Case-insensitive string comparisons
-OPTION EXPLICIT        ' All variables must be declared with DIM
-

DEFtype Statements

-

Set the default type for variables based on their first letter.

-
DEFINT letterRange
-DEFLNG letterRange
-DEFSNG letterRange
-DEFDBL letterRange
-DEFSTR letterRange
-
DefInt I-N     ' Variables starting with I through N default to Integer
-DefStr S       ' Variables starting with S default to String
-

Assignment

-

Assigns a value to a variable, array element, or UDT field.

-
variable = expression
-array(index) = expression
-udt.field = expression
-LET variable = expression
-

The LET keyword is optional and supported for compatibility.

-

SWAP

-

Exchanges the values of two variables.

-
SWAP variable1, variable2
-
Swap a, b
-

ERASE

-

Frees the memory of an array and resets it.

-
ERASE arrayName
-
-
-

Conditional Statements

-

Conditional Statements

-

IF...THEN...ELSE...END IF

-

Conditional execution. Supports single-line and multi-line forms.

-

Single-line form

-
IF condition THEN statement
-IF condition THEN statement ELSE statement
-

Multi-line form

-
IF condition THEN
-    statements
-ELSEIF condition THEN
-    statements
-ELSE
-    statements
-END IF
-
If x > 10 Then
-    Print "Large"
-ElseIf x > 5 Then
-    Print "Medium"
-Else
-    Print "Small"
-End If
-
-If ready Then Print "Go!"
-

SELECT CASE

-

Multi-way branch based on an expression value.

-
SELECT CASE expression
-    CASE value
-        statements
-    CASE value1, value2
-        statements
-    CASE low TO high
-        statements
-    CASE IS operator value
-        statements
-    CASE ELSE
-        statements
-END SELECT
-
Select Case grade
-    Case 90 To 100
-        Print "A"
-    Case 80 To 89
-        Print "B"
-    Case Is >= 70
-        Print "C"
-    Case 60, 65
-        Print "D (borderline)"
-    Case Else
-        Print "F"
-End Select
-

CASE items can be combined with commas. The IS keyword allows comparison operators: <, >, <=, >=, =, <>.

-
-
-

Loop Statements

-

Loop Statements

-

FOR...NEXT

-

Counted loop with an optional step value.

-
FOR variable = start TO limit [STEP step]
-    statements
-NEXT [variable]
-
For i = 1 To 10
-    Print i
-Next i
-
-For x = 10 To 0 Step -2
-    Print x
-Next
-

The variable name after NEXT is optional. Use EXIT FOR to break out early.

-

DO...LOOP

-

General-purpose loop with pre-test, post-test, or infinite forms.

-
DO [WHILE condition | UNTIL condition]
-    statements
-LOOP [WHILE condition | UNTIL condition]
-
' Pre-test
-Do While count < 10
-    count = count + 1
-Loop
-
-' Post-test
-Do
-    line$ = ReadLine()
-Loop Until line$ = "quit"
-
-' Infinite loop (exit with EXIT DO)
-Do
-    DoEvents
-    If done Then Exit Do
-Loop
-

WHILE...WEND

-

Simple pre-test loop (legacy form; prefer DO...LOOP).

-
WHILE condition
-    statements
-WEND
-
While Not EOF(1)
-    Line Input #1, line$
-    Print line$
-Wend
-
-
-

Procedures

-

Procedures

-

SUB...END SUB

-

Defines a subroutine (no return value).

-
SUB name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...)
-    statements
-END SUB
-
Sub Greet(ByVal name As String)
-    Print "Hello, " & name
-End Sub
-

Parameters are passed ByRef by default. Use ByVal for value semantics. Use EXIT SUB to return early.

-

FUNCTION...END FUNCTION

-

Defines a function with a return value.

-
FUNCTION name ([BYVAL] param AS type, ...) AS returnType
-    statements
-    name = returnValue
-END FUNCTION
-
Function Square(ByVal n As Double) As Double
-    Square = n * n
-End Function
-

Assign to the function name to set the return value. Use EXIT FUNCTION to return early.

-

DEF FN

-

Defines a single-expression function.

-
DEF FNname(params) = expression
-
Def FnSquare(x) = x * x
-Print FnSquare(5)     ' prints 25
-
-
-

Flow Control

-

Flow Control

-

EXIT

-

Exits the current block early.

-
EXIT FOR
-EXIT DO
-EXIT SUB
-EXIT FUNCTION
-

CALL

-

Explicitly calls a subroutine or function. The return value (if any) is discarded.

-
CALL name
-CALL name(args)
-

Normally you can omit CALL and just use the name directly.

-

GOTO / GOSUB / RETURN

-
GOTO label
-GOSUB label
-RETURN
-

GOSUB pushes the return address, executes code at the label, and RETURN jumps back. At module level, RETURN returns from a GOSUB. Inside a SUB/FUNCTION, RETURN returns from the procedure.

-
GoSub Initialize
-Print "Done"
-End
-
-Initialize:
-    count = 0
-    name$ = ""
-Return
-

ON...GOTO / ON...GOSUB

-

Computed branch based on an integer expression.

-
ON expression GOTO label1, label2, ...
-ON expression GOSUB label1, label2, ...
-

If the expression evaluates to 1, control goes to the first label; 2, the second; and so on. If out of range, execution falls through.

-
-
-

Input/Output Statements

-

Input/Output Statements

-

PRINT

-

Outputs text to the console or to a file channel.

-
PRINT [expression] [{; | ,} expression] ...
-PRINT #channel, expression
-PRINT USING format$; expression [; expression] ...
- -

? is an alias for PRINT

-

Special functions inside PRINT:

- -

TAB(n) -- advance to column n

-
Print "Name:"; Tab(20); name$
-Print Using "###.##"; total
-Print #1, "Written to file"
-

INPUT

-

Reads a line of text from the user or from a file channel.

-
INPUT variable
-INPUT "prompt"; variable
-INPUT #channel, variable
-
Input "Enter your name: "; name$
-Input #1, line$
-

DATA / READ / RESTORE

-

Inline data pool for constants.

-
DATA value1, value2, "string", ...
-READ variable1, variable2, ...
-RESTORE
-

DATA statements define a pool of values. READ reads the next value from the pool into a variable. RESTORE resets the read pointer to the beginning.

-
Data 10, 20, 30, "Hello"
-Read a, b, c, msg$
-Print a; b; c; msg$
-Restore
-
-
-

Miscellaneous Statements

-

Miscellaneous Statements

-

Error Handling

-
ON ERROR GOTO label     ' Enable error handler
-ON ERROR GOTO 0          ' Disable error handler
-RESUME                   ' Retry the statement that caused the error
-RESUME NEXT              ' Continue at the next statement after the error
-ERROR n                  ' Raise a runtime error with error number n
-

The ERR keyword returns the current error number in expressions.

-
On Error GoTo ErrorHandler
-Open "missing.txt" For Input As #1
-Exit Sub
-
-ErrorHandler:
-    Print "Error number:"; Err
-    Resume Next
-

SHELL

-

Executes an operating system command.

-
SHELL "command"
-

When used as a function, returns the exit code of the command.

-
Shell "DIR /B"
-exitCode = Shell("COPY A.TXT B.TXT")
-

SLEEP

-

Pauses execution for a specified number of seconds.

-
SLEEP seconds
-

RANDOMIZE

-

Seeds the random number generator.

-
RANDOMIZE seed
-RANDOMIZE TIMER          ' Seed from system clock
-

END

-

Terminates program execution immediately.

-
END
-
-
-

File I/O

-

File I/O

-

OPEN

-

Opens a file for reading, writing, or appending.

-
OPEN filename$ FOR INPUT AS #channel
-OPEN filename$ FOR OUTPUT AS #channel
-OPEN filename$ FOR APPEND AS #channel
-OPEN filename$ FOR RANDOM AS #channel [LEN = recordSize]
-OPEN filename$ FOR BINARY AS #channel
-
  Mode      Description
-  ----      -----------
-  INPUT     Open for sequential reading. File must exist.
-  OUTPUT    Open for sequential writing. Creates or truncates.
-  APPEND    Open for sequential writing at end of file.
-  RANDOM    Open for random-access record I/O.
-  BINARY    Open for raw binary I/O.
-

CLOSE

-

Closes an open file channel.

-
CLOSE #channel
-

PRINT #

-

Writes text to a file.

-
PRINT #channel, expression
-

INPUT #

-

Reads comma-delimited data from a file.

-
INPUT #channel, variable
-

LINE INPUT #

-

Reads an entire line from a file into a string variable.

-
LINE INPUT #channel, variable$
-

WRITE #

-

Writes comma-delimited data to a file. Strings are enclosed in quotes, numbers are undecorated. Each statement writes a newline at the end.

-
WRITE #channel, expr1, expr2, ...
-
Write #1, "Scott", 42, 3.14
-' Output: "Scott",42,3.14
-

GET / PUT

-

Read and write records in RANDOM or BINARY mode files.

-
GET #channel, [recordNum], variable
-PUT #channel, [recordNum], variable
-

SEEK

-

Sets the file position. As a function, returns the current position.

-
SEEK #channel, position      ' Statement: set position
-pos = SEEK(channel)           ' Function: get current position
-
-
-

String Functions

-

String Functions

-
  Function                          Returns   Description
-  --------                          -------   -----------
-  ASC(s$)                           Integer   ASCII code of first character of s$
-  CHR$(n)                           String    Character with ASCII code n
-  FORMAT$(value, fmt$)              String    Formats a numeric value using format string
-  HEX$(n)                           String    Hexadecimal representation of n
-  INSTR(s$, find$)                  Integer   Position of find$ in s$ (1-based), 0 if not found
-  INSTR(start, s$, find$)          Integer   Search starting at position start
-  LCASE$(s$)                        String    Converts s$ to lowercase
-  LEFT$(s$, n)                      String    Leftmost n characters of s$
-  LEN(s$)                           Integer   Length of s$
-  LTRIM$(s$)                        String    Removes leading spaces from s$
-  MID$(s$, start [, length])        String    Substring from position start (1-based)
-  RIGHT$(s$, n)                     String    Rightmost n characters of s$
-  RTRIM$(s$)                        String    Removes trailing spaces from s$
-  SPACE$(n)                         String    String of n spaces
-  STR$(n)                           String    Converts number n to string
-  STRING$(n, char)                  String    String of n copies of char
-  TRIM$(s$)                         String    Removes leading and trailing spaces from s$
-  UCASE$(s$)                        String    Converts s$ to uppercase
-  VAL(s$)                           Double    Converts string s$ to a numeric value
-

MID$ Assignment

-

MID$ can also be used on the left side of an assignment to replace a portion of a string:

-
Mid$(s$, 3, 2) = "XY"    ' Replace 2 characters starting at position 3
-
-
-

Math Functions

-

Math Functions

-
  Function   Returns   Description
-  --------   -------   -----------
-  ABS(n)     Double    Absolute value of n
-  ATN(n)     Double    Arctangent of n (in radians)
-  COS(n)     Double    Cosine of n (radians)
-  EXP(n)     Double    e raised to the power n
-  FIX(n)     Integer   Truncates n toward zero (removes fractional part)
-  INT(n)     Integer   Largest integer less than or equal to n (floor)
-  LOG(n)     Double    Natural logarithm (base e) of n
-  RND[(n)]   Double    Random number between 0 (inclusive) and 1 (exclusive)
-  SGN(n)     Integer   Sign of n: -1, 0, or 1
-  SIN(n)     Double    Sine of n (radians)
-  SQR(n)     Double    Square root of n
-  TAN(n)     Double    Tangent of n (radians)
-  TIMER      Double    Number of seconds since midnight
-
Note: RND with a negative argument seeds and returns. RND(0) returns the previous value. Use RANDOMIZE to seed the generator.
-
-
-

Conversion Functions

-

Conversion Functions

-
  Function   Returns   Description
-  --------   -------   -----------
-  CDBL(n)    Double    Converts n to Double
-  CINT(n)    Integer   Converts n to Integer (with banker's rounding)
-  CLNG(n)    Long      Converts n to Long
-  CSNG(n)    Single    Converts n to Single
-  CSTR(n)    String    Converts n to its String representation
-
-
-

File I/O Functions

-

File I/O Functions

-
  Function                    Returns   Description
-  --------                    -------   -----------
-  EOF(channel)                Boolean   True if file pointer is at end of file
-  FREEFILE                    Integer   Next available file channel number
-  INPUT$(n, #channel)         String    Reads n characters from the file
-  LOC(channel)                Long      Current read/write position in the file
-  LOF(channel)                Long      Length of the file in bytes
-  SEEK(channel)               Long      Current file position (function form)
-  LBOUND(array [, dim])       Integer   Lower bound of an array dimension
-  UBOUND(array [, dim])       Integer   Upper bound of an array dimension
-
-
-

Miscellaneous Functions

-

Miscellaneous Functions

-
  Function          Returns   Description
-  --------          -------   -----------
-  DATE$             String    Current date as "MM-DD-YYYY"
-  TIME$             String    Current time as "HH:MM:SS"
-  ENVIRON$(name$)   String    Value of environment variable name$
-  ERR               Integer   Current runtime error number (0 if no error)
-
-
-

Form and Control Statements

-

Form and Control Statements

-

DVX BASIC supports Visual Basic-style forms and controls for building graphical user interfaces. Forms are defined in .frm files and loaded at runtime.

-

Loading and Unloading Forms

-
LOAD FormName
-UNLOAD FormName
-

LOAD creates the form and its controls in memory. UNLOAD destroys the form and frees its resources.

-

Showing and Hiding Forms

-
FormName.Show [modal]
-FormName.Hide
-Me.Show [modal]
-Me.Hide
-

Pass vbModal (1) to Show for a modal dialog.

-
Form2.Show vbModal
-Me.Hide
-

Property Access

-

Read and write control properties using dot notation:

-
ControlName.Property = value
-value = ControlName.Property
-
Text1.Text = "Hello"
-label1.Caption = "Name: " & name$
-x = Text1.Left
-

Method Calls

-
ControlName.Method [args]
-
List1.AddItem "New entry"
-List1.Clear
-

Me Keyword

-

Me refers to the current form. Use it to access the form's own properties, controls, and methods from within event handlers.

-
Me.Caption = "Updated Title"
-Me.Text1.Text = ""
-Me.Hide
-

Control Arrays

-

Multiple controls can share a name with unique indices. Access individual controls with parenthesized indices:

-
Option1(0).Value = True
-Label1(idx).Caption = "Item " & Str$(idx)
-Me.Label1(i).Visible = True
-

DoEvents

-

Yields control to the DVX event loop, allowing the GUI to process pending events. Call this in long-running loops to keep the UI responsive.

-
DOEVENTS
-
For i = 1 To 10000
-    ' process data
-    If i Mod 100 = 0 Then DoEvents
-Next
-

MsgBox

-

Displays a message box dialog. Can be used as a statement (discards result) or as a function (returns the button clicked).

-
MSGBOX message$ [, flags]
-result = MSGBOX(message$ [, flags])
-
MsgBox "Operation complete"
-answer = MsgBox("Continue?", vbYesNo + vbQuestion)
-If answer = vbYes Then
-    ' proceed
-End If
-

InputBox$

-

Displays an input dialog and returns the user's text entry.

-
result$ = INPUTBOX$(prompt$ [, title$ [, default$]])
-
name$ = InputBox$("Enter your name:", "Name Entry", "")
-

Event Handler Convention

-

Event handlers are named ControlName_EventName and defined as SUBs:

-
Sub Command1_Click()
-    MsgBox "Button clicked!"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Form_Load()
-    Me.Caption = "My App"
-End Sub
-
-Sub Text1_Change()
-    Label1.Caption = "You typed: " & Text1.Text
-End Sub
-

Common Events

-
  Event          Description
-  -----          -----------
-  Click          Control was clicked
-  DblClick       Control was double-clicked
-  Change         Control value/text changed
-  KeyPress       Key was pressed (receives key code)
-  KeyDown        Key went down (receives key code and shift state)
-  KeyUp          Key was released
-  MouseDown      Mouse button pressed
-  MouseUp        Mouse button released
-  MouseMove      Mouse moved over control
-  GotFocus       Control received input focus
-  LostFocus      Control lost input focus
-  Form_Load      Form is being loaded
-  Form_Unload    Form is being unloaded
-  Form_Resize    Form was resized
-  Timer          Timer interval elapsed
-
-
-

SQL Functions

-

SQL Functions

-

DVX BASIC includes built-in SQLite database support through a set of SQL functions. All functions use database handles and result set handles (integers) returned by SQLOpen and SQLQuery.

-

Opening and Closing Databases

-

SQLOpen

-

Opens a SQLite database file and returns a database handle.

-
db = SQLOPEN(path$)
-
db = SQLOpen(App.Data & "\mydata.db")
-

SQLClose

-

Closes an open database.

-
SQLCLOSE db
-

Executing SQL

-

SQLExec

-

Executes a SQL statement that does not return data (INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE TABLE, etc.). Can be used as a statement or as a function returning a Boolean success flag.

-
SQLEXEC db, sql$
-ok = SQLEXEC(db, sql$)
-
SQLExec db, "CREATE TABLE users (id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, name TEXT)"
-SQLExec db, "INSERT INTO users (name) VALUES ('Scott')"
-ok = SQLExec(db, "DELETE FROM users WHERE id = 5")
-

SQLAffected

-

Returns the number of rows affected by the last INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE.

-
count = SQLAFFECTED(db)
-

Querying Data

-

SQLQuery

-

Executes a SELECT query and returns a result set handle.

-
rs = SQLQUERY(db, sql$)
-
rs = SQLQuery(db, "SELECT id, name FROM users ORDER BY name")
-

SQLNext

-

Advances to the next row in the result set. Can be used as a statement or as a function returning True if a row is available.

-
SQLNEXT rs
-hasRow = SQLNEXT(rs)
-

SQLEof

-

Returns True if there are no more rows in the result set.

-
done = SQLEOF(rs)
-

Reading Fields

-

SQLField$

-

Returns a field value as a string. The field can be specified by column index (0-based) or by column name.

-
value$ = SQLFIELD$(rs, columnIndex)
-value$ = SQLFIELD$(rs, "columnName")
-
name$ = SQLField$(rs, "name")
-first$ = SQLField$(rs, 0)
-

SQLFieldInt

-

Returns a field value as an integer.

-
value = SQLFIELDINT(rs, columnIndex)
-

SQLFieldDbl

-

Returns a field value as a double.

-
value# = SQLFIELDDBL(rs, columnIndex)
-

SQLFieldCount

-

Returns the number of columns in the result set.

-
count = SQLFIELDCOUNT(rs)
-

Result Set Cleanup

-

SQLFreeResult

-

Frees a result set. Always call this when done iterating a query.

-
SQLFREERESULT rs
-

Error Information

-

SQLError$

-

Returns the last error message for the database.

-
msg$ = SQLERROR$(db)
-

Complete SQL Example

-
Dim db As Long
-Dim rs As Long
-
-db = SQLOpen(App.Data & "\contacts.db")
-SQLExec db, "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS contacts (name TEXT, phone TEXT)"
-SQLExec db, "INSERT INTO contacts VALUES ('Alice', '555-1234')"
-
-rs = SQLQuery(db, "SELECT name, phone FROM contacts")
-Do While Not SQLEof(rs)
-    SQLNext rs
-    Print SQLField$(rs, "name"); Tab(20); SQLField$(rs, "phone")
-Loop
-SQLFreeResult rs
-SQLClose db
-
-
-

App Object

-

App Object

-

The App object provides read-only properties for the application's directory paths.

-
  Property      Returns   Description
-  --------      -------   -----------
-  App.Path      String    Directory containing the application's executable
-  App.Config    String    Directory for application configuration files
-  App.Data      String    Directory for application data files (databases, etc.)
-
configFile$ = App.Config & "\settings.ini"
-dbPath$ = App.Data & "\myapp.db"
-Print "Running from: " & App.Path
-
-
-

INI Functions

-

INI Functions

-

DVX BASIC provides built-in functions for reading and writing standard INI configuration files.

-

IniRead

-

Reads a value from an INI file. Returns the default value if the key is not found.

-
value$ = INIREAD(file$, section$, key$, default$)
-
name$ = IniRead(App.Config & "\app.ini", "User", "Name", "Unknown")
-fontSize = Val(IniRead(App.Config & "\app.ini", "Display", "FontSize", "12"))
-

IniWrite

-

Writes a value to an INI file. Creates the file, section, or key if they do not exist.

-
INIWRITE file$, section$, key$, value$
-
IniWrite App.Config & "\app.ini", "User", "Name", "Scott"
-IniWrite App.Config & "\app.ini", "Display", "FontSize", Str$(fontSize)
-
-
-

Predefined Constants

-

Predefined Constants

-

The following constants are predefined by the compiler and available in all programs.

-

MsgBox Button Style Flags

-
  Constant        Value   Description
-  --------        -----   -----------
-  vbOKOnly        0       OK button only (default)
-  vbOKCancel      1       OK and Cancel buttons
-  vbYesNo         2       Yes and No buttons
-  vbYesNoCancel   3       Yes, No, and Cancel buttons
-  vbRetryCancel   4       Retry and Cancel buttons
-

MsgBox Icon Flags

-

Add an icon flag to the button style to display an icon in the message box.

-
  Constant        Value   Description
-  --------        -----   -----------
-  vbInformation   &H10    Information icon
-  vbExclamation   &H20    Warning icon
-  vbCritical      &H30    Error/critical icon
-  vbQuestion      &H40    Question mark icon
-

MsgBox Return Values

-
  Constant   Value   Description
-  --------   -----   -----------
-  vbOK       1       User clicked OK
-  vbCancel   2       User clicked Cancel
-  vbYes      3       User clicked Yes
-  vbNo       4       User clicked No
-  vbRetry    5       User clicked Retry
-

Show Mode Flags

-
  Constant   Value   Description
-  --------   -----   -----------
-  vbModal    1       Show form as modal dialog
-

Boolean Constants

-
  Constant   Value   Description
-  --------   -----   -----------
-  True       -1      Boolean true
-  False      0       Boolean false
-
-
- -